HP | LQH-HW 3ULQWHUV | User's Manual | HP LQH-HW 3ULQWHUV User's Manual

/LQH-HW3ULQWHUV
User’s Manual
/LQH-HW3ULQWHUV
User’s Manual
READ THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT BEFORE
USING THIS PRINTER
Software License Agreement
CAREFULLY READ THE FOLLOWING TERMS AND CONDITIONS
BEFORE USING THIS PRINTER. USING THIS PRINTER INDICATES
YOUR ACCEPTANCE OF THESE TERMS AND CONDITIONS. IF YOU DO
NOT AGREE TO THESE TERMS AND CONDITIONS, PROMPTLY RETURN
THE PRINTER AND ALL ACCOMPANYING HARDWARE AND WRITTEN
MATERIALS TO THE PLACE YOU OBTAINED THEM, AND YOUR MONEY
WILL BE REFUNDED.
Definitions.
“Software” shall mean the digitally encoded, machine-readable data and
program. The term “Software Product” includes the Software resident in the
printer and its documentation. The Software Product is licensed (not sold) to
you, and Hewlett-Packard either owns or licenses from other vendors who
own, all copyright, trade secret, patent and other proprietary rights in the
Software Product.
License.
1. Authorized Use. You agree to accept a non-exclusive license to use the
Software resident in the printer solely for your own customary business or
personal purposes.
2.
Restrictions.
a. To protect the proprietary rights of Hewlett-Packard, you agree to
maintain the Software Product and other proprietary information
concerning the typefaces in strict confidence.
b. You agree not to duplicate or copy the Software Product.
c.
You shall not sublicense, sell, lease, or otherwise transfer all or any
portion of the Software Product separate from the printer, without the
prior written consent of Hewlett-Packard.
d. You may not modify or prepare derivative works of the Software
Product.
e. You may not transmit the Software Product over a network, by
telephone, or electronically using any means; or reverse engineer,
decompile or disassemble the Software.
f.
You agree to keep confidential and use your best efforts to prevent
and protect the contents of the Software Product from unauthorized
disclosure or use.
3. Transfer. You may transfer the Software Product with the printer, but only
if the recipient agrees to accept the terms and conditions of this
Agreement. Your license is automatically terminated if you transfer the
Software Product and printer.
Limited Software Product Warranty
Hewlett-Packard warrants that for ninety (90) days after delivery, the Software
will perform in accordance with specifications published by Hewlett-Packard.
Hewlett-Packard does not warrant that the Software is free from all bugs,
errors and omissions.
Remedy
Your exclusive remedy and the sole liability of Hewlett-Packard in connection
with the Software is replacement of defective software with a copy of the
same version and revision level.
Disclaimer of Warranties and Limitation of Remedies
1. THE PARTIES AGREE THAT ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING WARRANTIES OF FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND MERCHANTABILITY ARE EXCLUDED.
Hewlett-Packard does not warrant that the functions contained in the
Software will meet your requirements or that the operation of the Software
will be uninterrupted or error free.
Hewlett-Packard reserves the right to make changes and/or
improvements in the Software without notice at any time.
2. IN NO EVENT WILL HEWLETT-PACKARD BE LIABLE FOR LOST
PROFITS, LOST DATA, BUSINESS INTERRUPTIONS, OR ANY
OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE
THIS PRODUCT, EVEN IF HEWLETT-PACKARD HAS BEEN ADVISED
OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES, OR ANY DAMAGES
CAUSED BY THE ABUSE OR MANIPULATION OF THE SOFTWARE.
SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION
OF LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES,
SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
3. Hewlett-Packard will not be liable for any loss or damage caused by delay
in furnishing a Software Product or any other performance under this
Agreement.
4. Our entire liability and your exclusive remedies for our liability of any kind
(including liability for negligence except liability for personal injury caused
solely by our negligence) for the Software Product covered by this
Agreement and all other performance or nonperformance by us under or
related to this Agreement are limited to the remedies specified by this
Agreement.
5. California law governs this Agreement.
Termination of License Agreement
This License shall continue until terminated. This license may be terminated
by agreement between you and Hewlett-Packard or by Hewlett-Packard. If
you fail to comply with the terms of this License and such failure is not
corrected within thirty (30) days after notice. When this License is terminated,
you shall return to the place you obtained them, the printer and all copies of
the Software and documentation.
U.S. Government Restricted Rights
Use, duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as
set forth in the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at
FAR 242.227-7013, subdivision (b) (3) (ii) or subparagraph (c) (1) (ii), as
appropriate. Further use, duplication or disclosure is subject to restrictions
applicable to restricted rights software as set forth in FAR 52.227-19 (c) (2).
Acknowledgment of Terms and Conditions
YOU ACKNOWLEDGE THAT YOU HAVE READ THIS AGREEMENT,
UNDERSTAND IT, AND AGREE TO BE BOUND BY ITS TERMS AND
CONDITIONS. NEITHER PARTY SHALL BE BOUND BY ANY STATEMENT
OR REPRESENTATION NOT CONTAINED IN THIS AGREEMENT. NO
CHANGE IN THIS AGREEMENT IS EFFECTIVE UNLESS WRITTEN AND
SIGNED BY PROPERLY AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVES OF EACH
PARTY. BY USING THIS PRINTER, YOU AGREE TO ACCEPT THE TERMS
AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT.
Hewlett-Packard makes no representations or warranties of any kind
regarding this material, including, but not limited to, implied warranties of
merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. Hewlett-Packard shall not
be held responsible for errors contained herein or any omissions from this
material or for any damages, whether direct, indirect, incidental or
consequential, in connection with the furnishing, distribution, performance or
use of this material. The information in this manual is subject to change
without notice.
This document contains proprietary information protected by copyright. No
part of this document may be reproduced, copied, translated or incorporated
in any other material in any form or by any means, whether manual, graphic,
electronic, mechanical or otherwise, without the prior written consent of
Hewlett-Packard.
COPYRIGHT © 2000, HEWLETT-PACKARD CO.
All rights reserved.
Hewlett-Packard Warranty Statement
1. HP warrants HP hardware, accessories and supplies against defects in
materials and workmanship for the period specified above. If HP receives
notice of such defects during the warranty period, HP will, at its option,
either repair or replace products which prove to be defective.
Replacement products may be either new or like-new.
2. HP warrants that HP software will not fail to execute its programming
instructions, for the period specified above, due to defects in material and
workmanship when properly installed and used. If HP receives notice of
such defects during the warranty period, HP will replace software media
which does not execute its programming instructions due to such defects.
3. HP does not warrant that the operation of HP products will be
uninterrupted or error free. If HP is unable, within a reasonable time, to
repair or replace any product to a condition as warranted, customer will
be entitled to a refund of the purchase price upon prompt return of the
product.
4. HP products may contain manufactured parts equivalent to new in
performance or may have been subject to incidental use.
5. The warranty period begins on the date of delivery or on the date of
installation if installed by HP. If customer schedules or delays HP
installation more than 30 days after delivery, warranty begins on the 31st
day from delivery.
6. Warranty does not apply to defects resulting from (a) improper or
inadequate maintenance or calibration, (b) software, interfacing, parts or
supplies not supplied by HP, (c) unauthorized modification or misuse, (d)
operation outside of the published environmental specifications for the
product, or (e) improper site preparation or maintenance.
7. TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE ABOVE
WARRANTIES ARE EXCLUSIVE AND NO OTHER WARRANTY OR
CONDITION, WHETHER WRITTEN OR ORAL, IS EXPRESSED OR
IMPLIED AND HP SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY,
SATISFACTORY QUALITY, AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE.
8. HP will be liable for damage to tangible property per incident up to the
greater of $300,000 or the actual amount paid for the product that is the
subject of the claim, and for damages for bodily injury or death, to the
extent that all such damages are determined by a court of competent
jurisdiction to have been directly caused by a defective HP product.
9. TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE REMEDIES IN THIS
WARRANTY STATEMENT ARE CUSTOMER’S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE
REMEDIES. EXCEPT AS INDICATED ABOVE, IN NO EVENT WILL HP
OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR LOSS OF DATA OR FOR
DIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL (INCLUDING
LOST PROFIT OR DATA), OR OTHER DAMAGE, WHETHER BASED IN
CONTRACT, TORT, OR OTHERWISE.
FOR CONSUMER TRANSACTIONS IN AUSTRALIA AND NEW
ZEALAND: THE WARRANTY TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS
STATEMENT, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT LAWFULLY PERMITTED, DO
NOT EXCLUDE, RESTRICT OR MODIFY AND ARE IN ADDITION TO
THE MANDATORY STATUTORY RIGHTS APPLICABLE TO THE SALE
OF THIS PRODUCT TO YOU.
Trademark Acknowledgments
Hewlett-Packard, HP, HP-UX, Bi-Tronics, HP in a circle, Hewlett Packard,
PCL and HP rounded rectangle are registered trademarks, and LineJet is a
trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.
AIX, AS/400, IBM, NetView, Proprinter and OS/2 are registered trademarks,
and AFP, Intelligent Printer Data Stream, IPDS, Print Services Facility, and
PSF are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation.
IBM and Proprinter are registered trademarks, and PC-DOS is a trademark of
International Business Machines Corporation.
Portions of this manual used by permission of Wyndham Technologies, Inc.
Copyright © 1991-1999 Wyndham Technologies Inc.
ANSI is a registered trademark of American National Standards Institute, Inc.
Centronics is a registered trademark of Genicom Corporation.
DEC is a registered trademark of Digital Equipment Corporation.
DG/UX is a registered trademark of Data General Corporation.
EIA is a registered trademark of the Electronic Industries Association.
ENERGY STAR is a registered trademark of the United States
Environmental Protection Agency. As an ENERGY STAR® Partner, HewlettPackard has determined that this product meets the ENERGY STAR®
guidelines for energy efficiency.
Epson is a registered trademark of Seiko Epson Corporation.
Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Corporation.
Frontier Technologies and SuperTCP are trademarks or registered
trademarks of Frontier Technologies Corporation.
FTP Software and OnNet are trademarks or registered trademarks of FTP
Software, Inc.
IGP, PGL, LinePrinter Plus, PrintNet and Printronix are registered
trademarks, and RibbonMinder is a trademark of Printronix, Inc.
IRIX is a registered trademark of Silicon Graphics, Inc.
LINUX is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds.
Magnum and QMS are registered trademarks, and Code V is a trademark of
Quality Micro Systems, Inc.
Microsoft, MS, MS-DOS, Windows, and Windows NT are registered
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
PKZIP and PKUNZIP are registered trademarks of PKWARE, Inc.
NetManage and Chameleon are trademarks or registered trademarks of
NetManage, Inc.
Netscape and Netscape Navigator are registered trademarks, and the
Netscape Communications logo is a trademark of Netscape Communications
Corporation.
Novell and NetWare are registered trademarks of Novell, Inc.
PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Inc.
Solaris is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc.
Ultrix is a registered trademark of Digital Equipment Corporation.
Unix is a registered trademark of X/Open Company Limited.
This product uses Intellifont Scalable typefaces and Intellifont technology.
Intellifont is a registered trademark of Agfa Division, Miles Incorporated
(Agfa).
CG, Garth Graphic, Intellifont, and Type Director are registered trademarks,
and Shannon and CG Triumvirate are trademarks of Agfa Division, Miles
Incorporated (Agfa). CG Bodoni, CG Century Schoolbook, CG Goudy Old
Style, CG Melliza, Microstyle, CG Omega, and CG Palacio are products of
Agfa Corporation. CG Times, based on Times New Roman under license
from The Monotype Corporation Plc is a product of Agfa.
Univers is a registered trademark of Linotype AG and/or its subsidiaries.
Letraset is a registered trademark, and Aachen, Revue and University Roman
are trademarks of Esselte Pendaflex Corporation.
Futura is a registered trademark of Fundición Tipográfica Neufville, S.A.
ITC Avant Garde Gothic, ITC Benguiat, ITC Bookman, ITC Century, ITC
Cheltenham, ITC Clearface, ITC Galliard, ITC Korinna, ITC Lubalin Graph,
ITC Souvenir, ITC Tiepolo, ITC Zapf Chancery, and ITC Zapf Dingbats are
registered trademarks of International Typeface Corporation.
Albertus, Gill Sans, and Times New Roman are registered trademarks, and
Monotype Baskerville is a trademark of The Monotype Corporation Plc,
registered in the U.S. Pat. and TM office and elsewhere.
Hiroshige and Marigold are trademarks of AlphaOmega Typography, Inc.
This document contains proprietary information protected by copyright. No
part of this document may be reproduced, copied, translated or incorporated
in any other material in any form or by any means, whether manual, graphic,
electronic, mechanical or otherwise, without the prior written consent of
Hewlett-Packard.
Hewlett-Packard makes no representations or warranties of any kind
regarding this material, including, but not limited to, implied warranties of
merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. Hewlett-Packard shall not
be held responsible for errors contained herein or any omissions from this
material or for any damages, whether direct or indirect, incidental or
consequential, in connection with the furnishing, distribution, performance, or
use of this material. The information in this manual is subject to change
without notice.
COPYRIGHT © 2000, HEWLETT-PACKARD CO.
Table of Contents
1 Introduction......................................................... 19
About This Manual............................................................................... 19
Warnings, Cautions, And Notes .................................................... 19
Printing Conventions Used In This Manual ................................... 19
Related Documents....................................................................... 20
Printer Overview .................................................................................. 21
The LineJet Printer Family ............................................................ 21
Taking Care Of Your Printer.......................................................... 23
Standard Features ........................................................................ 23
Graphics Options .......................................................................... 25
Protocols And Emulations ............................................................. 25
Line Matrix Printing ....................................................................... 26
Printing Speed............................................................................... 27
LineJet Print Server ............................................................................. 28
What Special Features Are Available?.......................................... 28
Print Server Interface .................................................................... 29
2 Downloading Function Code In LineJet
Printers ............................................................... 31
Introduction .......................................................................................... 31
Downloading In A Nutshell ............................................................ 31
Preparation For Downloading........................................................ 32
Copying Function Code To Your Computer......................................... 33
Loading Function Code To Flash Memory In The Printer.................... 34
Loading Code Through The Parallel Or Serial Port....................... 34
Loading Code Through The Ethernet Port Using ftp ..................... 36
3 Configuring The Printer ...................................... 39
Overview.............................................................................................. 39
Configuring The Printer........................................................................ 39
Operating Modes........................................................................... 42
The Configurations ........................................................................ 42
Locking And Unlocking The ENTER Key ...................................... 42
Changing And Saving Parameter Settings.................................... 43
Factory Default Configuration Values............................................ 44
Table of Contents
Changing Parameters.......................................................................... 48
Example ........................................................................................ 48
Saving Your New Configuration .................................................... 50
Printing The Current Configuration ............................................... 52
Loading Configuration Values ....................................................... 54
The Power-Up Configuration......................................................... 56
Deleting Configurations ................................................................. 58
Protecting Your Configurations ..................................................... 60
Configuring The Print Server ............................................................... 61
Connecting To The Network ......................................................... 61
Configuration Setup ...................................................................... 61
Configuration Using The Printer Control Panel ............................. 62
Configuration Alternatives ............................................................. 64
4 The Configuration Menus ................................... 67
Overview.............................................................................................. 67
Configuration Main Menu .................................................................... 68
Config. Control Menu........................................................................... 71
Active Emulation Menu ........................................................................ 73
Emulation Menu................................................................................... 74
PCL-II Emulation ........................................................................... 75
LP Plus Emulation ......................................................................... 80
P-Series Emulation ....................................................................... 84
Proprinter XL Emulation ................................................................ 87
Epson FX Emulation ..................................................................... 89
Serial Matrix Emulation ................................................................ 92
P-Series XQ Emulation ................................................................. 95
IGP/PGL Emulation ....................................................................... 97
IGP/VGL (Code V) Emulation ..................................................... 102
Maint/Misc Menu................................................................................ 109
Host Interface Menu .......................................................................... 110
Bi-Tronics Submenu.................................................................... 111
Centronics (Parallel) Submenu ................................................... 112
Serial Submenu........................................................................... 114
Ethernet Submenu ...................................................................... 117
Auto Switching Submenu ............................................................ 118
Ethernet Params Menu...................................................................... 120
Printer Control Menu.......................................................................... 121
Diagnostics Menu .............................................................................. 123
RibbonMinder .................................................................................... 126
Table of Contents
5 Approaches To Network Printing...................... 129
Overview............................................................................................ 129
Peer To Peer Networks ............................................................... 129
Print Job Servers......................................................................... 130
6 TCP/IP Configuration........................................ 131
TCP/IP LineJet Print Server Configuration ........................................ 131
Before You Begin ........................................................................ 131
Creating Aliases .......................................................................... 132
Methods For Setting TCP/IP Values ........................................... 133
Assign TCP/IP Values ................................................................. 134
Using BOOTP ............................................................................. 137
7 HP e3000/LineJet Print Server Configuration... 139
Overview............................................................................................ 139
HP e3000 / MPE-XL / MPE / iX: Host Configuration.......................... 139
LineJet Print Server Configuration Verification .................................. 142
Methods Of Adjusting Paper Position ................................................ 145
Method 1 ..................................................................................... 145
Method 2 ..................................................................................... 145
Using Page Level Recovery On LineJet Printers............................... 146
HP e3000 / MPE-XL / MPE / iX: DTC Configuration.......................... 148
MPE-XL / MPE / iX Typical Configuration ................................... 148
8 Windows Configuration..................................... 149
Overview............................................................................................ 149
Windows Environment Description .................................................... 149
Windows LineJet Print Server Configuration ..................................... 150
Mandatory ................................................................................... 150
Optional ....................................................................................... 150
Communicating Across Routers.................................................. 151
Changing Workgroup Names ...................................................... 151
Changing Destination Names...................................................... 152
Windows Host Configuration ............................................................. 153
Windows NT 3.51 Host Setup ..................................................... 153
Windows NT 4.0 Host Setup ....................................................... 154
Windows 95/98 Host Setup ......................................................... 160
Printronix Printing System (PPS) Host Setup.............................. 160
Windows 3.1 Host Setup ............................................................. 161
Table of Contents
Windows Troubleshooting Tips.......................................................... 163
LineJet Print Server Card Cannot Be Found On The Network ... 163
HTML Configuration Forms Will Not Display............................... 163
Errors Occur When Defining An LPR Printer .............................. 164
Cannot Browse The LineJet Print Server Card On The Network 164
Printer Errors When Printing Or No Output................................. 164
TCP/IP Access Problem.............................................................. 165
Web Browser/HTTP Problem ...................................................... 166
Windows NT 4.0 Host Setup Problems ....................................... 167
9 Unix Configuration ............................................ 169
Overview............................................................................................ 169
Unix Environment Description ........................................................... 170
Unix LineJet Print Server Configuration............................................. 171
Mandatory ................................................................................... 171
Optional....................................................................................... 171
Communicating Across Routers.................................................. 171
Unix Host Configuration..................................................................... 172
Printing Setup On HP-UX............................................................ 172
Printing Setup On Sys V ............................................................. 175
LPR/LPD Printing Setup On BSD Systems
(Sun 4.x, DEC‚ Ultrix‚, Free BSD, etc.)........................................ 177
FTP Printing ................................................................................ 179
Remote Shell Printing ................................................................. 179
Unix Troubleshooting Tips ................................................................. 180
Nothing Prints.............................................................................. 180
Stair-stepped Output ................................................................... 181
No Form Feed Or Extra Page Comes Out .................................. 181
10 Novell Configuration ....................................... 183
Overview............................................................................................ 183
Novell Environment Description......................................................... 184
Novell LineJet Print Server Configuration.......................................... 184
Using HTML Forms ..................................................................... 185
Novell Host Configuration .................................................................. 186
NetWare Version 3.x PSERVER Setup ...................................... 186
NetWare Version 3.x RPRINTER Setup ..................................... 188
NetWare Version 4.x PSERVER Setup ...................................... 189
NetWare Version 4.x RPRINTER Setup ..................................... 191
Table of Contents
Novell Troubleshooting Tips .............................................................. 193
NetWare 3.x - No PSERVER Connection ................................... 193
NetWare 4.x - No PSERVER Connection .................................. 194
11 Novell Configuration For 10/100Base-T
Interfaces ........................................................ 195
Overview............................................................................................ 195
Novell LineJet Print Server Configuration (10/100Base-T)................ 196
Preferred File Server (NDS & Bindery) ....................................... 197
Setting Password Security (NDS & Bindery)............................... 199
Adjusting Polling Time (NDS & Bindery) ..................................... 200
Changing The Print Server Name (NDS & Bindery).................... 201
Changing The Frame Type (NDS & Bindery).............................. 202
Changing The Print Server Mode (NDS & Bindery) .................... 203
Setting The LineJet Print Server Context (NDS) ......................... 204
Setting The Print Server Preferred NDS Tree (NDS) .................. 205
Novell Host Configuration (10/100Base-T) ........................................ 207
NDS PSERVER Setup (Netware 4.x).......................................... 207
Bindery PSERVER Setup (Netware 3.x and 4.x) ........................ 209
Referencing A Bindery Queue In NDS (Netware 3.x and 4.x)..... 209
RPRINTER/NPRINTER Setup (Netware 3.x and 4.x)................. 210
Troubleshooting (10/100Base-T) ....................................................... 212
PSERVER Setup......................................................................... 212
RPRINTER/NPRINTER Setup .................................................... 214
Printing Related........................................................................... 216
12 Commands ..................................................... 219
Command Shell Overview ................................................................. 219
Access Methods .......................................................................... 219
Main Command Shell Prefixes .................................................... 219
Getting Command Help............................................................... 219
Complete Command List ................................................................... 220
Store Commands ........................................................................ 220
Set Commands ........................................................................... 223
List Commands ........................................................................... 230
Debug Commands ...................................................................... 231
Miscellaneous Commands .......................................................... 232
Table of Contents
13 Extra Features ................................................ 235
LineJet Print Server Security ............................................................. 235
Users And Passwords ................................................................. 235
TCP Access Lists ........................................................................ 237
Printer Monitoring And Logging ......................................................... 238
Printer And Print Job Monitoring ................................................. 238
Printer Logging Through Logpaths.............................................. 239
LineJet Print Server Naming Schemes.............................................. 240
14 Interfaces ........................................................ 241
Overview............................................................................................ 241
Centronics Parallel Interface.............................................................. 242
Centronics Interface Signals ....................................................... 242
Centronics Parallel Interface Configuration................................. 243
Bi-Tronics Parallel Interface............................................................... 244
Operating Modes......................................................................... 244
The Negotiation Phase................................................................ 245
Signals ........................................................................................ 245
RS-232 And RS-422 Serial Interfaces ............................................... 248
RS-232 And RS-422 Serial Interface Signals ............................. 249
RS-232 And RS-422 Serial Interface Protocol ............................ 249
RS-232 And RS-422 Serial Interface Error Handling .................. 250
RS-232 And RS-422 Serial Interface Configuration .................... 250
15 Routine Service And Diagnostics ................... 251
Routine Service ................................................................................. 251
Exterior Cleaning......................................................................... 251
Interior Cleaning.......................................................................... 251
Diagnosing Problems......................................................................... 255
Printer Self-Tests ........................................................................ 255
Printing A Hex Dump................................................................... 257
Fault Messages ........................................................................... 259
A Printer Specifications And Regulatory
Information ....................................................... 267
Ribbon Specifications ........................................................................ 267
Printer Dimensions ............................................................................ 269
Environmental Characteristics ........................................................... 269
Electrical Characteristics ................................................................... 270
Material Safety Data Sheets .............................................................. 271
Communication Notices..................................................................... 272
Table of Contents
B Paper Specifications And Forms Design.......... 275
Introduction ........................................................................................ 275
General Paper Specifications ............................................................ 276
Paper Guidelines ............................................................................... 277
Terms And Definitions ................................................................. 277
Environmental Considerations .................................................... 279
Form Types ................................................................................. 279
Form Weight................................................................................ 279
Form Thickness........................................................................... 279
Form Evenness ........................................................................... 279
Tractor Pin Engagement ............................................................. 279
Methods Of Forms Attachment ................................................... 280
Chaff Content .............................................................................. 281
Form Design Checklist....................................................................... 282
Summary ........................................................................................... 285
Storage And Handling ................................................................. 285
C Standard ASCII Character Set......................... 287
D Monitoring Printers........................................... 289
Implementing Printer Management.................................................... 289
Agent/Manager Model ................................................................. 289
MIB .............................................................................................. 289
SNMP .......................................................................................... 290
Monitoring Tools ................................................................................ 291
Monitoring With AIX NetView/6000 ............................................. 291
Monitoring With Web JetAdmin ................................................... 291
OS/2 TCP/IP ............................................................................... 291
Setting The SNMP Community Name......................................... 291
Table of Contents
1
Introduction
About This Manual
This manual explains how to configure and perform routine service on the HP
LineJet printer for maximum efficiency.
Warnings, Cautions, And Notes
Read and comply with all information highlighted under special headings:
Warning
Warning messages call attention to situations that could hurt you or
damage the equipment.
Caution
Conditions that could damage the printer or related equipment.
Note
A note gives you helpful hints about printer operation and maintenance.
Printing Conventions Used In This Manual
•
UPPERCASE print indicates control panel keys.
Example: Press the CLEAR key, then press the ON LINE key.
•
Quotation marks (“ ”) indicate messages you see on the Liquid Crystal
Display (LCD).
Example: Press the ON LINE key. “OFFLINE” appears on the LCD.
•
The + (plus) symbol represents key combinations.
Example: “Press = + >” means to press the = (UP) key and the >
(DOWN) key at the same time.
19
Chapter
1
About This Manual
•
Command syntax and examples are formatted as follows:
•
The Courier font in boldface indicates commands that you type:
Example: $ ping ftp.HP.com
•
Regular Courier font indicates displayed results:
Example: ftp.HP.com is alive
•
Variable values are shown in italics in command syntax, output, and
in text.
Example: ping ipname
Example: ipname is alive
Related Documents
Following is a list of related documentation shipped with every LineJet printer.
•
LineJet Printers Installation Instructions, Cabinet and Pedestal Models —
Explains in a step-by-step process how to set up the printer for operation.
•
LineJet Printers Quick Reference Guide — Describes the keys on the
control panel and provides quick reference information on daily printer
operations such as loading paper and replacing ribbons. Italian, French,
German, and Spanish are included.
Note
20
This manual and the reference manuals listed below are located on the
LineJet Utilities CD shipped with your LineJet printer.
•
LineJet Printers PCL-II/LinePrinter Plus Technical Reference Manual —
Describes the host control codes and character sets for the LinePrinter
Plus® and PCL®-II emulations.
•
LineJet Printers QMS Code V Technical Reference Manual — Explains
how to write graphics programs using the optional QMS® Code V™
Printronix® emulation. This graphics programming language allows the
user to create and store forms; generate logos, bar codes, and expanded
characters; create other graphics; and merge graphics with alphanumeric
data as a document is printed.
•
LineJet Printers IGP/PGL Technical Reference Manual — Explains how
to write graphics programs using the optional PGL® Printronix IGP®
emulation. This graphics programming language allows the user to create
and store forms; generate logos, bar codes, and expanded characters;
create graphic images; and merge graphics with alphanumeric data as a
document is printed.
The LineJet Printer Family
Printer Overview
The LineJet Printer Family
The LineJet series of line matrix printers consists of 500, 1000, and 1500 lines
per minute (lpm) models packaged in various configurations. All of the models
offer software versatility and the latest refinements in line matrix printing
technology. The model numbers indicate printing speed and physical
configuration:
Table 1. The LineJet Printer Family
Serial/
Parallel
Interface
Serial/
Ethernet
Interface
Model
Number
Nameplate
Print
Speed
Pedestal
C3201D
LineJet 500P
500 lpm
á
C3202D
LineJet 500Q
500 lpm
á
C3204D
LineJet 1000Q
1000 lpm
á
á
C3205D
LineJet 1500Q
1500 lpm
á
á
C5640D
LineJet 1500Q
1500 lpm
á
á
Cabinet
Power
Stacker
á
á
á
Most line matrix printers have specialized architectures which enable the
printer to emulate, or behave like, another printer. These specialized
architectures are restricted. The LineJet printer, however, introduces an open
architecture concept that is not available on any other line matrix printer.
The LineJet printer offers the standard emulation of Hewlett-Packard’s Printer
Control Language, PCL Level II, to allow easy online programming
capabilities and compatibility with Hewlett-Packard systems.
Additionally, the LineJet printer offers the following three emulations as part of
its LinePrinter Plus grouping: Proprinter ® III XL, Epson® FX-1050, and
P-Series. No matter what emulation is configured, your printer is very easy to
use. The message display and indicator on the control panel communicate
with you directly and clearly. You can select every function on your printer at
the control panel, or you can send commands from the host computer.
21
Chapter
1
Printer Overview
C3202D
C3204D
C3205D
C5640D
C3201D
55flcab2
April 3, 2000
Figure 1. The LineJet Printers
22
Taking Care Of Your Printer
Taking Care Of Your Printer
Your printer will produce high quality print jobs if it is well taken care of.
Periodic cleaning, handling the printer properly, and using the correct printer
supplies, such as paper and ribbons, will ensure optimum performance.
Chapter 15 explains how to clean the printer, and printer supplies are listed in
Appendix A.
Whenever it is necessary to service the printer, remember these important
maintenance concepts:
•
Use only the ribbons specified in Appendix A. Use of incorrect ribbons
can cause ink migration problems, degraded print quality, and expensive
damage to the printer.
•
Incorrect closure of the forms thickness lever can cause smearing,
degraded print quality, paper jams, and damage to the platen and shuttle
assembly. Never close the forms thickness lever too tightly.
•
Excessive printing outside of the boundaries of the paper will degrade
print quality and cause hammer bank damage. Never print outside of the
paper width.
Standard Features
All of the printers offer a wide range of horizontal and vertical dot densities,
operate quietly, and can load an emulation very easily. Other features are
specified in the following sections.
Host Computer Interfaces
The following host computer interface choices are available:
•
•
•
•
•
Bi-Tronics®
RS-232 serial interface
RS-422 serial interface
Centronics®
Ethernet™ (optional on C3201D and C3202D only)
Printer Emulations
The following printer emulations (or protocols) are selectable at the control
panel:
•
•
HP® PCL-II (the default)
•
•
QMS (optional)
LP Plus, which consists of:
Printronix P-Series
Epson FX-1050
IBM® Proprinter III XL
PGL (optional)
Each emulation provides a different set of configuration menus, control codes,
and character sets.
23
Chapter
1
Printer Overview
Output Control
Depending on the active emulation, the printers have the following output
control features:
•
Four modes for printing text:
1. Correspondence (High Density)
2. Data Processing (DP) (Standard Density)
3. Sparse (high speed) (Sparse Density)
4. OCR A and OCR B
•
•
Selectable forms length and width
Character attribute specification:
1. Selectable pitch: normal, expanded, and compressed
2. Emphasized (shadow) printing
3. Automatic underlining and overscoring
4. Superscript and subscript printing
5. Double high and wide printing
•
Resident multinational character sets and bar codes
Graphics and Vertical Formatting
Several graphics and vertical formatting features are available:
•
Built-in graphics generators:
1. IBM Proprinter III XL bit-image graphics
2. Epson FX-1050 dot graphics mode
3. P-Series Plot
4. PCL raster graphics
•
Programmable electronic vertical formatting provides rapid vertical paper
movement to specified lines for printing repetitive and continuous forms.
You can choose from the following methods:
1. Vertical tabbing in Proprinter III XL and Epson FX emulation modes
2. Electronic Vertical Format Unit (EVFU) in P-Series emulation mode
3. PCL vertical forms control (VFC)
Built-in Diagnostic Tools
The following diagnostic tools are provided with the printer:
•
•
•
•
24
Comprehensive diagnostic self-tests permanently stored in the printer
Configuration printout
Data stream hex code printout
Symbol set printout
Graphics Options
Graphics Options
The PGL and QMS emulations allow you to create and store forms; generate
logos, bar codes, and expanded characters; and create other graphics.
Alphanumerics and bar code data are added as the form is printed.
These emulations are available as a customer-installed option. For more
information, contact your authorized Hewlett-Packard representative.
Protocols And Emulations
A protocol is a set of rules governing the exchange of information between the
printer and its host computer. These rules consist of codes which manipulate
and print data and allow for machine-to-machine communication. A printer
and its host computer must use the same protocol.
Most impact printers use single ASCII character codes to print text, numbers,
and punctuation marks. Some characters, both singularly and in groups of two
or more, are defined as control codes. Control codes instruct the printer to
perform specific functions, such as underlining text, printing subscripts,
setting page margins, etc. The main difference between most printer
protocols is in the characters used to create control codes and the ways in
which these characters are formatted.
When the printer executes the character and control codes of a particular
printer protocol, it is “emulating” that printer. For example, if the printer uses
the Proprinter III XL protocol, it is emulating an IBM Proprinter III XL printer; if
the printer is using the Epson FX-1050 printer protocol, it is in Epson FX-1050
emulation mode. As used in this manual, “protocol” and “emulation” mean the
same thing.
25
Chapter
1
Printer Overview
Line Matrix Printing
Your printer is an impact printer; it creates characters by printing ink dots on
paper. The dots are printed on an invisible matrix mapped in printer memory
(see Figure 2). Dot impressions are made by an array of steel hammers
mounted on a rapidly oscillating shuttle. The hammers strike the paper
through a moving ink ribbon.
Dot Column
Matrix visible only to
the printer
Dot Row
Ink dots formed by
hammer tips.
Character Row
Character Column
Figure 2. Dot Matrix Character Formation
Serial matrix printers use a moving printhead with pins to form single
characters sequentially along the printed line. Unlike serial matrix printers, the
LineJet printer is a line matrix printer. Line matrix printers divide every
printable line into horizontal dot rows, then print a dot row of the entire line at
every lateral sweep of the shuttle.
During each sweep, hammers are activated to print dots at the required
positions in the dot row. When the shuttle reaches the end of a sweep, it
reverses direction, the paper advances one dot row, and the hammers print
the next row of dots as the shuttle sweeps in the opposite direction, as shown
in Figure 3.
26
Printing Speed
After a line of characters is printed, the paper advances to the first dot row of
the next print line. This creates a number of blank rows between lines of
characters, depending on the print mode and line spacing you selected.
Direction of Shuttle Movement
Dot
Row
Start
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8*
9* *
10
Number of rows is determined by line spacing.
11
n
1
2
One
Text
Line
*
**
Paper
Feed
Direction
This row is used only for lowercase descenders.
This row is used for underlining and lowercase descenders.
Figure 3. Dot Matrix Line Printing
Printing Speed
The speed at which text prints is measured in lines per minute (lpm). This
speed is directly proportional to the number of dot rows required to produce a
character line, regardless of the number of characters in the line. More dot
rows are required to print lowercase characters with descenders;
consequently, those character lines print at a fractionally lower rate.
The printer also prints dot-addressable graphic images. The speed at which
graphics are plotted is measured in inches per minute (ipm). Unidirectional
plotting produces slightly better print quality and takes about twice as long as
bidirectional plotting. You can select either plotting mode from the control
panel.
Printing and plotting rates also vary according to the print mode you select.
Print mode refers to the way you instruct the printer to create characters. If,
for example, you select standard quality (data processing) mode, the printer
uses more dot rows to form characters than if you choose Sparse (high
speed) mode. Character formation and print speed are faster in Sparse mode,
because the printer prints fewer dot rows to form characters. Vertical dot
density is a factor in printing speed.
Nominal printing rates are charted in Appendix A.
27
Chapter
1
LineJet Print Server
LineJet Print Server
The LineJet Print Server allows you to attach printers on a local area network
(LAN) rather than attaching them directly to a host system. Following simple
configuration steps, these peripherals can be simultaneously shared with
users on the network whether you are using TCP/IP, NetBIOS over TCP/IP,
or IPX (Novell).
The LineJet Print Server contains a network interface card to attach itself and
the printer to the network. This Ethernet™ 10/100Base-T interface connector
is what allows the printer to communicate with the network, and the interface
itself has a number of options, status indicators, and switches which are
described in “Print Server Interface” on page 29.
What Special Features Are Available?
The LineJet Print Server offers an extensive list of features including:
28
•
•
•
•
built-in HTML forms for easy cross-platform configuration
•
•
Wide Area Network (WAN) communication access
•
remote management through HTML forms, Telnet sessions, rsh/
rcmd/remsh commands, SNMP, and pre-defined log methods
•
•
•
extensive built-in troubleshooting tools
•
multiple destinations/queues for versatile printer manipulation and distinct
print setups
•
•
•
•
•
header and trailer strings to instruct printers on font, pitch, printing, etc.
availability of printer manager software
a detailed and easy-to-use command shell built in to the firmware
multi-level configuration security through passwords, permission levels,
and access lists
numerous printer logging methods (e.g., automatic email) to record
printer errors and usage
built-in telnet and ping clients
configurable memory usage by disabling protocols and destination
services
flexible naming conventions
automatic network connection and frame type sensing
simultaneous printing across all I/O ports and all supported protocols
multiple network protocol support
Print Server Interface
Print Server Interface
The LineJet Print Server interface card at the rear of the printer has two
indicator lights and two dipswitches, as shown in Figure 4.
Dipswitches
1 2 Shown in OFF
(default) position
STAT (System Status)
NET (Data to Network)
Figure 4. Status Indicator Lights and Dipswitches
Run and Auto Reset Modes
Run Mode is the normal operating state of the LineJet Print Server. Auto
Reset mode is entered when the watchdog timer is triggered and the Print
Server resets itself. In either mode, the STAT LED flashes at a varying rate,
depending on whether the unit IP address is configured. The Run Mode and
Auto Reset Mode indicator descriptions are given in Table 2.
Table 2. Indicator Modes
STAT
Indication
Description
OFF
flashes on once per second
Normal Mode, IP address
configured
OFF
flashes on twice per second
IP address not configured
ON
flashes off once per second
Download (MOS)
ON
flashes off twice per second
Error
29
Chapter
1
LineJet Print Server
Network Indicator
The NET LED displays the status of the network link. When the NET LED is
on, link integrity is confirmed. The NET LED flashes off for 1/3 second when a
data packet is being transferred. When the NET LED is off, the network
connection has been severed.
Dipswitches
On the back of the interface, you will find a small window where you can
access two dipswitches labeled 1 and 2 (see Figure 4). The functions of the
dipswitches are explained in Table 3.
Table 3. Dipswitch Functions
Dipswitch
Comments
30
1
2
OFF
OFF
Normal operation. With both dipswitches in the OFF
position, the LineJet Print Server boots up using the
settings in flash memory rather than the default
settings.
ON
OFF
Factory default settings. With the dipswitches in this
configuration, the LineJet Print Server boots up and
erases all settings stored in flash memory except the
Ethernet address and key value.
OFF
ON
Default IP. With the dipswitches in this configuration,
the LineJet Print Server boots up with factory default
settings. However, the stored settings in flash memory
are intact. Setting dipswitch 2 to ON does not clear
any settings stored in flash memory; instead, it boots
the unit with the IP settings in flash memory
temporarily ignored.
ON
ON
Reserved. This dipswitch setting is not for customer
use.
2
Downloading Function
Code In LineJet Printers
Introduction
Downloading the function code is equivalent to updating firmware in the
printer. This chapter explains how to load function code into LineJet printers.
You must download function code when:
•
•
•
•
you require upgraded firmware for maintenance or other reasons;
•
you need different emulation software or buy the VGL or PGL graphics
option after the printer is installed.
the CMX controller board is replaced;
the flash memory SIMM is replaced;
the LineJet Print Server (the internal network card) is installed or
replaced;
Downloading In A Nutshell
Updating the function code in a LineJet printer consists of three tasks:
1. Obtaining the appropriate download file and loading it into the PC or
laptop you will use to download the code into the printer.
2. Obtaining the appropriate interface cable if necessary.
3. Printing all saved configurations in the printer, making the function code
upgrade, and restoring your saved printer configurations.
31
Chapter
2
Introduction
Preparation For Downloading
There are several function code files available for the LineJet printers. The file
you use depends on the model number of the printer and the printer emulation
in use.
The latest version of function code includes software trouble report fixes and
may contain additional features.
Note
Always upgrade the function code to the latest version available that meets
the minimum flash memory and DRAM SIMM sizes listed in Table 4.
To verify what function code is already installed, observe the control panel
display when the printer is online and compare it with the listing in Table 4. If a
configuration printout is available, the function code file version is printed at
the top of the configuration printout on the line that begins “Program File
Version.” For example, if the line is “Program File Version (2.07P Part No.
356351), the number “356351” is the function code download file active at the
time the configuration printout was generated.
You can download function code from a networked PC or laptop computer
which contains the function code. If the printer has the LineJet Print Server
installed (the internal network interface in most C320xD models), the function
code must be updated via the network to successfully update the LineJet Print
Server firmware. Loading function code via the network is done using the
LineJet Printer Manager software on the LineJet Utilities CD shipped with the
printer or using the file transfer protocol (ftp) procedure (described on
page 36).
Table 4. LineJet Printer / LP Series Function Code Chart
Model
C320xA
C320xB
C5640B
C320xC
C5640C
32
Description
Control Panel Displays:
(Emulation in Use)
Download
File (as
shipped)
Download
Method
Minimum
Flash/DRAM
Required
A/B printers
using PCL-II
emulation
ONLINE-PCL II (or)
ONLINE-LP PLUS
159711.exe
(Note 2)
Parallel or
Serial Port
1 MB Flash
2 MB DRAM
A/B printers
using VGL
emulation
ONLINE-PCL II / VGL
159713.exe
(Note 2)
Parallel or
Serial Port
2 MB Flash
2 MB DRAM
A/B printers
using PGL
emulation
ONLINE-LP PLUS / PGL
159712.exe
(Note 2)
Parallel or
Serial Port
2 MB Flash
2 MB DRAM
C printers using
PCL-II emulation
ONLINE-PARL / PCL II* (or)
ONLINE-PARL / LP PLUS*
353218.exe
(Notes 3 and 4)
Parallel or
Serial Port
4 MB Flash
4 MB DRAM
C printers using
VGL emulation
ONLINE-PARL / PCL II / VGL*
353220.exe
(Notes 3 and 4)
Parallel or
Serial Port
4 MB Flash
4 MB DRAM
C printers using
PGL emulation
ONLINE-PARL/LP PLUS/PGL*
353219.exe
(Notes 3 and 4)
Parallel or
Serial Port
4 MB Flash
4 MB DRAM
Preparation For Downloading
Table 4. LineJet Printer / LP Series Function Code Chart
Download
Method
Minimum
Flash/DRAM
Required
356351.exe
(Note 4)
Via Network
(Note 1)
4 MB Flash
4 MB DRAM
ONLINE-ETHERNET / LP+ (or)
ONLINE-E-NET / CODE V / PCL
356353.exe
(Note 4)
Via Network
(Note 1)
4 MB Flash
4 MB DRAM
ONLINE-ETHERNET/PGL/LP+ (or)
ONLINE-ETHERNET/PCL-II
356352.exe
(Note 4)
Via Network
(Note 1)
4 MB Flash
4 MB DRAM
Model
Description
Control Panel Displays:
(Emulation in Use)
C320xD
C5640D
(Note 1)
D printers using
PCL-II emulation
ONLINE-ETHERNET / PCL II (or)
ONLINE-ETHERNET / LP+
D printers using
VGL emulation
D printers using
PGL emulation
Download
File (as
shipped)
NOTES
*
ONLINE - SERL / PCL II or ONLINE - SERL / LP PLUS if serial port is the selected host interface
1
If the internal network card is not installed or was removed, download via the parallel or serial port. If the printer
Function Code is downloaded with the LineJet Print Server removed, or a LineJet Print Server is added to the
printer after downloading, the Ethernet port will not function with LineJet Printer Manager. In this case, do the
following:
1. Press the up/down/right/left arrow keys simultaneously. Printer displays “FACTORY / Printer Management.”
2. Press the down arrow key. Printer displays “Diagnostic Port.”
3. Press the down arrow key. Printer displays “Debug Serial.”
4. Press the right arrow key. Printer displays “Debug Ethernet.”
5. Press ENTER. Printer displays “Debug Ethernet*.” Press ONLINE to exit.
2
On an HP3000 MPE host system, if Page Level Recovery functionality is desired, the printer must be upgraded
with the latest Function Code. The printer can be upgraded to the latest Function Code (Model C320xD) if CMX
version 5.5 is present in the printer and 4 MB of Flash and 4 MB of DRAM are installed. “A” model printers may
need a new CMX , 4 MB Flash and 4 MB DRAM. “B” model printers will need 4 MB Flash and 4 MB DRAM.
To upgrade “A” or “B” model Flash memory and DRAM, do the following:
1. Remove the 1 MB Flash (P/N 202554-001) and install a 4 MB Flash (P/N 202417-001) in Bank 0 of the flash
SIMM sockets on the CMX PCA. (This is the flash socket closest to the front of the printer.)
2. “A” and “B” printers were shipped with 2 MB of DRAM (P/N 202502-001) installed in Bank 0 of the DRAM
SIMM sockets. You can add another 2 MB DRAM to the rear DRAM socket on the CMX board, filling both
sockets with 2 + 2 MB DRAM for the required total of 4 MB (the preferred) method), or you can install one 4 MB
SIMM (P/N 202412-001) in Bank 0 of the DRAM SIMM sockets.
3
Upgrade to the latest Function Code (C320xD Function Code).
4
Check with Technical Support to confirm the latest available Function Code download file.
Copying Function Code To Your Computer
In order to download function code to a printer if using a serial or parallel port,
the function code file must reside in a PC or laptop computer running any of
the following operating systems: MS-DOS®, PC-DOS™, or DOS session on
Windows 95/98, Windows NT or Windows 2000.
Note that the downloaded file, xxxxxx.exe, is a compressed executable file.
Leave the file as it is. Do not try to execute the file.
33
Chapter
2
Loading Function Code To Flash Memory In The Printer
Loading Function Code To Flash Memory In The Printer
This section contains two loading techniques:
•
•
Note
How to load function code through the parallel or serial port of the printer.
How to load function code through the Ethernet port using the file transfer
protocol (ftp).
If Ethernet is installed, you must install the code through the Ethernet port
using ftp.
Loading Code Through The Parallel Or Serial Port
1. Installing new function code erases all saved printer configurations. Make
a printout of all saved configurations. You will use the printouts to restore
printer configuration.
2. Set the printer power switch to O (off).
3. If the printer is already connected to the serial or parallel port of a
computer running PC-DOS or MS-DOS, go to step 9. If not, go to step 4.
4. Disconnect all data input cables from the printer interface.
5. Connect a parallel data cable to the LPT1 port (or a serial data cable to
the COM1 port) of an IBM-compatible computer that is using the PC-DOS
or MS-DOS operating system. The computer must contain the function
code to be downloaded. You can connect the cable to the LPT2 port if the
LPT1 is already in use.
6. Connect the data cable to the appropriate I/O port of the printer.
7. Power on the computer.
8. Check that the function code file is on the computer by listing the contents
of the directory where the function code is located. Change (CD) to the
directory that contains the function code file.
9. On the printer control panel, press and hold down the ON LINE + FF
keys. Without releasing the keys, power the printer on. Continue holding
the ON LINE + FF keys down for five seconds, then release them. Wait
until you see “WAITING FOR PROGRAM DOWNLOAD” on the LCD.
10. If you are downloading via the parallel port go to step 13; otherwise, press
the < (NEXT) key; “SELECT DOWNLOAD PORT=DATAPRODUCT”
appears on the LCD.
11. Press < (NEXT) again to cycle through the download ports available in
the printer:
DATAPRODUCT (parallel)
CENTRONICS* (parallel) (default port)
RS232-9600 (RS-232 serial, 9600 baud. This is the only rate older
versions of DOS can use.)
RS232-19.2K (RS-232 serial, 19200 baud)
34
Loading Code Through The Parallel Or Serial Port
RS232-38.4K (RS-232 serial, 38400 baud)
RS232-115K (RS-232 serial, 115000 baud)
RS422-9600 (RS-422 serial, 9600 baud)
RS422-19.2 (RS-422 serial, 19200 baud)
RS422-38.4K (RS-422 serial, 38400 baud)
RS422-115K (RS-422 serial, 115000 baud)
12. When the printer download port you want to use is displayed on the LCD,
press ENTER. “WAITING DOWNLOAD / PORT = <your selection>”
appears on the display.
13. Select the download command appropriate to the port being used, as
follows:
Parallel Port LPT1 is used:
At the DOS prompt on the computer type:
filename.exe -pb<Return>
Where filename is a function code file, such as “356351.exe -pb”.
This command decompresses the file and copies it as a binary file into the
printer’s flash memory.Parallel Port LPT2 is used:
At the DOS prompt on the computer type:
filename.exe -pb 2<Return>
Where filename is a function code file, such as
“356351.exe -pb 2”. This command decompresses the file and
copies it as a binary file into the printer’s flash memory.
Serial Port is used:
The baud rate information you enter in the following DOS commands
must match the selection you made in step 11. The 9600 baud rate is the
only selection older versions of DOS can use.
At the DOS prompt on the computer type:
MODE COM1:9600,N,8,1,P<Return>
filename.exe -pbc1<Return>
Where filename is a function code file, such as “356351.exe -pbc1”.
This command decompresses the file and copies it as a binary file into the
printer’s flash memory.
Caution
Do not interrupt the downloading process once it has started.
Interrupting a download will damage the flash memory on the
controller board and Print Server card (if installed).
14. While the file is copied into memory, the printer LCD informs you of the
load process and status. (Messages are explained in Table 21, page
260.) When the new function code has successfully loaded into flash
memory and the printer has reset itself (the LCD momentarily goes
blank), the printer will put itself in ONLINE mode.
35
Chapter
2
Loading Function Code To Flash Memory In The Printer
15. If you had to install a data cable to the computer and printer in step 5,
disconnect it from the computer and printer.
16. Using the configuration printout(s) you made in step 1, reconfigure the
printer. Be sure to designate the correct Power-up configuration (see
Chapter 4, “The Configuration Menus” for more information).
17. Power the printer off then on to verify that the correct saved configuration
loads on power up.
18. Reconnect the printer data cable(s) and have the customer send a file to
the printer to verify the host connection and configuration.
Loading Code Through The Ethernet Port Using ftp
You can download function code from a networked PC or file server to the
printer’s flash memory using the LineJet Print Server (the internal network
card) port. You must use this method to update the firmware on the LineJet
Print Server.
The IP address of the printer will be used to download the function code.
1. Installing new function code erases all saved printer configurations. Make
a printout of all saved configurations. You will use the printouts to restore
printer configuration.
2. Set the printer power switch to O (off).
3. On the printer control panel, press and hold down the ON LINE + FF
keys. Without releasing the keys, power the printer on. Continue holding
the ON LINE + FF keys down for five seconds, then release them. Wait
until you see “WAITING FOR PROGRAM DOWNLOAD” on the LCD.
4. Check that the function code file is on the computer by listing the contents
of the directory where the function code is located. Change (CD) to the
directory that contains the function code file.
5. Decompress the executable function code file on the hard drive of the
computer by typing the following at the DOS prompt:
filename.exe<Return>
Where filename is the function code file (e.g., 356351.exe). This
command decompresses the file and creates a file called
filename.prg (e.g., 356351.prg) in the same directory.
6. Identify the target printer’s IP Address from the Configuration Printouts
you made in step 1.
7. Start the ftp (file transfer protocol) process by typing the following at the
DOS prompt:
ftp xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx<Return>
Where xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx represents the IP Address of the printer.
Typically, leading zeros are not entered. For example, address
134.039.090.191 would be entered as 134.39.90.191.
36
Loading Code Through The Ethernet Port Using ftp
8. Log in to the printer and at the user prompt type:
root<Return>
Default is no password. If the ftp program prompts you for a password,
contact the system administrator.
9. When you are logged in, type the following sequence at the DOS prompt
to download filename.prg to the printer:
cd dest<Return>
cd d4prn<Return> (Use d4prn to avoid potential conflict with
backchannel if d1prn is used.)
bin<Return>
put filename.prg<Return>
Caution
Do not interrupt the downloading process once it has started.
Interrupting a download will damage the flash memory on the
controller board and Print Server card.
10. As the file downloads, the ftp program shows the progress as a
percentage, as does the display on the control panel of the printer. When
the download is complete, the printer will be placed ONLINE. Exit the ftp
program by typing:
quit<Return>
11. When the new program has successfully loaded into flash memory and
the printer has reset itself and is ONLINE / E-Net Ready, reconfigure the
printer using the configuration printout(s) you made in step 1. Remember
to designate the correct Power On configuration.
Note
If the ON LINE key is pressed before the display reads “E-Net Ready,” the
Ethernet PCA may not initialize properly, resulting in all zeroes for the IP
address. In this case, power off then on and wait for “E-Net Ready” to
display before pressing any keys.
12. Power the printer off then on to verify the correct saved configuration
loads at power up.
13. Reconnect the printer data cable(s).
37
Chapter
38
2
Loading Function Code To Flash Memory In The Printer
3
Configuring The Printer
Overview
Note
Configuration directly affects printer operation. Do not change the
configuration of your printer until you are thoroughly familiar with the
procedures in this chapter.
This chapter is a tutorial that explains how to configure the LineJet printer and
LineJet Print Server.
Configuring The Printer
In order to print data, the printer must respond correctly to signals and
commands received from the host computer. Configuration is the process of
matching the printer’s operating characteristics to those of the host computer
and to specific tasks, such as printing labels, or printing on different sizes of
paper.
The characteristics that define the printer’s response to signals and
commands received from the host computer are called configuration
parameters.
A configuration consists of all the parameters under the Active Emulation,
Emulation, Maint/Misc., Host Interface, Printer Control, and Diagnostics
menus. Chapter 4 describes the configuration submenus and their
parameters in more detail.
You configure the printer by pressing keys on the control panel (Figure 5) or
by sending control codes from the host computer. This chapter explains how
to change parameters and save, print, and load configurations with the control
panel. All of the keys are described in detail in the LineJet Printers Quick
Reference Guide which is shipped with each printer.
39
Chapter
3
Configuring The Printer
Cabinet Model
Status Indicator
Message Display
CLEAR
UP
SHIFT
PREV
NEXT
SET TOF
ON LINE
DOWN
L.P.I. ADJ
LF
FF
VIEW
ENTER
PAGE L ADJ
Primary Keys
Secondary Keys
(Raise the printer cover
to access these keys.)
Pedestal Model
Status Indicator
Message Display
Up
Set
TOF
L.P.I.
Adj
Down
On Line FF
Prev
Next
Shift
Clear
Enter
Page
L Adj
55opspnl
April 3, 2000
Primary Keys
Secondary Keys
(Raise the printer cover
to access these keys.)
Figure 5. The Control Panels
40
LF View
OFFLINE
CONFIG.
CONTROL
page 71
Load Config.
Save Config.
Print Config.
Delete Config.
Power-Up Config.
Protect Configs.
ETHERNET
PARAMS3
page 120
IP Address
Gateway Address
Subnet Mask
MAC Address
Novell Protocol
NetBIOS Protocol
Novell Frame
PPM Port Number
PPM Port Timeout
Ethernet Speed
ACTIVE
EMULATION1
page 73
EMULATION
MAINT/MISC
page 74
page 109
PCL-II*
LP PLUS
IGP/PGL & LP+
IGP/VGL & LP+
PCL-II*
LP PLUS2
IGP/PGL & LP+3
IGP/VGL & LP+3
PRINTER
CONTROL
page 121
DIAGNOSTICS
page 123
Unidirectional
PMD Fault
Slow Paper Slew
Power Saver Time
Printer Tests
Test Width
Paper Out Dots
System Memory
Print Statistics
Hex Dump Mode
Power-up State
Display Language
Power Stacker3
Choices available are limited to the emulations
installed on the printer.
2 Appears
only if LP Plus is the active emulation.
3 Appears
only if installed.
Bi-Tronics*
Centronics
Serial
Ethernet3
Auto Switching
RIBBON
MINDER
page 126
New Ribbon
Ribbon Action
Ribbon Size
Ribbon Adjust
Fault Action
To view options, press:
1
HOST
INTERFACE
page 110
6 Down
5 Up
4 Next
3 Prev
To select an option, press ENTER.
To return to main menu, press
CLEAR.
To exit menu, press ON LINE.
* = Default Setting
Figure 6. Configuration Menu Overview
41
Chapter
3
Configuring The Printer
Operating Modes
The printer has two operating modes: online and offline. When the printer is
online, it is controlled by the host computer and prints data sent by the host
computer. When the printer is offline, communication with the host is
interrupted so you can load paper, change ribbons, or test and configure the
printer.
Activate configuration settings with the ENTER key, which enters your new
setting into printer memory. An asterisk (*) after a displayed setting shows it is
entered into memory.
If pressing ENTER to select a parameter produces no result, press DOWN to
move to the next lower level. For example, if you press ENTER while
CONFIG. CONTROL/ Print Config. displays, nothing will happen because
another level exists below this selection. Press DOWN and the “Current”
option displays. To cycle through the choices (Current, Factory, Power-Up,
etc.), press the NEXT or PREV keys. Press ENTER and the selected
configuration will print.
The Configurations
A configuration consists of a group of parameters, such as line spacing, forms
length, etc. Your printer contains the following configurations:
•
The factory default configuration. It can be loaded, but cannot be altered.
All of the parameters and their values are listed on page 44.
•
Eight configurations that you can customize for unique print job
requirements. Creating customized configurations is explained on
page 48.
Locking And Unlocking The ENTER Key
To make configuration changes, you must unlock the ENTER key. With the
printer offline, raise the printer cover and press the UP and DOWN keys
simultaneously. The LCD will show this message for about a second:
ENTER SWITCH
UNLOCKED
When you lock the ENTER key, your configuration settings are fixed and
cannot be altered. (Locking secures your settings.)
With the printer offline, raise the printer cover and press the UP and DOWN
keys simultaneously to lock the ENTER key. The LCD will briefly show this
message:
ENTER SWITCH
LOCKED
42
Changing And Saving Parameter Settings
Changing And Saving Parameter Settings
You can change a parameter setting, such as line spacing or forms length, by
pressing keys on the control panel or by sending emulation control codes in
the host data stream.
When you change a parameter, it is active as long as the printer is on. This is
true whether you used the control panel or sent a control code from the host.
If you use the control panel, you can save the parameters as a customized
configuration. A configuration consists of a group of parameters. A saved
configuration will not be lost if you turn off the printer.
You can change a parameter with a control code, but to save the parameter
setting you must use the control panel.
Control codes override control panel parameters. For example, if you set the
line spacing to 6 lpi with the control panel, and application software later
changes this to 8 lpi with a control code, the control code setting overrides the
control panel setting.
The 8 lpi parameter is effective as long as the printer is on. If you turn off the
printer, the 8 lpi parameter will be erased. To save the parameter, you must
use the control panel and save it as a configuration.
You can save up to eight configurations.
Changing parameters is described on page 48, and saving configurations is
described on page 50.
43
Chapter
3
Configuring The Printer
Factory Default Configuration Values
The factory default values are permanently stored in memory as a
configuration and cannot be modified or erased. The configuration values for
the Bi-Tronics parallel interface and Print Server (Ethernet) interface are
displayed on the following pages.
Bi-Tronics Parallel Interface
ACTIVE EMULATION
PCL-II
Primary Char. set
ID
Symbol Set
Pitch
Density
Second Char. set
ID
Symbol Set
Pitch
Density
Page Length Rep.
Max. Line Width
Face, CPI Delay
Graphics Density
Perforation Skip
Display Functns
Line Terminator
LF After CR
CR After LF
CR after FF
CR After VT
PTX Linefeed
LPI Adjust
Page L./Lines
Page L./Inches
Config. Print
Symbol Set Print
Reset Cmd CFG Ld
LP PLUS
Printer Protocol
P-Series
Control Code 06
Control Code 08
Define CR Code
Auto LF
Overstrike
Define LF code
Select SFCC
EVFU Select
Alt. Set 80-9F
Character Set
IBM PC
Primary Subset
Extended Subset
SFCC d command
CPI/LPI Select
Select CPI
Select LPI
44
PCL-II
0
Roman-8 [8U]
10.00
Data Processing
0
Roman-8 [8U]
10.00
Data Processing
Inches/Page
13.2 inches
Enable
60 DPI
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Enable
Disable
6 LPI
66 Lines
11.0 Inches
Power Up Config
8.0 LPI
Elongated
CR = CR
Disable
Enable
LF = CR + LF
1
Enable
Control Code
ASCII (USA)
Code Page 437
Even dot plot
10.0 CPI
6.0 LPI
Factory Default Configuration Values
Font Attributes
Typeface
Prop. Spacing
Bold Print
Italic Print
Slashed Zero
Page Format
Form Length
Abs. Length IN
Abs. Length MM
Funct. of lines
Form Width
Abs. Width IN
Abs. Width MM
Function of CPI
Margins
Left Margin
Right Margin
Bottom Margin
Perforation Skip
MAINT / MISC
Hex Dump Mode
Power-up State
Display Language
Power Stacker
HOST INTERFACE
Bi-Tronics
Prime Signal
TOF Action
Buffer Size in K
PRINTER CONTROL
Unidirectional
PMD Fault
Slow Paper Slew
Power Saver Time
DIAGNOSTICS
Printer Tests
Test Width
Paper Out Dots
System Memory
Print Statistics
On:
Print:
Print Strokes
Print Lines
11 inch Pages
RIBBONMINDER
New Ribbon
Ribbon Action
Ribbon Size
Ribbon Adjust
Fault Action
Data Processing
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
11.0 inches
279.4 mm
66 lines
13.6 inches
345.4 mm
136 characters
0 columns
0 columns
0 lines
Disable
Disable
Online
English
Enable
Disable
Reset
1
Disable
Enable
Disable
15 min
Shift Recycle
Full Width
40 dots
x Megabytes
x.x Hrs
x.x Hrs
x
x
x
Disable
60 yards
0
New Ribbon
45
Chapter
3
Configuring The Printer
Print Server (Ethernet) Interface
ACTIVE EMULATION
PCL-II
Primary Char. set
ID
Symbol Set
Pitch
Density
Second Char. set
ID
Symbol Set
Pitch
Density
Page Length Rep.
Max. Line Width
Face, CPI Delay
Graphics Density
Perforation Skip
Display Functns
Line Terminator
LF After CR
CR After LF
CR after FF
CR After VT
PTX Linefeed
LPI Adjust
Page L./Lines
Page L./Inches
Config. Print
Symbol Set Print
Reset Cmd CFG Ld
LP PLUS
Printer Protocol
P-Series
Control Code 06
Control Code 08
Define CR Code
Auto LF
Overstrike
Define LF code
Select SFCC
EVFU Select
Alt. Set 80-9F
Character Set
IBM PC
Primary Subset
Extended Subset
SFCC d command
CPI/LPI Select
Select CPI
Select LPI
Font Attributes
Typeface
Prop. Spacing
Bold Print
Italic Print
Slashed Zero
46
PCL-II
0
Roman-8 [8U]
10.00
Data Processing
0
Roman-8 [8U]
10.00
Data Processing
Inches/Page
13.2 inches
Enable
60 DPI
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Enable
Disable
6 LPI
66 Lines
11.0 Inches
Power Up Config
8.0 LPI
Elongated
CR = CR
Disable
Enable
LF = CR + LF
1
Enable
Control Code
ASCII (USA)
Code Page 437
Even dot plot
10.0 CPI
6.0 LPI
Data Processing
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Factory Default Configuration Values
Page Format
Form Length
Abs. Length IN
Abs. Length MM
Funct. of lines
Form Width
Abs. Width IN
Abs. Width MM
Function of CPI
Margins
Left Margin
Right Margin
Bottom Margin
Perforation Skip
MAINT / MISC
Hex Dump Mode
Power-up State
Display Language
Power Stacker
HOST INTERFACE
Ethernet
Buffer Size in K
ETHERNET PARAMS
IP Address
Gateway Address
Subnet Mask
MAC Address
Novell Protocol
NetBIOS Protocol
Novell Frame
PPM Port Number
PPM Port Timeout
Ethernet Speed
PRINTER CONTROL
Unidirectional
PMD Fault
Slow Paper Slew
Power Saver Time
DIAGNOSTICS
Printer Tests
Test Width
Paper Out Dots
System Memory
Print Statistics
On:
Print:
Print Strokes
Print Lines
11 inch Pages
RIBBONMINDER
New Ribbon
Ribbon Action
Ribbon Size
Ribbon Adjust
Fault Action
11.0 inches
279.4 mm
66 lines
13.6 inches
345.4 mm
136 characters
0 columns
0 columns
0 lines
Disable
Disable
Online
English
Enable
1
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
hhhhhhhhhhhh
Disable
Disable
Ethernet 802.2
3001
100 seconds
Auto Select
Disable
Enable
Disable
15 min
Shift Recycle
Full Width
40 dots
x Megabytes
x.x Hrs
x.x Hrs
x
x
x
Disable
60 yards
0
New Ribbon
47
Chapter
3
Changing Parameters
Changing Parameters
A configuration consists of several parameters. The factory configuration is
PCL-II emulation using the Bi-Tronics interface. You can keep this
configuration to print your jobs, or if your print job requires a different setting
such as a serial interface, follow the procedure outlined in Table 5.
Example
The example below describes how to change the Unidirectional parameter
from disable to enable. Use this example as a basic guideline to move
throughout the configuration menu and change other parameters.
Figure 6 on page 41 shows the top level of the configuration menu. The
submenus are shown in Chapter 4.
If the configuration has already been changed and you do not know what the
current configuration is, print a copy (page 52). Then decide if you must
change any parameters.
* = Factory Default
OFFLINE
CONFIG.
CONTROL
...
PRINTER
CONTROL
Unidirectional
Disable*
Enable
Note
PMD Fault
Enable*
Disable
Slow Paper
Slew
Disable*
Enable
Power Saver
Time
15* - 60 Min.
Instant
Once you change active emulations, any changes to the previously
selected emulation will be gone unless they have been saved.
Table 5. Parameter Change Example Procedure
Step
1.
2.
48
Key
Result
Notes
Make sure the printer is on. Raise the printer cover (on cabinet models).
ON LINE
OFFLINE
CONFIG. CONTROL
Example
Table 5. Parameter Change Example Procedure (continued)
Step
3.
Key
Result
ENTER SWITCH
UNLOCKED
+
Notes
Allows you to make configuration
changes.
OFFLINE
CONFIG. CONTROL
4.
UNTIL
5.
PRINTER CONTROL
Unidirectional
6.
Unidirectional
Disable*
7.
OR
8.
OFFLINE
PRINTER CONTROL
ENTER
Unidirectional
Enable
Unidirectional
Enable*
Cycle through the choices.
An asterisk (*) indicates this
choice is active.
TO SAVE YOUR CHANGES AS A CONFIGURATION THAT IS STORED IN MEMORY:
1.
UNTIL
2.
3.
UNTIL
OFFLINE
PRINTER CONTROL
OFFLINE
CONFIG. CONTROL
Go to the CONFIG. CONTROL submenu Save Config. option, as described on
page 51.
TO USE THE CURRENT CONFIGURATION WITHOUT SAVING:
1.
2.
3.
+
ON LINE
ENTER SWITCH
LOCKED
ONLINE
On cabinet models, close the printer cover. The printer is ready for operation. All
parameters are effective as long as the printer is on. When you turn off the printer, the
parameters will be erased from memory.
49
Chapter
3
Changing Parameters
Saving Your New Configuration
* = Factory Default
CONFIG.
CONTROL
Load Config.
Save Config.
Print Config.
Delete Config.
Power-Up
Config.
Protect
Configs.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
A configuration must be saved in order to load it later. You can save up to
eight configurations to meet different print job requirements. For example:
Config 1:
Selects Standard density, 10 CPI, 6 LPI, 11-inch forms
Config 2:
Selects Sparse density, 10 CPI, 8 LPI, 8-inch forms
The configurations are saved and stored in memory; they will not be lost if you
power off the printer. Later, you can load one of the configurations for a
specific print job. This eliminates the need to change settings (LPI, forms
length, etc.) for each new job. See page 54 for information about loading
configurations. You may want to print your configurations (page 52) and store
them in a safe place, such as inside the printer cabinet.
If you are going to change and save parameters for both the PCL-II and
LinePrinter Plus emulations, remember to save the changes for the PCL-II
emulation before you select LP Plus as the active emulation (page 73) or vice
versa. Once you change active emulations, any changes to the previously
selected emulation will be erased unless they have been saved.
If you do not save your configuration before you turn off the printer, all of the
new parameters will be erased. When you turn the printer on again, the
power-up configuration will load. If no configurations have been designated as
the power-up configuration, the factory configuration will load.
If the Protect Configs. parameter is enabled, the new configuration will not be
saved unless the existing configuration has been deleted. See page 60 for
details.
50
Saving Your New Configuration
Table 6. Saving Configurations
Step
1.
2.
3.
Key
Result
Notes
Make sure the printer is on. Raise the printer cover (on cabinet models).
ON LINE
OFFLINE
CONFIG. CONTROL
ENTER SWITCH
UNLOCKED
+
Allows you to make configuration
changes.
OFFLINE
CONFIG. CONTROL
4.
CONFIG. CONTROL
Load Config.
5.
UNTIL
6.
CONFIG. CONTROL
Save Config.
Save Config.
1*
7.
OR
Save Config.
2
Press until the desired number
(1-8) displays.
NOTE: Do not turn off the printer while save is in progress because you might lose your
configuration.
8.
ENTER
9.
UNTIL
Save Config.
2*
The configuration is now saved in
memory. (In this case, config. 2.)
CONFIG. CONTROL
Save Config.
NOTE: It is recommended you print the configuration (see page 53 for the procedure). If you
decide not to print the configuration, then continue with the following steps.
10.
11.
12.
+
ON LINE
ENTER SWITCH
LOCKED
Locks the ENTER key.
ONLINE
Close the printer cover. The printer is ready for operation.
51
Chapter
3
Changing Parameters
Printing The Current Configuration
* = Factory Default
CONFIG.
CONTROL
Load Config.
Save Config.
Print Config.
Delete Config.
Power-Up
Config.
Protect
Configs.
Current*
Factory
Power-Up
All
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
The configuration printout lists the stored parameters. You can print any or all
of the configurations shown above. Configurations 1-8 are the customized
configurations.
To print a configuration, follow the procedure in Table 7.
Note
52
It is recommended that you print all of the configurations and store them in
a safe place, such as inside the printer cabinet, for future reference.
Printing The Current Configuration
Table 7. Printing Configurations
Step
1.
2.
3.
Key
Result
Notes
Make sure the printer is on. Raise the printer cover (on cabinet models).
ON LINE
OFFLINE
CONFIG. CONTROL
ENTER SWITCH
UNLOCKED
+
Allows you to make configuration
changes.
OFFLINE
CONFIG. CONTROL
4.
CONFIG. CONTROL
Load Config.
5.
UNTIL
6.
Print Config.
Current*
7.
OR
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
CONFIG. CONTROL
Print Config.
ENTER
Print Config.
All
Press until the desired option
displays.
OFFLINE
CONFIG. CONTROL
The configuration listing begins
printing.
Carefully tear off the configuration printout.
+
ON LINE
ENTER SWITCH
LOCKED
Locks the ENTER key.
ONLINE
Close the printer cover. Store the printout in a safe place. The printer is ready for
operation.
53
Chapter
3
Changing Parameters
Loading Configuration Values
* = Factory Default
CONFIG.
CONTROL
Load Config.
Save Config.
Print Config.
Delete Config.
Power-Up
Config.
Protect
Configs.
0*
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
You can load any of the eight customized configurations or the factory default
configuration, Configuration 0. Its list of parameters begins on page 44.
The loaded configuration remains active as long as the printer is on. If you
power off the printer, the power-up configuration will load when power is
turned back on. Any of the eight customized configurations can be designated
as the power-up configuration.
The procedure in Table 9 explains how to select the power-up configuration. If
you do not set a power-up configuration, the factory default configuration will
load if you power the printer off and then power it back on.
Note
54
A configuration must be saved first in order to load it.
Loading Configuration Values
Table 8. Loading Configurations
Step
1.
2.
3.
Key
Result
Notes
Make sure the printer is on. Raise the printer cover (on cabinet models).
ON LINE
+
OFFLINE
CONFIG. CONTROL
ENTER SWITCH
UNLOCKED
Allows you to make configuration
changes.
OFFLINE
CONFIG. CONTROL
4.
CONFIG. CONTROL
Load Config.
5.
Load Config.
1*
6.
OR
7.
ENTER
Load Config.
4
Loading Saved
Configuration
Load Config.
4*
8.
9.
10.
+
ON LINE
ENTER SWITCH
LOCKED
Press until the desired number
(1-8) displays.
Displays for about a second.
The printer has loaded the
configuration.
Locks the ENTER key.
ONLINE
Close the printer cover. The printer is ready for operation.
55
Chapter
3
Changing Parameters
The Power-Up Configuration
* = Factory Default
CONFIG.
CONTROL
Load Config.
Save Config.
Print Config.
Delete Config.
Power-Up
Config.
Protect
Configs.
0*
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
When you power on the printer for the first time, it loads configuration 0 which
is the factory default configuration.
If you save a configuration, such as configuration 1, and turn the power off
and then back on, the printer will load the designated power-up configuration,
not the last saved configuration.
For your convenience, you can specify which configuration (0-8) should be
the power-up configuration.
56
The Power-Up Configuration
Table 9. Setting The Power-Up Configuration
Step
1.
2.
3.
Key
Result
Notes
Make sure the printer is on. Raise the printer cover (on cabinet models).
ON LINE
OFFLINE
CONFIG. CONTROL
ENTER SWITCH
UNLOCKED
+
Allows you to make configuration
changes.
OFFLINE
CONFIG. CONTROL
4.
CONFIG. CONTROL
Load Config.
5.
UNTIL
6.
Power-Up Config.
0*
7.
OR
8.
9.
10.
11.
CONFIG. CONTROL
Power-Up Config.
ENTER
+
ON LINE
Power-Up Config.
6
Press until the desired number
(1-8) displays.
Power-Up Config.
6*
The printer has selected the
desired configuration.
ENTER SWITCH
LOCKED
Locks the ENTER key.
ONLINE
Close the printer cover. The printer is ready for operation.
57
Chapter
3
Changing Parameters
Deleting Configurations
* = Factory Default
CONFIG.
CONTROL
Load Config.
Save Config.
Print Config.
Delete Config.
Power-Up
Config.
Protect
Configs.
1*
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
You can delete any of your customized configurations. You cannot, however,
delete the configuration 0, which is the factory preset configuration.
The Protect Configs. parameter must be set to disable before you may delete
a configuration (see page 60).
58
Deleting Configurations
Table 10. Deleting Configurations
Step
1.
2.
3.
Key
Result
Notes
Make sure the printer is on. Raise the printer cover (on cabinet models).
ON LINE
OFFLINE
CONFIG. CONTROL
ENTER SWITCH
UNLOCKED
+
Allows you to make configuration
changes.
OFFLINE
CONFIG. CONTROL
4.
CONFIG. CONTROL
Load Config.
5.
UNTIL
6.
Delete Config.
1*
7.
OR
8.
CONFIG. CONTROL
Delete Config.
ENTER
Delete Config.
3
Deleting Configuration
Press until the desired number
(1-8) displays.
The printer has deleted the
selected configuration.
Delete Config.
3*
9.
10.
11.
+
ON LINE
ENTER SWITCH
LOCKED
Locks the ENTER key.
ONLINE
Close the printer cover. The printer is ready for operation.
59
Chapter
3
Changing Parameters
Protecting Your Configurations
* = Factory Default
CONFIG.
CONTROL
Load Config.
Save Config.
Print Config.
Delete Config.
Power-Up
Config.
Protect
Configs.
Disable*
Enable
In order to save or delete a configuration you must set the Protect Configs.
option to disable.
60
Connecting To The Network
Configuring The Print Server
Connecting To The Network
To attach the LineJet Print Server card to a network, plug the network cable
into the LineJet Print Server connector (see Figure 7).
Watch the LEDs in the rear of the printer as they cycle through the power on
self-test. When the test is complete, the STAT led will flash.
$
$
Network Connector
Figure 7. Physical Setup
Configuration Setup
There are two parts to a LineJet Print Server setup:
1. Configuring the LineJet Print Server card so it can be seen on the
network. This involves network related settings (e.g., an IP address within
TCP/IP environments) configured through the built-in command shell,
npsh, or from the control panel.
61
Chapter
3
Configuring The Print Server
2. Configuring a host with a new printer so it knows how to send data to the
LineJet Print Server. Just being able to see the printer on the network
does not mean you can automatically print to it. A host has to be told
where to send the data.
Note
Some network environments do not require any network settings to be
configured on the LineJet Print Server card. However, all network setups
require configuration on the host end.
Configuration Using The Printer Control Panel
The LineJet Print Server settings can be set from the printer control panel.
The procedure is described below.
Note
When the printer is first powered on, the messages “Waiting for the
Ethernet Adapter” and “Ethernet Detected” will display on the LCD. After
several other boot messages appear, the LCD will display the message
“E-NET INIT.” This initialization process will take about two minutes.
During that time, you will not be able to change any printer settings from
the control panel. If you attempt to do so, the message “Please Wait
E-NET INIT.” will appear. When the initialization is complete, the message
“E-NET READY” will display, and you may then change any PrintNet or
other printer configuration options from the control panel.
You can set any of three listed parameters from the printer control panel.
These parameters are located in the ETHERNET PARAMS menu. The
available parameters are:
•
•
•
IP Address
Gateway Address
Subnet Mask
The procedure for changing any of the parameters is the same. The
procedure for changing the IP Address is given here as an example. Use the
same procedure for the other required parameters.
To change the IP Address parameter:
1. Make sure the printer is on and raise the printer cover.
2. Press the ON LINE key to place the printer in the OFFLINE mode.
3. Unlock the ENTER key. (For instructions, refer to “Locking And Unlocking
The ENTER Key” on page 42.)
4. Press the LEFT or RIGHT arrow key until the LCD displays “ETHERNET
PARAMS.”
5. Press the DOWN arrow key to access the “IP Address” parameter.
6. Press the DOWN arrow key to view the current IP Address.
7. Press the DOWN arrow key to access the portion of the IP Address to be
changed.
62
Configuration Using The Printer Control Panel
8. Press the LEFT or RIGHT arrow key to select the portion of the IP
Address to be changed.
9. Press the DOWN arrow key.
10. Press the LEFT or RIGHT arrow key to select the desired value.
11. Press the ENTER key to make the selection. An asterisk appears to the
right of the value.
12. Press the UP arrow key and you will be returned to step 8. When you are
finished changing parameters, exit the configuration menus and lock the
ENTER key. (For instructions, refer to “Locking And Unlocking The
ENTER Key” on page 42.)
Caution
When a change is made from the control panel, the LineJet Print
Server is re-initialized. The messages “E-NET RESET” and “E-NET
INIT” display on the control panel. This process takes several
minutes. Make sure not to shut the printer off or make further
changes to the LineJet Print Server settings during this initialization
period to prevent a loss of LineJet Print Server configuration
information. When the initialization is complete, the message
“E-NET READY” will display.
63
Chapter
3
Configuring The Print Server
Configuration Alternatives
Besides the HTML forms and software provided, the LineJet Print Server
internal command shell, npsh, can also be reached using the following
methods.
The Print Server Manager Utility
The Print Server printer manager utility is a versatile and dynamic program. It
allows you to remotely organize all the printers in your office in a single
database; download software and printer settings from a host computer with a
single mouse click; and use a virtual operator’s panel to configure printers in
the same room or on the other side of the world.
Telnet
A TCP/IP command that helps configure LineJet Print Server settings
remotely. A TCP/IP host starts a Telnet session with the print server and logs
in to the device command shell to alter and view settings.
Example:
telnet 192.75.11.9
Remote Shell
A TCP/IP command that helps configure print server settings remotely. A
TCP/IP host uses this command to remotely execute a single command on
the LineJet Print Server.
Example:
rsh spike list prn
This command remotely executes the npsh command list prn on the
LineJet Print Server named spike.
Configuration Using a Web Browser
The LineJet Print Server settings can be configured over TCP/IP through a
standard Web browser. The LineJet Print Server Web pages provide a handy
way to access some of the commands built into the print server. You can
access online help for all HTML pages.
Note
If a router is used, make sure a gateway value is configured.
To access the LineJet Print Server home page:
1. Make sure the print server has an IP address and subnet mask so it is
recognizable on your TCP/IP network.
64
Configuration Alternatives
2. Make sure your network station can successfully ping the LineJet Print
Server over the network.
3. Direct your Web browser to the Uniform Resource Locator (URL)
http://IPaddress (e.g., http://192.75.11.9). You will be
able to determine the exact state of the printer from the printer status
screen, as the shown in Figure 8.
Figure 8. WWW Printer Status Screen
65
Chapter
66
3
Configuring The Print Server
4
The Configuration Menus
Overview
Once you have familiarized yourself with the configuration process using the
tutorial information in Chapter 3, you are ready to complete your configuration
of the printer.
This chapter provides descriptions for each parameter provided by the
configuration menus. Figure 9 shows the configuration main menu and its first
level parameters. The remainder of this chapter includes illustrations of many
additional submenus and parameters nested beneath each of the main menu
options.
67
Chapter
4
Configuration Main Menu
Configuration Main Menu
OFFLINE
CONFIG.
CONTROL
(see page 71)
Load Config.
0* - 8
Save Config.
1* - 8
Print Config.
Current*
Factory
Power-Up
All
1-8
Delete Config.
1* - 8
Power-Up Config.
0* - 8
Protect Configs.
Disable*
Enable
ACTIVE
EMULATION1
(see page 73)
EMULATION
(see page 74)
MAINT/MISC
(see page 109)
Continued on
the next page
PCL-II*
PCL-II*
Hex Dump Mode
LP PLUS
LP PLUS
Disable*
IGP/PGL & LP+
IGP/PGL & LP+
Enable
IGP/VGL (CODE-V) & LP+ IGP/VGL (CODE-V) & LP+ Power-up State
Online*
Offline
Display Language
English*
Italian
French
German
Spanish
Power Stacker2
Enable*
Disable
To view options, press:
6 Down
NOTES:
1
Choices available are limited to the emulations
configured with the printer.
2 Appears only if the power stacker option is installed.
5 Up
4 Next
3 Prev
To select an option, press ENTER.
To return to main menu, press
CLEAR.
To exit menu, press ON LINE.
* = Default Setting
Figure 9. Configuration Main Menu
68
HOST
INTERFACE
(see page 110)
ETHERNET
PARAMS
(see page 120)
Serial (cont.)
Bi-Tronics*
IP Address
Stop Bits
Prime Signal
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
1*
Disable*
Gateway Address
2
Enable
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
Parity
TOF Action
Subnet Mask
None*
Reset*
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
Odd
Do Nothing
MAC Address
Even
Buffer Size in K
hhhhhhhhhhhh
Mark
1* (1-16)
Novell Protocol
Sense
Centronics
Enable*
Data Term Ready
Data Bit 8
Disable
True*
Enable*
NetBIOS Protocol
On-Line and BNF Enable*
Disable
Off-Line or BF
PI Ignored
Disable
False
Enable*
Novell Frame
Request to Send
Disable
Ethernet 802.2*
On-Line and BNF* 802.2 Snap
Data Polarity
Off-Line or BF
Standard*
Auto Sensing
False
Inverted
Ethernet II
True
Resp. Polarity
Ethernet 802.3
Buffer Size in K
Standard*
PPM Port Number
1* (1-16)
Inverted
3001*
Busy on Strobe Ethernet
(0-65535)
Buffer Size in K
Enable*
PPM Port Timeout
16* (1-16)
Disable
32 Seconds*
Latch Data On Auto Switching
(1-255)
Parallel Hotport
Leading*
Ethernet Speed
Port Type
Trailing
Auto Select*
Bi-Tronics*
Prime Signal
10 Half Duplex
Centronics
Disable*
10 Full Duplex
Ethernet
Enable
100 Half Duplex
Disable
TOF Action
100 Full Duplex
Trickle Time
Reset*
1/4*
Do Nothing
(1/4-16 sec.)
Buffer Size in K
Off
1* (1-16)
Timeout
Serial
10 sec.*
Interface Type
(1-60 sec.)
RS-232*
Report Status
RS-422
Disable*
Data Protocol
Enable
XON / XOFF*
Serial Hotport
ETX / ACK
Port Type
ACK / NAK
RS-232*
DTR
RS-422
Baud Rate
Disable
9600*
Trickle Time
19200
1/4*
38400
(1/4-16 sec.)
600
Off
1200
Timeout
2400
10 sec.*
4800
(1-60 sec.)
Word Length
Report Status
8*
Disable*
7
Enable
PRINTER
CONTROL
(see page 121)
DIAGNOSTICS
(see page 123)
RIBBON
MINDER
(see page 126)
Printer Tests
Unidirectional
New Ribbon
Shift Recycle*
Disable*
Ribbon Action
All E’s
Enable
Disable*
E’s + TOF
PMD Fault
Display
All H’s
Enable*
Fault
All Underlines
Disable
Ribbon Size
Open Platen @BOF All Black
60 yards*
Shuttle Slow
Disable*
(1-255)
Shuttle Fast
Enable
Ribbon Adjust
Shuttle Only
Slow Paper Slew
0%*
Phase Printer
Disable*
(-99% to 99%)
217* (500 lpm) Fault Action
Enable
123* (1000 lpm) New Ribbon*
Power Saver Time
62* (1500 lpm)
15 min.*
Do Nothing
(1 to 2000)
(5 sec.-60 min.)
Paperout Adj.
Disable
Burnin Test
Instant
Print Error Log
Clear Error Log
E-Net Test Page
Test Width
Full Width*
80 col.
Paper Out Dots
40 dots*
(4-76 dots)
System Memory
x Megabytes
Print Statistics
On: x.x Hrs.
Print: x.x Hrs.
Print Strokes
Print Lines
11 inch Pages
To view options, press:
6 Down
5 Up
4 Next
3 Prev
To select an option, press ENTER.
To return to main menu, press
CLEAR.
To exit menu, press ON LINE.
* = Default Setting
Figure 9. Configuration Main Menu (continued)
69
Chapter
4
Configuration Main Menu
The first-level configuration menu options are briefly described below:
•
CONFIG. CONTROL. Allows you to save, print, load, and delete entire
sets of configuration parameters. These options are described briefly in
this chapter and covered in detail in Chapter 3.
•
ACTIVE EMULATION. Allows you to select either Hewlett-Packard’s
Printer Control Language (PCL-II) or LP Plus.
•
70
•
If you select PCL-II, you can select the optional IGP®/PGL® or
IGP/VGL (Code V) emulations, if installed.
•
If you select LP Plus, you can select Epson FX, Proprinter XL, or
P-Series.
EMULATION. If PCL-II is the active emulation, PCL-II will display and you
can select its parameters for configuration.
•
If the optional IGP/PGL or Code V emulations are installed, you can
access their configuration parameters.
•
If LP Plus is the active emulation, Epson FX, Proprinter XL, and
P-Series configuration parameters are available.
•
MAINT / MISC. Provides miscellaneous functions, such as printing a hex
dump, selecting a display language, and choosing whether the printer will
power up offline or online.
•
HOST INTERFACE. Allows you to select the printer interface depending
on what type of interface cabling you installed while setting up your
printer. In addition to selecting an active interface, this menu also allows
you to configure several parameters for each interface.
•
ETHERNET PARAMS. Allows you to view and change the IP Address,
Gateway Address, and Subnet Mask. The MAC Address may also be
viewed. In addition, Novell and Printer Manager options can be set.
•
PRINTER CONTROL. Allows you to select several operating parameters
for the printer, such as the speed at which paper will advance when FF
(Form Feed) is pressed.
•
DIAGNOSTICS. Includes the printer’s diagnostic tests, system memory,
and print statistics.
•
RIBBONMINDER. Allows you to enable the RibbonMinder™ feature and
set its parameters.
Config. Control Menu
CONFIG.
CONTROL
Load Config.
0*
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Save Config.
1*
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Print Config.
Current*
Factory
Power-up
All
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Delete Config.
1*
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Power-up
Config.
0*
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Protect
Configs.
Disable*
Enable
To view options, press:
6 Down
5 Up
4 Next
3 Prev
To select an option, press ENTER.
To return to main menu, press
CLEAR.
To exit menu, press ON LINE.
* = Default Setting
The CONFIG. CONTROL menu manages configurations, which are
groupings of parameter values that can be stored in printer memory. Brief
descriptions follow for each option.
Load Config.
The printer can store up to eight unique configurations in memory. This
parameter allows you to select and load a specific configuration.
Configuration 0 is the factory default, and its parameters cannot be changed.
It is always available for loading. See page 54 for a detailed description and
sample procedure.
71
Chapter
4
Config. Control Menu
Save Config.
This option allows you to save up to eight unique configurations to meet
different print job requirements, which eliminates the need to change the
parameter settings for each new job.
The configurations are stored in memory. They will not be lost if you turn off
the printer. Configuration 0 is a factory-preset configuration, which cannot be
changed or saved. See page 50 for a detailed description and sample
procedure.
Note
If the Protect Configs. parameter is enabled, the new configuration will not
be saved unless the existing configuration has been deleted.
Print Config.
Allows you to print a listing of stored printer configurations. It is recommended
you store the configurations in a safe place for quick referral, such as inside
the printer, if you have a cabinet model. See page 52 for a detailed
description and sample procedure.
Delete Config.
Allows you to delete one or all of your eight customized configurations.
Configuration 0 is a factory-preset configuration and cannot be changed or
deleted.
Power-Up Config.
Allows you to specify which of the nine configurations (0-8) will be the powerup configuration. The factory default for power-up is configuration 0. See page
56 for a detailed description and sample procedure.
Protect Configs.
Allows you to specify whether or not a new configuration should overwrite an
existing configuration when you activate the Save Config. parameter.
72
•
Disable. The default. The new configuration will overwrite the existing
configuration.
•
Enable. The new configuration will not overwrite the existing
configuration, and the message “CONFIG. EXISTS / Delete First”
displays. You must delete the existing configuration (1-8) before trying to
save the new configuration.
Active Emulation Menu
ACTIVE
EMULATION
PCL-II*
LP PLUS
IGP/PGL &
LP+1
IGP/VGL
(CODE-V) &
LP+1
The ACTIVE EMULATION menu determines what emulations are available.
•
•
PCL-II. The default. The PCL-II emulation is active.
•
IGP/PGL & LP+ and IGP/VGL (Code V) & LP+. The ACTIVE
EMULATION function also allows you to activate either the PGL or the
Code V emulation. There are two methods for selecting the desired
emulation. The first is by selecting the emulation directly from the printer
menu. The second is by sending a host command which will switch the
emulation automatically. See the appropriate Technical Reference
Manual for more information on these command codes.
LP PLUS. Allows you to select LinePrinter Plus as the active emulation. If
LP PLUS is the active emulation, you can select Epson, Proprinter III XL,
or P-Series as the printer protocol (see page 80).
When changing from one IGP emulation to the other, the printer will load
the power-up configuration. Thus, any setting performed before selecting
those emulations and not saved in flash memory will be lost.
For more information on IGP/PGL and Code V, see the appropriate
Technical Reference Manual.
Note
In order to configure an IGP emulation, the IGP emulation must be
selected in the ACTIVE EMULATION menu. The IGP emulation that is not
selected will not appear in the EMULATION menu.
73
Chapter
4
Emulation Menu
Emulation Menu
EMULATION
PCL-II*
LP PLUS
IGP/PGL &
LP+1
IGP/VGL
(CODE-V) &
LP+1
(see page 75)
(see page 80)
(see page 97)
(see page 102)
To view options, press:
6 Down
5 Up
4 Next
3 Prev
To select an option, press ENTER.
To return to main menu, press
CLEAR.
To exit menu, press ON LINE.
* = Default Setting
= If installed
1
The EMULATION menu is the gateway to configure the emulations available
with the LineJet printer. The control codes for each of these emulations are
described in their respective Technical Reference Manuals.
PCL-II Emulation
Hewlett-Packard’s Printer Control Language that is compatible with HewlettPackard systems.
LP PLUS Emulations
•
Epson FX. This LP Plus emulation is provided for compatibility with the
Epson FX-1050 printer control language.
•
Proprinter XL. This LP Plus emulation is provided for compatibility with
the IBM Proprinter III XL printer control language.
•
P-Series. This is the Printronix P-Series printer control language,
provided as part of LP Plus.
Optional Emulations
IGP/VGL (Code V) and IGP/PGL are optional graphics emulations. They can
be selected and configured only if you have purchased these options. PCL-II
must be the active emulation for Code V or IGP/PGL to operate.
74
PCL-II Emulation
PCL-II Emulation
* = Factory Default
EMULATION
(from page 74)
PCL-II
Secondary
Char. Set
Page Length
Rep.
Max. Line
Width
Inches/Page*
Lines/Page
0* - 109, xx
Symbol Set
(see next page)
Pitch
10*, 12, 13.3
15, 16.67, 20
Density
Data Processing*
NLQ
OCR-A
OCR-B
High Speed
13.2 inches*
13.6 inches
Primary
Char. Set
ID
0* - 109, xx
Symbol Set
(see next page)
Pitch
10*, 12, 13.3
15, 16.67, 20
Density
Data Processing*
NLQ
OCR-A
OCR-B
High Speed
Graphics
Density
60 dpi*
70 dpi
Page L. /
Lines
66*
(1-128)
ID
Perforation
Skip
Disable*
Enable
Page L. /
Inches
11.0 inches*
(2-16 inches)
Display
Functns
Disable*
Enable
Config. Print
Line
Terminator
LF After CR
Disable*
Enable
CR After LF
Disable*
Enable
CR After FF
Disable*
Enable
CR After VT
Enable*
Disable
Symbol Set
Print
Face, CPI
Delay
Enable*
Disable
PTX Linefeed
Disable*
Enable
LPI Adjust
6 lpi*
8 lpi
Reset Cmd
CFG Ld
Power-up Config*
Current Config
Factory Config
Disable
75
Chapter
4
Primary
Char. set
(from previous
page)
Secondary
Char. Set
(from previous
page)
Symbol Set
Symbol Set
Roman-8[8U]*
Turkish-8[8T]
Arab-8[8V]
Cyrillic[8R]
PC858 MtLi[13U]
MC Text[12J]
Roman-9[4U]
Latin-9[9N]
Win3.0Lat-1[9U]
Japan Postnet
Katakana Post
ASCII[0U]
Math Sym[0A/0M]
LineDraw[0B/0L]
IS0 Den/Nor[0D]
Roman Ext.[0E]
IS0 UK[1E]
IS0 France[0F]
IS0 German[0G]
76
Emulation Menu
Hebrew[0H]
Japan ASCII[0K]
Katakana[1K]
Block Char[1L]
OCR-A[0O]
OCR-B[1O]
ISO Swe/Fin[0S]
ISO Spain[1S]
ISO Italian[0I]
ISO Portugu[4S]
Latin-1[0N]
Latin-2[2N]
Latin-5[5N]
Latin-6[6N]
Baltic[19L]
PC8 DanNor[11U]
PC8 Cd437[10U]
PC850 MtLi[12U]
PC851 LtGk[12G]
PC852 Lat2[17U]
PC Turkish[9T]
PC Hebrew[15H]
PC Lat/Ara[10V]
PC Cyrillic[3R]
Win3.1Lat1[19U]
Win3.1Lat-2[9E]
Win3.1Lat-5[5T]
Math-8[8M]
PS Math[5M]
Greek-7[12N]
Postnet4[15Y]
Postnet11.25
Greek-8[8G]
Hebrew-8[8H]
Katakana-8[8K]
DEC 256 Greek
ELOT 928 Greek
Greek 3
ABY Greek
ABG Greek
ELOT 927 Greek
Greek 437
Greek 8859-7
(identical to Primary
Character Set)
PCL-II Emulation
Primary Char. set
You can select one of 92 pre-defined character sets by ID (although character
sets range from 0 - 109, not all sets are available on the LineJet printer), or
you can select pitch, symbol set, and typeface individually. If the combination
you choose matches one of the 92 predefined sets, the ID submenu will
reflect that selection. If not, the ID menu will display xx to indicate that the
current character set does not match a pre-defined set. Set 0 is the default,
and its attributes are 10 cpi, Data Processing typeface, and Roman 8 symbol
set.
Secondary Char. Set
Your printer can store an additional character set. To toggle between them,
send the Shift In (Decimal 15, to select the Primary character set) or Shift Out
(Decimal 14, to select the Secondary character set).
Page Length Rep.
•
Inches/Page. All page length calculations are based on the inches
displayed on the panel.
•
Lines/Page. All changes in LPI or density will be changed accordingly.
The length of the page is the number of lines per inch, or lpi.
For example, if the form in use is 82 lines at 6 lpi, the page is physically
13.67 inches. Since 13.67 inches is not selectable from the Length in
Inches menu, change the representation to lines, then set the number of
lines to 82. The inches menu will display 13.6 inches although the printer
internally keeps the exact form length of 13.67 inches.
Max. Line Width
Set the maximum line width at 13.2 inches (the default) or 13.6 inches.
Face, CPI Delay
Allows the combination of different font densities on the same line.
•
•
Enable. Different font densities can be used on the same line.
Disable. Only the same font densities are allowed on the same line.
Graphics Density
Graphics can be printed in 60 DPI (the default) or 70 DPI.
Perforation Skip
•
•
Disable. Allows printing on page perforation.
Enable. You may set up a skip-over margin. For example, a skip-over
margin of one inch creates a one inch margin at the bottom of the page.
77
Chapter
4
Emulation Menu
Display Functns
•
•
Disable. The default. Control characters are not printed.
Enable. Control characters are printed before they get executed. This is a
useful debugging tool.
Line Terminator
You can specify what will be used to indicate the end of a line. Four options
are available: LF after CR, CR after LF, CR after FF, and CR after VT. Each of
these options may be enabled or disabled independent of one another.
PTX Linefeed
•
Disable. The default. Linefeed is to be performed as calculated from the
bottom of the graphics or barcode, thereby disrupting the vertical text
alignment.
•
Enable. The Linefeed moves to the next line as calculated from the Top
of Form position, thereby retaining vertical text alignment. When printing
graphics or bar codes, you may want to set the PTX Linefeed parameter
to Enable to maintain text alignment.
PTX Linefeed Enabled
LINE 1
LINE 1
LINE 2
PTX Linefeed Disabled
Linefeed
LINE 2
Linefeed
LINE 3
LINE 3
LPI Adjust
This parameter lets you specify the lines per inch (lpi) values: 6 LPI (the
default) or 8 LPI.
Page L. /Lines
This parameter lets you set physical page length in lines from 12 to 96 at 6 lpi,
or 16 to 128 at 8 cpi. The default is 66 lines at 6 lpi.
Note
78
If 6 lpi is selected, you will be able to scroll the menu to 128 (an invalid
length). However, when you press ENTER to select this value, the menu
will return with the maximum lines for 6 lpi (i.e., 96 lines). Similarly,
selecting too few lines for 8 lpi will cause the menu to return with 16 lines.
PCL-II Emulation
Page L. /Inches
This parameter allows you to set physical page length from 2 to 16 inches, in
increments of half an inch. The default is 11 inches.
Config. Print
This option prints the emulation’s parameters and the currently selected
values.
Symbol Set Print
This option prints a list of all the available sets. The character set number
prints to the left of the character set sample.
Reset Cmd CFG Ld
When the printer receives a host data stream reset command in addition to
resetting printer variables, the selected configuration will be loaded.
•
Disable.
The printer ignores the reset command when it is received and continues
to use the currently loaded configuration.
•
Power-Up Config.
The power-up configuration is loaded when the reset command is
received.
•
Current Config.
If you have preset and presaved multiple configurations, then the
currently selected presaved configuration is loaded when the reset
command is received.
•
Factory Config.
The factory installed configuration is loaded when the reset command is
received.
79
Chapter
4
Emulation Menu
LP Plus Emulation
EMULATION
(from page 74)
LP PLUS
Printer
Protocol
Print Char.
Set
CPI/LPI
Select
Select CPI
10.0 CPI*
12.0 CPI
15.0 CPI
17.1 CPI
20.0 CPI
Select LPI
6.0 LPI*
8.0 LPI
10.3 LPI
Font
Attributes
Page
Format
Typeface
Data Processing*
NLQ
OCR-A
OCR-B
High Speed
NLQ Sans Serif
Prop. Spacing
Form Length
Disable*
Enable
Bold Print
Abs. Length IN
Disable*
11.0* inches
Enable
(0.1-24)
Italic Print
Abs. Length MM
Disable*
279.4* mm.
Forward Slant
(0.1-609.6)
Backward Slant Funct. of Lines
Slashed Zero
66* lines
Disable*
(1-192)
Enable
P-Series*
Proprinter XL
Epson FX
Serial Matrix
P-Series XQ
(see page 84)
(see page 87)
(see page 89)
(see page 92)
(see page 95)
Reset Cmd
CFG Ld
Disable*
Power-up config
Current config
Factory config
Form Width
Margins
Left Margin
Abs. Width IN
0* columns
13.6* inches
(0-369)
(0.1-13.6)
Right Margin
Abs. Width MM
0* columns
345.4* mm.
(0-369)
(0.1-345.4)
Bottom Margin
Function of CPI
136* characters 0* lines
(0-451)
(1-272)
Perforation
Skip
Disable*
1/2 inch
2/3 inch
5/6 inch
1 inch
To view options, press:
6 Down
5 Up
4 Next
3 Prev
To select an option, press ENTER.
To return to main menu, press
CLEAR.
To exit menu, press ON LINE.
* = Default Setting
80
LP Plus Emulation
Printer Protocol
Select the LinePrinter+ protocol you wish to use. Refer to the PCL-II/
LinePrinter Plus Technical Reference Manual for more information.
Print Char. Set
When this selection is displayed and the ENTER key is pressed, the current
character set is printed.
CPI/LPI Select
This parameter lets you specify the characters per inch (cpi) value and lines
per inch (lpi) value.
Font Attributes
Typefaces
•
Data Processing. A general purpose font printing out at 120 dpi
horizontally and 72 dpi vertically. The width of the font will vary with each
cpi.
•
NLQ. A high quality font printing at 180 dpi horizontally and 96 dpi
vertically. This font has serifs, and the width of the font varies with the cpi.
•
OCR-A / OCR-B. Optical character recognition fonts printing at 120 dpi
horizontally and 144 dpi vertically. Both fonts print only at 10 cpi.
•
High Speed. A draft quality font printing at 120 dpi horizontally and 48 dpi
vertically. The width of the font varies with the cpi.
•
NLQ Sans Serif. A high quality font printing at 180 dpi horizontally and 96
dpi vertically. This font prints without serifs. The width of the font varies
with the cpi.
Prop. Spacing
Each printed character is contained inside a character cell. The width of the
character cell includes the character and the space around the character.
•
Disable. Each character cell is printed with the same width. Each column
in the printed text will line up.
•
Enable. The width of each character cell varies with the width of the
character. For example, [i] takes less space to print than [m]. Using
proportional fonts generally increases the readability of printed
documents, giving text a typeset appearance.
81
Chapter
4
Emulation Menu
Bold Print
•
•
Disable. Text is printed normally.
Enable. Text is printed with a heavy line thickness.
Italic Print
•
•
•
Disable. Text is printed normally.
Forward Slant. Text is printed with a forward slant.
Backward Slant. Text is printed with a backward slant.
Slashed Zero
This parameter allows you to print the numeral “0” with or without the slash.
This option applies to all character sets except OCR-A and OCR-B.
•
•
Disable. Zero is printed without a slash.
Enable. Zero is printed with a slash.
Page Format
Forms Length
Forms length is the number of lines that can be printed on a page. You can set
forms length in inches, millimeters (mm) or as a function of the current LPI
(lines per inch).
Forms Width
The forms width can be specified in inches, millimeters, or as a function of the
current CPI (characters per inch). The forms width set should not exceed the
actual paper width.
Margins
•
Right Margin. Set in columns. Column zero is defined as the far right
edge of the page, and column numbering increments from right to left.
•
Left Margin. Set in columns. Column zero is defined as the far left edge
of the page, and column numbering increments from left to right.
•
Bottom Margin. Defined in lines, starting from line zero at the bottom of
the page and incrementing from the bottom up.
Perforation Skip
•
•
82
Disable. Allows printing on page perforation.
You may set up a skip-over margin of 1/2 inch, 2/3 inch, 5/6 inch, or 1
inch. For example, a skip-over margin of 1 inch allows a 1 inch margin at
the bottom of the page.
LP Plus Emulation
Reset Cmd CFG Ld
When the printer receives a host data stream reset command in addition to
resetting printer variables, the selected configuration will be loaded.
•
Disable.
The printer ignores the reset command when it is received and continues
to use the currently loaded configuration.
•
Power-Up Config.
The power-up configuration is loaded when the reset command is
received.
•
Current Config.
If you have preset and presaved multiple configurations, then the
currently selected presaved configuration is loaded when the reset
command is received.
•
Factory Config.
The factory installed configuration is loaded when the reset command is
received.
83
Chapter
4
Emulation Menu
P-Series Emulation
* = Factory Default
Printer
Protocol
(from page 80)
P-Series
Control Code
06
8.0 LPI*
10.3 LPI
6.0 LPI
Control Code
08
Elongated*
Backspace
Select SFCC
1*
(0-7F hex)
Auto LF
Define CR
Code
CR = CR*
CR = CR + LF
Disable*
Enable
EVFU Select
Alt. Set 80-9F
Character
Set
Enable*
Disable
Control Code*
Printable
(see below)
Overstrike
Define LF
Code
Enable*
Disable
LF = CR + LF*
LF = LF
SFCC d
Command
Even dot plot*
Double high
Character Set
(from above)
IBM PC*
Multinational
Primary Subset ASCII (USA)*
ASCII (USA)* EBCDIC
French
German
English
Danish
Swedish
Italian
Spanish
Japanese
French Canadian
Latin American
Danish II
Spanish II
Latin Am II
Extended Subset
Code Page 437*
Code Page 850
84
ECMA Latin 1
DEC Mult.
Primary Subset ASCII (USA)*
ASCII (USA)* French
German
German
Swedish
English
Danish
Norw./Danish
Norwegian
Swedish
Finnish
Italian
English
Spanish
Dutch
Japanese
French
French Canadian
Spanish
Dutch
Italian
Finnish
Turkish
Swiss
Japanese
Extended Subset
Multinational*
Barcode 10 CPI
Mult. DP 10 CPI
Mult. DP 12 CPI
Mult. LQ 10 CPI
Greek DP 10 CPI
Greek DP 12 CPI
Greek LQ 10 CPI
Grap. DP 10 CPI
Grap. LQ 10 CPI
Sci. DP 10 CPI
Sci. DP 12 CPI
Sci. LQ 10 CPI
OCR-A
OCR-B
Latin 2 8859-2
Latin 2 852
Bulgarian
Latin-9
8859-15
Polish POL1
DEC 256
Greek
ELOT 928
Greek
Greek 3
ABY Greek
ABG Greek
ELOT 927
Greek
Greek 437
Greek 8859-7
PC851
LtGk[12G]
Greek-7[12N]
Greek-8[8G]
P-Series Emulation
Control Code 06
Control Code 06 defines the function of ASCII code hex 06 (ACK). You can
select an alternate line spacing of 6, 8, or 10.3 LPI.
Control Code 08
Control Code 08 defines the function of ASCII code hex 08 (BS). You can
define the code to output an elongated character or a backspace.
Define CR Code
This option controls the action of the printer when it receives a Carriage
Return code (hex 0D) from the host computer. If this feature is enabled, each
time the printer receives a Carriage Return, it inserts an additional Line Feed
code (hex 0A) into the data stream. Do not use this feature if the host
computer sends Line Feeds to the printer.
•
•
CR = CR. Does not insert an extra Line Feed after each Carriage Return.
CR = CR + LF. Inserts an extra Line Feed after each Carriage Return.
The next print position will be print position 1 of the next line.
Auto LF
This option defines the printer action when print data is received past the
forms width setting.
•
•
Disable. Discards any data past the forms width.
Enable. Performs an automatic carriage return and line feed when data is
received past the forms width.
Overstrike
This option enables you to print bold characters.
•
Enable. Turns on bold print. When enabled, overstrike printing slows
down the printer.
•
Disable. Turns off bold print.
Define LF Code
•
LF = CR + LF. Forces an automatic carriage return with each line feed
command. The next print position is print position 1 of the next line.
•
LF = LF. Does not perform an automatic carriage return. The next print
position will be the current print position of the next line.
Select SFCC
This parameter allows you to select which ASCII codes will function as the
Special Function Control Code (SFCC) command delimiter. P-Series codes
can use hex 00 through hex 7F. Options include the following:
•
•
ESC (hex 1B)
SOH (hex 01)
85
Chapter
4
Emulation Menu
•
•
•
Note
ETX (hex 03)
CIRCUMFLEX (hex 5E)—also called caret (^)
TILDE (hex 7E)—(~)
SOH, ETX and ESC are non-printables. The characters (^) and (~) are
printable. However, do not use them as printables in the host data stream if
either is chosen as a delimiter, because print errors will occur.
EVFU Select
Controls how the printer handles vertical formatting.
•
Enable. Enables the VFU and selects P-Series compatible Electronic
Vertical Format Unit (EVFU).
•
Disable. Disables VFU processing.
Alt. Set 80-9F
Determines whether the printer processes ASCII codes hex 80 through hex
9F as control codes or as printable characters.
Character Set
Specifies a character set as shown in the character set menu. To use one of
these sets, choose the desired group heading (such as Multinational) and
press ENTER. Then choose the desired set within that group (such as
EBCDIC) and press ENTER. Both the group and the desired set name will
include an asterisk to indicate your selection.
SFCC d Command
•
•
86
Even dot plot. This option interprets SFCC d Command as even dot plot.
Double high. This option interprets SFCC d Command as double high.
Select this option for backward compatibility.
Proprinter XL Emulation
Proprinter XL Emulation
* = Factory Default
Printer
Protocol
(from page 80)
Proprinter XL
Define CR
Code
CR = CR*
CR = CR + LF
Auto LF
Enable*
Disable
Define LF
Code
LF = LF*
LF = CR + LF
FF valid at
TOF
Enable*
Disable
Character
Set
Alt. Char Set
Code Page 437* Set 1*
Code Page 850 Set 2
OCR-A
OCR-B
Latin 2 8859-2
Latin 2 852
Bulgarian
Latin-9 8859-15
Polish POL1
Multinational
ASCII (USA)*
EBCDIC
DEC 256 Greek
ELOT 928 Greek
Greek 3
ABY Greek
ABG Greek
ELOT 927 Greek
Greek 437
Greek 8859-7
PC851 LtGk[12G]
Greek-7[12N]
Greek-8[8G]
20 CPI
Condensed
Enable*
Disable
Define CR Code
This option controls the action of the printer when it receives a Carriage
Return code (hex 0D) from the host computer. If this feature is enabled, each
time the printer receives a Carriage Return, it inserts an additional Line Feed
code (hex 0A) into the data stream. Do not use this feature if the host
computer sends Line Feeds to the printer.
•
•
CR = CR. Does not insert an extra Line Feed after each Carriage Return.
CR = CR + LF. Inserts an extra Line Feed after each Carriage Return.
87
Chapter
4
Emulation Menu
Auto LF
This option defines the printer actions when print data is received past the
forms width setting.
•
Enable. Performs an automatic carriage return and line feed when data is
received past the forms width.
•
Disable. Discards any data past the forms width.
Define LF Code
•
LF = LF. Does not perform an automatic carriage return when a line feed
command is received. The next print position will be the current print
position of the next line.
•
LF = CR + LF. Forces an automatic carriage return with each line feed
command received. The next print position is print position 1 of the next
line.
FF valid at TOF
•
Enable. Performs a form feed when the host sends a Form Feed
command and the printer is at the top of form.
•
Disable. Will not perform a form feed when the host sends a Form Feed
command and the printer is at the top of form.
Character Set
Specifies a character set as shown in the menu. To use one of these sets,
choose the desired character set and press ENTER. The desired set will be
marked with an asterisk to indicate your selection.
Alt. Char Set
This option determines if data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F should
be interpreted as a control code or as a printable character.
•
Set 1. Interprets data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F as a control
code.
•
Set 2. Prints data for the characters at hex locations 03, 04, 05, 06, 15,
and 80 through 9F.
20 CPI Condensed
Condensed print characters are narrower than the normal character set. This
is helpful for applications for which you need to print the maximum amount of
information on a page.
88
•
Enable. Prints characters about 60 percent the width of normal
characters when condensed print is chosen by the host computer.
•
Disable. Does not condense print widths, even if condensed print is
chosen by the host.
Epson FX Emulation
Epson FX Emulation
* = Factory Default
Printer
Protocol
(from page 80)
Epson FX
Define CR
Code
CR = CR*
CR = CR + LF
Auto LF
Enable*
Disable
Define LF
Code
LF = LF*
LF = CR + LF
Printer Select
Disable*
Enable
Character
Set
20 CPI
Condensed
Epson Set*
Enable*
ASCII (USA)* Disable
French
German
English
Danish I
Swedish
Italian
Spanish I
Japanese
Norwegian
Danish II
Spanish II
Latin Am I
French Canadian
Latin Am II
OCR-A
OCR-B
Latin 2 8859-2
Latin 2 852
Cyrillic 866
Bulgarian
Latin-9 8859-15
Polish POL1
Multinational
ASCII (USA)*
EBCDIC
DEC 256 Greek
ELOT 928 Greek
Greek 3
ABY Greek
ABG Greek
ELOT 927 Greek
Greek 437
Greek 8859-7
PC851 LtGk[12G]
Greek-7[12N]
Greek-8[8G]
IBM PC
Alt. Set 80-9F
Control Code*
Printable
89
Chapter
4
Emulation Menu
Define CR Code
The Define CR Code option controls the action of the printer when it receives
a Carriage Return code (hex 0D) from the host computer. If this feature is
enabled, each time the printer receives a Carriage Return, it inserts an
additional Line Feed code (hex 0A) into the data stream. Do not use this
feature if the host computer sends Line Feeds to the printer.
•
•
CR = CR. Does not insert an extra Line Feed after each Carriage Return.
CR = CR + LF. Inserts an extra Line Feed after each Carriage Return.
Auto LF
This option defines the printer actions when print data is received past the
forms width setting.
•
Enable. Performs an automatic carriage return and line feed when data is
received past the forms width.
•
Disable. Discards any data past the forms width.
Define LF Code
The Define LF Code option controls the action of the printer when it receives a
Line Feed code (hex 0A) from the host computer. If this feature is enabled,
each time the printer receives a Line Feed, it inserts an additional Carriage
Return code (hex 0D) into the data stream. This feature is required if the host
computer does not send Carriage Returns to the printer.
•
•
LF = LF. Does not add a Carriage Return with a Line Feed.
LF = CR + LF. Adds an extra Carriage Return with each Line Feed.
Printer Select
•
•
Disable. Ignores the ASCII DC1 and DC3 control codes.
Enable. Disables the printer when a DC1 control code is received, and
enables the printer when a DC3 control code is received.
Character Set
This parameter selects a character set for the Epson emulation, as shown in
the Character Set menu. Note that when OCR-A or OCR-B is selected as the
print language, the Font Attribute Typeface option under the LinePrinter Plus
menu (page 80) is changed to OCR-A or OCR-B, respectively.
90
Epson FX Emulation
20 CPI Condensed
Condensed print characters are narrower than the normal character set. This
is helpful for applications for which you need to print the maximum amount of
information on a page.
•
Enable. Prints about 60 percent of the width of normal characters when
condensed print is chosen by the host computer. For example, a 12 CPI
Draft font will condense to 20 CPI.
•
Disable. Does not condense print widths, even if condensed print is
chosen by the host.
Alt. Set 80-9F
•
Control Code. Interprets data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F as a
control code.
•
Printable. Prints data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F.
91
Chapter
4
Emulation Menu
Serial Matrix Emulation
* = Factory Default
Printer
Protocol
(from page 80)
Serial
Matrix
Control Code
06
Define CR
Code
8.0 LPI*
10.3 LPI
6.0 LPI
CR = CR*
CR = CR + LF
Auto LF
Enable*
Disable
Alt. Set
80-9F
Character
Set
Esc d
command
Control Code*
Printable
(see page 94)
Even dot plot*
Double high
Overstrike
Enable*
Disable
Define LF
Code
LF = LF*
LF = CR + LF
Printer
Select
Disable*
Enable
Control Code 06
Control Code 06 defines the function of ASCII code hex 06 (ACK). You can
select an alternate line spacing of 6, 8, or 10.3 LPI.
Define CR Code
This option controls the action of the printer when it receives a Carriage
Return code (hex 0D) from the host computer. If this feature is enabled, each
time the printer receives a Carriage Return, it inserts an additional Line Feed
code (hex 0A) into the data stream. Do not use this feature if the host
computer sends Line Feeds to the printer.
•
•
CR = CR. Does not insert an extra Line Feed after each Carriage Return.
CR = CR + LF. Inserts an extra Line Feed after each Carriage Return.
The next print position will be print position 1 of the next line.
Auto LF
The Auto LF option defines the printer actions when print data is received past
the forms width setting.
92
•
Enable. Performs an automatic carriage return and line feed when data is
received past the forms width.
•
Disable. Discards any data past the forms width.
Serial Matrix Emulation
Overstrike
This option enables you to print bold characters.
•
Enable. Turns on bold print. When enabled, overstrike printing slows
down the printer.
•
Disable. Turns off bold print.
Define LF Code
•
LF = LF. Does not perform an automatic carriage return when a line feed
command is received. The next print position will be the current print
position of the next line.
•
LF = CR + LF. Forces an automatic carriage return with each line feed
command received. The next print position is print position 1 of the next
line.
Printer Select
•
•
Disable. Ignores the ASCII DC1 and DC3 control codes.
Enable. Disables the printer when a DC1 control code is received, and
enables the printer when a DC3 control code is received.
Alt. Set 80-9F
•
Control Code. Interprets data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F as a
control code.
•
Printable. Prints data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F.
Character Set
Specifies a character set as shown in the “Serial Matrix Character Set Menu”
on page 94. To use one of these sets, choose the desired group heading
(such as European Sets) and press ENTER. Then choose the desired set
within that group (such as Roman 8) and press ENTER. Both the group and
the desired set name will include an asterisk to indicate your selection.
Character sets are shown in detail in the Character Sets Reference Manual.
ESC d command
•
•
Even dot plot. Interprets the ESC d command as even dot plot.
Double high. Interprets the ESC d Command as double high. Select this
option for backward compatibility.
93
Chapter
4
Emulation Menu
Serial Matrix Character Set Menu
* = Factory Default
Character Set
(from page 92)
IBM PC*
Multinational
Primary Subset ASCII (USA)*
ASCII (USA)* EBCDIC
French
German
English
Danish
Swedish
Italian
Spanish
Japanese
French Canadian
Latin American
Danish II
Spanish II
Latin Am II
Extended Subset
Code Page 437*
Code Page 850
94
ECMA Latin 1
DEC Mult.
Primary Subset ASCII (USA)*
ASCII (USA)* French
German
German
Swedish
English
Danish
Norw./Danish
Norwegian
Swedish
Finnish
Italian
English
Spanish
Dutch
Japanese
French
French Canadian
Spanish
Dutch
Italian
Finnish
Turkish
Swiss
Japanese
Extended Subset
Multinational*
Barcode 10 CPI
Mult. DP 10 CPI
Mult. DP 12 CPI
Mult. LQ 10 CPI
Greek DP 10 CPI
Greek DP 12 CPI
Greek LQ 10 CPI
Grap. DP 10 CPI
Grap. LQ 10 CPI
Sci. DP 10 CPI
Sci. DP 12 CPI
Sci. LQ 10 CPI
OCR-A
OCR-B
Latin 2 8859-2
Latin 2 852
Bulgarian
Latin-9
8859-15
Polish POL1
DEC 256
Greek
ELOT 928
Greek
Greek 3
ABY Greek
ABG Greek
ELOT 927
Greek
Greek 437
Greek 8859-7
PC851
LtGk[12G]
Greek-7[12N]
Greek-8[8G]
P-Series XQ Emulation
P-Series XQ Emulation
* = Factory Default
Printer
Protocol
(from page 80)
P-Series
XQ
Control Code
06
6.0 LPI
8.0 LPI*
10.3 LPI
Define CR
Code
CR = CR*
CR = CR + LF
HS Print
EVFU Select
char 02 STX*
char 03 ETX
char 09 HT
Enable*
Disable
Auto LF
Disable*
Enable
Upr. Case
Select
Disable*
Enable
Define LF
Code
Compressed
Print
LF = CR + LF*
LF = LF
char 01 SOH*
char 03 ETX
char 09 HT
Elong/Alt.
Font
Elng=BS Font=SO*
Elng=SO Font=BS
Slew
Relative
1 to 16 lines*
1 to 15 lines
Control Code 06
Control Code 06 defines the function of ASCII code hex 06 (ACK). You can
select an alternate line spacing of 6, 8, or 10.3 LPI.
Define CR Code
This option controls the action of the printer when it receives a Carriage
Return code (hex 0D) from the host computer. If this feature is enabled, each
time the printer receives a Carriage Return, it inserts an additional Line Feed
code (hex 0A) into the data stream. Do not use this feature if the host
computer sends Line Feeds to the printer.
•
•
CR = CR. Does not insert an extra Line Feed after each Carriage Return.
CR = CR + LF. Inserts an extra Line Feed after each Carriage Return.
The next print position will be print position 1 of the next line.
Auto LF
This option defines the printer action when print data is received past the
forms width setting.
•
•
Disable. Discards any data past the forms width.
Enable. Performs an automatic carriage return and line feed when data is
received past the forms width.
Define LF Code
•
LF = CR + LF. Forces an automatic carriage return with each line feed
command received. The next print position is print position 1 of the next
line.
95
Chapter
4
Emulation Menu
•
LF = LF. Does not perform an automatic carriage return when a line feed
command is received. The next print position will be the current print
position of the next line.
Compressed Print
Controls which host command sets compressed printing.
•
•
•
CHAR 01 SOH
CHAR 03 ETX
CHAR 09 HT
Elong/Alt. Font
Controls which host command sets elongated (double high) fonts and
extended character set.
•
•
ELNG=BS (hex 08) FONT=SO (hex 0E)
ELNG=SO FONT=BS
HS Print
Controls which host command sets high speed printing.
•
•
•
CHAR 02 STX
CHAR 03 ETX
CHAR 09 HT
EVFU Select
Controls how the printer handles vertical formatting.
•
Enable. Enables the VFU and selects P-Series compatible Electronic
Vertical Format Unit (EVFU).
•
Disable. Disables VFU processing.
Upr. Case Select
Controls how the printer handles lowercase characters it receives from the
host computer. When enabled, all characters will be printed in uppercase.
•
Disable. Prints lowercase characters received from the host computer as
lowercase, and uppercase characters received from the computer as
uppercase.
•
Enable. Prints lowercase characters received from the host computer as
their corresponding uppercase equivalents; uppercase characters
received from the computer are printed as uppercase.
Slew Relative
“Slewing” is rapid vertical paper movement. This parameter determines the
number of lines slewed (either 1-15 lines or 1-16 lines) when an EVFU Slew
Relative command is received.
96
IGP/PGL Emulation
IGP/PGL Emulation
The IGP/PGL emulation can be configured either through the printer’s front
panel or from the host computer with control codes. For a detailed description
of configuration with control codes, see the PGL Programmer’s Reference
Manual. For information on configuring the emulation through the printer’s
front panel, see the submenu below and the parameter descriptions that
follow.
* = Factory Default
EMULATION
(from page 74)
IGP/PGL &
LP+
Define CR
Code
Define LF
Code
CR = CR*
CR = CR + LF
LF = LF*
LF = CR + LF
Select Font
Select LPI
0*
(1-31)
6.0*
8.0
9.0
10.0
UPC
Descenders
Compressed
CPI
Enable*
Disable
Disable*
Enable
Autowrap
Disable*
Enable
Auto
Uppercase
Disable*
Enable
Ignore Char
Ignore Mode
Disable*
Enable
Select Char
0*
(0-255)
Select SFCC
126*
(1-255)
PI Slew
Range
16*
15
Skip Cmd
Prefix
Enable*
Disable
Power on
IGP/PGL
Enable*
Disable
IGP100
Compatbl.
Disable*
Enable
Optimized
Ratio
Disable*
Enable
CR Edit
Disable*
Enable
Ext Execute
Copy
Disable*
Enable
Error Report
On*
Debug Mode
Fault
Off
Define CR Code (Carriage Return)
This parameter forces the printer to insert an automatic Line Feed code into
the data stream whenever a Carriage Return code occurs. This is to be used
only if the host computer does not send Line Feeds to the printer.
•
CR = CR. Does not perform a line feed. The next print position will be
print position 1 of the current line.
•
CR = CR + LF. Performs an automatic line feed. The next print position
will be print position 1 of the next line.
97
Chapter
4
Emulation Menu
Define LF Code (Line Feed)
This parameter forces the printer to insert an automatic Carriage Return code
into the data stream whenever a Line Feed code occurs. This can be used in
most installations, but it is required if the host computer does not send
Carriage Returns to the printer.
•
LF = LF. Does not perform an automatic carriage return. The next print
position will be the current print position of the next line.
•
LF = CR + LF. Performs an automatic carriage return. The next print
position will be print position 1 of the next line.
Autowrap
This parameter determines if text will wrap to the next line when the line of
text exceeds the right margin.
•
Disable. Truncates the text beyond the right margin until a CR or CR + LF
is received.
•
Enable. Automatically inserts a CR + LF after a full print line.
Select SFCC
You can specify which decimal code (1-255) will be used as the Special
Function Control Code (SFCC). The factory default setting is 126. The SFCC
denotes that the following data is a PGL command.
PI Slew Range
You can specify how many lines the paper will feed.
•
•
16. A paper slew of 0-15 will move 1-16 lines.
15. A paper slew of 1-15 will move 1-15 lines. A paper slew of 0 will move
1 line.
CR Edit
This parameter determines if a carriage return will be followed by a line feed.
98
•
Disable. The printer ignores all carriage returns that are not followed by
line feeds.
•
Enable. The printer processes all carriage returns, even for those that are
not followed by line feeds.
IGP/PGL Emulation
Select Font
This parameter allows you to select a font for the IGP/PGL feature. The
default is 0, which is U.S. ASCII. The following values are valid choices:
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
U.S. ASCII
German
Swedish
Danish
Norwegian
Finnish
English
Dutch
French
Spanish
Italian
Turkish
Values 12-23 are undefined and will default to 0. You can set values 24-31 to
specific fonts; refer to the USET command in the IGP/PGL Technical
Reference Manual.
Select LPI
This is the number of lines to be printed per inch. For example, at 6 lpi there is
1/6 inch from the top of one print line to the top of the next print line.
Auto Uppercase
This parameter enables the printer to print text in all uppercase when using
the ALPHA command.
•
•
Disable. The printer will print text in upper and lowercase.
Enable. The printer will print text in uppercase only.
Skip Cmd Prefix
This parameter determines if the printer will print any data before a PGL
command is received.
•
Enable. The printer ignores all data on the current line before an IGP
command.
•
Disable. The printer will print all data on the current line before an IGP
command.
Power on IGP/PGL
You can set the IGP feature so that it is enabled or disabled when the printer
is powered on.
•
Enable. The PGL is enabled when the printer is powered on. (The PGL
feature is initialized in the Normal mode.)
•
Disable. The PGL is disabled when the printer is powered on. (The PGL
feature is initialized to the Quiet mode.)
99
Chapter
4
Emulation Menu
Ext Execute Copy
•
Disable. Dynamic data, overlay data, etc. are not allowed if the optional
Form Count parameter (number of forms to print) is specified as part of
the Execute command. (This setting is IGP-100 compatible.)
•
Enable. Dynamic data, overlay data, etc. are allowed within a form in
which the Form Count parameter is specified in the Execute command. In
this case, the exact same form (with identical dynamic data) is printed for
whatever the Form Count is. However, incremental data is not
incremented since the page that is printing is exactly the same, the
overlay data is only printed with the first form and not on subsequent
forms, and each form is printed on a separate page.
UPC Descenders
This parameter allows you to print bar code descenders when human
readable data is not presented in the UPC/EAN bar codes.
•
Enable. UPC/EAN bar codes are printed with descenders, even if there is
no human readable data.
•
Disable. UPC/EAN bar codes are printed without descenders if there is
no human readable data.
Compressed CPI
This parameter allows you to choose a compressed character (60% shorter)
for 17 or 20 CPI instead of the normal height character.
•
•
Disable. The PGL does not use compressed 17 or 20 CPI font.
Enable. Uses the standard compressed 17 or 20 CPI font.
Ignore Char
Ignore Mode
This parameter instructs the PGL to ignore the character selected under the
Select Character menu.
•
•
Disable. The PGL does not ignore any characters.
Enable. The PGL ignores the characters specified in the Select Character
menu.
Select Character
Instructs the PGL which decimal character (0-255) to ignore from the host.
100
IGP/PGL Emulation
IGP100 Compatbl.
This option instructs the IGP/PGL to behave similarly to the IGP-100 with
respect to certain commands. All new users with new applications should
select the Disable option. Selecting this mode insures the printer will behave
as described in this manual.
•
•
Disable. The IGP does not emulate the IGP-100 mode.
Enable. The IGP emulates the IGP-100 version.
Optimized Ratio
This option selects different bar code ratios for certain bar codes including
Code 39 and Interleaved 2 of 5. It is included for compatibility with the
IGP-X00 printers.
•
•
Disable. Uses standard bar code ratios.
Enable. Selects the alternate bar code ratios.
Error Report
Sets the error reporting capability for IGP/PGL forms.
•
On. Full boundary error checking reported. Any element which falls off the
current page is reported as an error.
•
Debug Mode. The printer is put in debug mode whenever a form is
defined in Create Form Mode. Each line of the Create Form is printed
along with an error if one occurred. This is the same functionality as if
there were a slash (/) entered before the Create Form Name.
•
Fault. When an error occurs, the error is printed, and the message
IGP/PGL ERROR appears on the printer front panel. The printer then
stops printing and goes offline. The error must be cleared before the
printer can resume normal operation.
•
Off. No form boundary checking. Graphic elements appear clipped if they
are beyond the page boundaries.
101
Chapter
4
Emulation Menu
IGP/VGL (Code V) Emulation
The IGP/VGL (Code V) emulation can be configured either through the
printer’s front panel or from the host computer with control codes. For a
detailed description of configuration with control codes, see the QMS Code V
Technical Reference Manual. For information on configuring the emulation
through the printer’s front panel, see the submenu below and the parameter
descriptions that follow.
* = Factory Default
EMULATION
(from page 74)
IGP/VGL
(CODE-V) &
LP+
SFCC &
Pwrup
Control Char
94* (17-255)
Ignore Mode
Disable*
Enable
Free Format
Disable*
Enable
Mgnum Conversion
Disable*
Enable
ISO Char Set
0*
(0-10)
102
LPI
6*
7
8
9
10
PI Control
Printer PI
Disable*
Enable
Host PI
Disable*
Enable
Max PI 16
Enable*
Disable
Graphics
Options
(see next page)
Error
Handling
Error Msgs
Enable*
Disable
Error Markers
Enable*
Disable
Offpage Errors
Disable*
Enable
Barcode Errors
Enable*
Disable
Ignore/DB8
Setup
Ignore Nulls
Disable*
Enable
Data Bit 8
Enable*
Disable
IGP/VGL (Code V) Emulation
* = Factory Default
Graphics
Options
(from page 102)
Slashes in
Zeros
Ignore Dots
Enable*
Disable
Disable*
Enable
UPC
Descenders
Rot. Char
Size
Disable*
Enable
Adjusted*
Not Adjusted
Append
Rotated
Disable*
Enable
Ignore
Spaces
Disable*
Enable
Truncate
Alpha
Enable*
Disable
Midline PY
Disable*
Enable
True Vert
1/10
Disable*
Enable
Convert to
U/C
Disable*
Enable
Absorb After
^PY
Absorb All*
Disable
Absorb Motion
Absorb After
^PN
Disable*
Enable
IGP110
Compatbl.
Disable*
Enable
SFCC & Pwrup
This option has several suboptions which define the SFCC and power-up
configuration used with Code V.
SFCC
This option selects the Special Function Control Code. The default value is
the caret ^ (decimal 94). Valid values are 17 through 255. Throughout this
section, the ^ is used as the SFCC. Run a configuration printout to determine
the currently selected SFCC.
Ignore Mode
•
•
Disable. The default.
Enable. Selects the ignore mode as the power-up default, and selects the
graphics mode ^PY as the power-up default. All characters are ignored
until a ^A command is received.
103
Chapter
4
Emulation Menu
Free Format
•
•
Disable. The default.
Enable. Selects free format mode as the power-up default, and selects
the graphics mode ^PY as the power-up default. Free format causes the
Code V to ignore carriage returns, line feeds, and all characters below
hex 20 sent from the host.
Mgnum Conversion
•
•
Disable. The default.
Enable. Selects the graphics mode ^PY as the power-up default.
LPI
The number of lines to be printed per inch. For example, at 6 lpi there is 1/6
inch from the top of one print line to the top of the next print line.
Graphics Options
Following are several options which configure printing output:
Slashes in Zeros
This parameter allows you to print the numeral “0” with or without the slash.
This option applies to all character sets except OCR-A and OCR-B.
•
•
Enable. Zero is printed with a slash.
Disable. Zero is printed without a slash.
Ignore Dots
•
•
Disable. The default.
Enable. Causes the Code V to expect position values to be specified in
only 1/10ths of an inch. If the dot position is also given, it is treated as
text.
Append Rotated
104
•
Disable. Logos and alphanumeric strings are treated as separate
elements.
•
Enable. Appends logos to an alphanumeric string rotated in a clockwise,
counterclockwise, or inverted orientation.
IGP/VGL (Code V) Emulation
Truncate Alpha
When enabled, this parameter prevents the printing of Error 48 (Element Off
Page Error) if alphanumeric data, including spaces, extends beyond the right
side of the form.
True Vert 1/10
•
Disable. A vertical 1/10 of an inch parameter is used as 7/72 of an inch.
The absolute move is slightly smaller than expected. For example, a one
inch move would be 70/72 of an inch. Vertical moves that have the same
value will be identical in length.
•
Enable. A vertical 1/10 of an inch parameter is used as 1/10 of an inch.
Rounding occurs to the nearest 1/72 of an inch. This can cause vertical
moves that have the same value to differ by ± 1/72 of an inch.
Absorb after ^PY
•
Absorb Motion. Prevents paper motion following a system terminator in
a graphics ^PY command.
•
Absorb All. The system ignores all the data and terminator until a
host-generated terminator is detected.
•
Disable. System terminators following a graphics command are sent to
the printer and result in paper motion.
UPC Descenders
•
Disable. UPC/EAN bar codes are printed without descenders if there is
no human readable data.
•
Enable. UPC/EAN bar codes are printed with descenders, even if there is
no human readable data.
Rot. Char Size
•
Adjusted. Rotated (clockwise/counterclockwise), expanded characters
have a different size than an unrotated character with the same size
parameters.
•
Not Adjusted. Rotated, expanded characters will be the same size as
unrotated characters with the same size parameters.
Ignore Spaces
•
Disable. Trailing spaces are not deleted from alphanumeric elements in a
graphics pass.
•
Enable. Trailing spaces are deleted from alphanumeric elements in a
graphics pass.
105
Chapter
4
Emulation Menu
Midline PY (includes ^PN)
•
Disable. The Graphics mode Enable command, ^PY, must be the first
three characters of a line.
•
Enable. The ^PY or ^PN can occur anywhere in a line.
Convert to U/C
•
•
Disable. Lowercase characters are printed normally.
Enable. All lowercase alphabetic characters are converted to uppercase.
Absorb After ^PN
•
Disable. All line terminators that immediately follow the ^PN command
are sent to the printer and processed.
•
Enable. All line terminators that immediately follow the ^PN command are
ignored.
IGP110 Compatbl.
This option instructs the Code V to behave similarly to the IGP-110 with
respect to certain commands. All new users with new applications should
select the Disable option. Selecting this mode insures the printer will behave
as described in this manual.
•
•
Disable. The IGP does not emulate the IGP-110 mode.
Enable. The IGP emulates the IGP-110 version.
Error Handling
Following are several options which define how errors are reported:
Error Msgs
•
Enable. Command syntax is checked and error messages printed when
command parameters are incorrect.
•
Disable. Error checking and error messages are suppressed.
Error Markers
•
Enable. Prints the following error markers for those elements that print
beyond the page boundaries:
>> for elements that begin off the right side of the page;
<< for elements that begin at the indicated position but end off the page;
♦ for elements where the starting position of the command contains an
error other than an off-page error.
106
IGP/VGL (Code V) Emulation
Offpage Errors
•
Disable. Does not report errors for elements that start or end beyond the
right edge of the page.
•
Enable. Reports errors for elements that start or end beyond the right
edge of the page.
Barcode Errors
•
Enable. An error message will print when invalid bar code data is
encountered.
•
Disable. Code V will not print an error for illegal bar code data; the bar
code will be skipped.
Note
When Barcode Errors is disabled, the Code V emulation will try to make
the best use of invalid data by either truncating extra digits or adding zeros
to the end of bar code data to meet minimum data length requirements for
some bar codes. Not all errors will be corrected.
Ignore / DB8 Setup
Following are several options which define character filtering and data bit 8.
Ignore Nulls
•
•
Disable. None of the null characters (hex 00 or 80) are ignored.
Enable. Null characters are filtered out of the data stream.
Data Bit 8
Note
•
Enable. The PI line is not passed directly from host to printer; all 8 bits are
used for data bits, and characters in the hex 80-FF range can be
accessed.
•
Disable. When the host PI line is enabled, data bit 8 internally indicates
PI line status. To use the PI line, disable data bit 8 and enable the Host PI
configuration option (under the PI Control option, below).
Data bit 8 is interpreted as either data bit 8 or the PI signal, but never both.
When enabled as data bit 8, data bit 8 has priority over the PI signal, and
all data above hex 7F is used to access character data and not to interpret
PI line data.
Conversely, when data bit 8 is disabled and the PI signal is used, data bit 8
of the data is reserved for use as the PI function, and you cannot access
characters in the hex 80-FF range. Therefore, to access characters in the
hex 80-FF range, data bit 8 must be enabled.
107
Chapter
4
Emulation Menu
ISO Char Set
This parameter allows you to select a font for the IGP/VGL (Code V) feature.
The default is 0, which is U.S. ASCII. The following values are valid choices:
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
U.S. ASCII
United Kingdom
Swedish/Finnish
Norwegian/Danish
Japanese
German
French
Italian
Spanish
PC Subset
Code V Version I
PI Control
Printer PI
•
•
Disable. The ASCII emulation is configured with the PI line disabled.
Enable. The ASCII emulation is configured with the PI line enabled.
Host PI
•
•
Disable. The host does not send PI signals.
Enable. The host sends PI signals. The Data Bit 8 configuration option
must be disabled to transmit the PI line to the printer.
Max PI 16
•
•
108
Enable. A paper slew of 0-15 will move 1-16 lines.
Disable. A paper slew of 1-15 will move 1-15 lines. A paper slew of 0 will
always move 1 line.
Maint/Misc Menu
Maint/Misc Menu
MAINT/MISC
Hex Dump
Mode
Disable*
Enable
Power-up
State
Online*
Offline
Display
Language
English*
Italian
French
German
Spanish
Power
Stacker1
Enable*
Disable
To view options, press:
6 Down
5 Up
4 Next
3 Prev
To select an option, press ENTER.
To return to main menu, press
CLEAR.
To exit menu, press ON LINE.
* = Default Setting
= If installed
1
Maint/Misc Menu
Hex Dump Mode
A hex code printout (or hex dump) translates all incoming data to hexadecimal
equivalents. A hex dump lists each ASCII data character received from the
host computer together with its corresponding two-digit hexadecimal code.
Hex dumps can be used to troubleshoot some types of printer data reception
problems. Figure 20 on page 257 shows a hex dump sample.
Power-up State
This parameter allows you to configure the printer to power-up in the offline or
online state. Online is the default.
Display Language
This parameter chooses the language that will appear on the message
display: English, Italian, French, German, or Spanish.
Power Stacker
This parameter, which is only presented with the LineJet 1500Q model, allows
you to enable (the default) or disable power stacker operation.
109
Chapter
4
Host Interface Menu
Host Interface Menu
HOST
INTERFACE
Bi-Tronics*
Centronics
Serial
Ethernet
Auto
Switching
(see page 111) (see page 112) (see page 114) (see page 117) (see page 118)
The Host Interface Menu Diagram enables you to select and configure an
interface between the printer and your host computer:
•
•
•
•
•
Note
Bi-Tronics (factory default)
Serial
Centronics
Ethernet
Auto Switching
The printer will not work online unless the type of interface selected from
the HOST INTERFACE menu matches the type of interface in your host
computer. The interface in your host computer is the one that connects to
the data cable of the printer. For example, if the interface in your computer
is a serial interface, then the serial interface must be selected from the
HOST INTERFACE menu in the printer.
The currently selected interface is indicated with an asterisk on the control
panel message display. Each interface has its own submenu with the set of
associated interface parameters that you may configure. The host interface
and its associated parameters control the interface between the printer and
your host computer. Descriptions follow for each of the host interface
submenus.
110
Bi-Tronics Submenu
Bi-Tronics Submenu
Note
The Bi-Tronics parameters in the printer must be set the same as the
interface in the host computer (at the other end of the data cable of the
printer). Otherwise, the printer might not work online, and data characters
from the computer might not print or might print as “garbled” text.
* = Factory Default
Bi-Tronics
(from page 110)
Prime Signal
Disable*
Enable
TOF Action
Reset*
Do Nothing
Buffer Size in
K
1*
(1-16)
Prime Signal
•
Disable. The parallel port does not perform a warm start (reboot) if the
host asserts the prime signal.
•
Enable. The parallel port performs a warm start (reboot) if the host
asserts the prime signal.
TOF Action
•
Reset. A form feed is performed before a warm start when the prime
signal is asserted from the host. This setting is used only if the Prime
Signal parameter is enabled.
•
Do Nothing. No form feed is performed on reset.
Buffer Size in K
This option configures the amount of memory allocated for the Bi-Tronics port
buffer. You can designate the size of the printer buffer from 1 through 16
Kbytes.
111
Chapter
4
Host Interface Menu
Centronics (Parallel) Submenu
Note
The Centronics parameters in the printer must be set the same as the
interface in the host computer (at the other end of the data cable of the
printer). Otherwise, the printer might not work online, and data characters
from the computer might not print or might print as “garbled” text.
* = Factory Default
Centronics
(from page 110)
Data Bit 8
PI Ignored
Enable*
Disable
Enable*
Disable
Prime
Signal
TOF
Action
Disable*
Enable
Reset*
Do Nothing
Data
Polarity
Resp.
Polarity
Standard*
Inverted
Standard*
Inverted
Busy on
Strobe
Enable*
Disable
Latch
Data On
Leading*
Trailing
Buffer Size
in K
1*
(1-16)
The Centronics submenu provides the options and settings available to
configure the interface as required for your application. These options and
available settings are outlined in the following paragraphs.
Data Bit 8
•
•
Enable. Allows access to the extended ASCII character set.
Disable. The printer interprets bit 8 of each incoming data character as a
zero, regardless of its actual setting.
PI Ignored
The PI (Paper Instruction) signal is used to control vertical paper motion.
112
•
Enable. Ignores the PI signal and treats the data as characters or control
codes.
•
Disable. Causes the printer to interpret the eight data lines as VFU
commands when the PI signal is true.
Centronics (Parallel) Submenu
Data Polarity
The Data Polarity parameter must be set to match the data polarity of your
host computer.
•
•
Standard. Does not expect the host computer to invert the data.
Inverted. Expects the data received on the data lines from the host
computer to be inverted. Ones become zeros, and vice-versa.
Resp. Polarity
The Response Polarity parameter must be set to match the response polarity
of your host computer. This option sets the polarity of the Acknowledge,
Online, Fault, Paper Empty, and Busy signals.
•
•
Standard. Does not invert the response signals.
Inverted. Inverts the response signals sent to the host computer.
Busy on Strobe
•
•
Enable. Asserts a busy signal after each character is received.
Disable. Asserts a busy signal only when the print buffers are full.
Latch Data On
The Latch Data On parameter specifies whether the data is read on the
leading or trailing edge of the data strobe signal.
Prime Signal
•
Disable. The parallel port does not perform a warm start (reboot) if the
host asserts the prime signal.
•
Enable. The parallel port performs a warm start (reboot) if the host
asserts the prime signal.
TOF Action
•
Reset. A form feed is performed before a warm start when the prime
signal is asserted from the host. This setting is used only if the Prime
Signal parameter is enabled.
•
Do Nothing. No form feed is performed on reset.
Buffer Size in K
Configures the amount of memory allocated for the Centronics parallel port
buffer. The default is 1 Kbyte, but you can specify between 1 and 16 Kbytes,
in 1-Kbyte increments.
113
Chapter
4
Host Interface Menu
Serial Submenu
Note
The serial parameters in the printer must be set the same as the interface
in the host computer (at the other end of the data cable of the printer).
Otherwise, the printer might not work online, and data characters from the
computer might not print or might print as “garbled” text.
* = Factory Default
Serial
(from page 110)
Interface
Type
RS-232*
RS-422
Parity
None*
Odd
Even
Mark
Sense
Data
Protocol
XON / XOFF*
ETX / ACK
ACK / NAK
DTR
Data Term
Ready
True*
On-Line and BNF
Off-Line or BF
False
Word
Length
Baud Rate
9600*
19200
38400
600
1200
2400
4800
Request to
Send
On-Line and BNF*
Off-Line or BF
False
True
8*
7
Stop Bits
1*
2
Buffer Size in
K
1*
(1-16)
The serial submenu allows you to choose the configuration of the Serial host
interface type, as shown above. Several other serial parameters are included
on this menu, as described below.
Interface Type
Allows you to select either the RS-232 (the default) or RS-422 serial port
interface.
114
Serial Submenu
Data Protocol
You can select one of the following serial interface protocols to meet the host
interface requirements.
•
XON / XOFF. The default. The printer controls the flow of communication
from the host by turning the transmission on and off.
In some situations, such as when the buffer is full or the timing of signals
is too slow or too fast, the printer will tell the host to stop transmission by
sending an XOFF character.
An XOFF character is sent when the number of empty bytes in the buffer
is less than or equal to 25 percent of the buffer size.
If the host keeps sending data after an XOFF is sent, the printer firmware
will continue to send an XOFF for every 16 characters received.
When cleared, the printer will resume receiving data (XON). The data
does not have any End of Text codes; XON / XOFF is a non-block
protocol.
•
ETX / ACK. End of Text / Acknowledge. The host controls the flow of
communication to the printer by sending a block of data and ending the
block with an End of Text (ETX) signal. When the printer receives the
ETX signal, it will acknowledge the ETX, thereby acknowledging it has
received the entire block of data.
•
ACK / NAK. ACK means acknowledge; the device acknowledges it has
accepted a transmission. NAK means a negative acknowledge; the
device did not receive the transmission.
•
DTR. Data Terminal Ready. The printer controls the data flow by sending
this hardware signal to the host. If there is enough room in the printer
buffer, the printer will send a high signal. If the buffer is full, the printer will
send a low signal. DTR tells the host if it is safe to send more data. If the
host sends data during an unsafe condition, data will be lost.
Baud Rate
Sets the baud rate of the serial interface in the printer. Baud rate is the speed
at which serial data is transferred between the host computer and the printer.
The choices for the RS-232 and RS-422 interfaces are 600, 1200, 2400,
4800, 9600, 19200, and 38400. The default is 9600 baud.
Note
If you select a baud rate that is 19200 or greater, you may need to increase
the Buffer Size in K parameter from the default (1 Kbyte) to improve
performance.
Word Length
Sets the length of the serial data word. The length of the data word can be set
to 7 or 8 bits, and must match the corresponding data bits setting in the host
computer. The default is 8 bits.
115
Chapter
4
Host Interface Menu
Stop Bits
Sets the number of stop bits in the serial data word. Either one or two stop bits
can be selected. The setting must match the corresponding stop bit setting in
the host computer. The default is 1 bit.
Parity
Set for odd parity, even parity, mark, sense, or no parity. The setting must
match the corresponding parity setting in the host computer. The default is
None.
Data Term Ready
This configuration is part of hardware flow control and determines when the
Data Terminal Ready (DTR) signal is generated. This signal indicates
whether or not the printer is ready to receive data.
•
•
True. Continuously asserts the DTR signal (the default).
•
Off-Line or BF (buffer full). Asserts the DTR signal when the printer is
offline or the internal serial buffer is full.
•
False. Never asserts the DTR signal.
On-Line and BNF (buffer not full). Asserts the DTR signal when the
printer is online and the internal serial buffer is not full.
Request to Send
This configuration is part of hardware flow control and determines when the
Request to Send (RTS) signal is generated. This signal indicates whether or
not the printer is ready to receive data.
•
On-Line and BNF. Asserts the RTS signal when the printer is online and
the internal serial buffer is not full (the default).
•
Off-Line or BF. Asserts the RTS signal when the printer is offline or the
internal serial buffer is full.
•
•
False. Never asserts the RTS signal.
True. Continuously asserts the RTS signal.
Buffer Size in K
Configures the amount of memory allocated for the serial port buffer. The
default is 1 Kbyte, but you may specify between 1 and 16 Kbytes, in
1-Kbyte increments.
116
Ethernet Submenu
Ethernet Submenu
* = Factory Default
Ethernet
(from page 110)
Buffer Size in
K
16*
(1-16)
The Ethernet interface allows you to locate the printer on a LAN rather than
attach the host directly into the printer.
Buffer Size in K
This option configures the amount of memory allocated for the Ethernet
buffer. The default is 16 Kbytes. You can specify between 1 and 16 Kbytes, in
1-Kbyte increments.
117
Chapter
4
Host Interface Menu
Auto Switching Submenu
* = Factory Default
Auto Switching
(from page 110)
Parallel
Hotport
Serial
Hotport
Port Type
Bi-Tronics
Centronics
Ethernet
Disable
Trickle Time
1/4 sec*
1/2 sec
1 sec
2 sec
4 sec
8 sec
16 sec
Off
Timeout
10 sec.*
(1-60)
Report Status
Disable*
Enable
Port Type
RS-232*
RS-422
Disable
Trickle Time
1/4 sec*
1/2 sec
1 sec
2 sec
4 sec
8 sec
16 sec
Off
Timeout
10 sec.*
(1-60)
Report Status
Disable*
Enable
Auto Switching
Gives the printer the ability to handle multiple data streams sequentially. With
Auto Switching, the printer can service hosts attached to the serial and
parallel ports as if they were the only interface connected.
For example, if the host computer sends one print job to the RS-232 serial
port and a separate print job to the Bi-Tronics parallel port, the printer’s Auto
Switching is able to handle both jobs, in the order they were received, without
the user having to reconfigure the selected interface between jobs.
Port Type
Allows you to select the types of parallel and/or serial interfaces which are
connected to the printer. For example, if your printer is attached to one host
with a Centronics connection and a second host with an RS-422 serial
connection, you would select Centronics under the Parallel Hotport menu and
RS-422 under the Serial Hotport menu.
118
Auto Switching Submenu
Trickle Time
When the printer is printing data from a host and a second job is received by
the printer from a different host, Trickle Time prevents the second host from
timing out while it is waiting for its data to be printed. In order to support this
feature, the port has to be able to accept data from the host and store it for
future use.
For example, if the printer is printing a job from the serial port and then
receives a second print job from the parallel port, the data from the parallel
port will “trickle” bit by bit into the printer buffer to prevent a timeout error from
being sent back to the host connected to the parallel port.
The selected value is the time that the printer waits before getting the next
byte of data from the host. The Trickle Time value should be less than the
host time out value, but not too much shorter or else the printer fills up its
buffer too fast.
Timeout
This is the value used by the printer to time out from the current port and
check the other selected Port Types for data to print. When the printer has not
received data from the host after a certain period of time, it needs to Timeout
in order to service the other ports.
Report Status
•
Disable. When a fault occurs on the printer, only the active port reports
the fault to the host.
•
Enable. The port will report any fault even when it is not the current active
port.
119
Chapter
4
Ethernet Params Menu
Ethernet Params Menu
ETHERNET
PARAMS
IP Address
Gateway
Address
Subnet Mask
MAC Address
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx hhhhhhhhhhhh
Novell Frame
PPM Port
Number
Ethernet 802.2*
802.2 Snap
Auto Sensing
Ethernet II
Ethernet 802.3
3001*
(0-65535)
PPM Port
Timeout
100 secs.*
(1-255)
Novell
Protocol
Enable*
Disable
NetBIOS
Protocol
Enable*
Disable
Ethernet1
Speed
Auto Select*
10 Half Duplex
10 Full Duplex
100 Half Duplex
100 Full Duplex
* Factory Default
1 If
you change the Ethernet speed setting,
you must also change the switch or hub
setting to match.
The ETHERNET PARAMS menu helps your printer communicate on a
network.
For information on assigning the IP Address, Gateway Address, Subnet
Mask, and MAC Address, refer to “Methods Of Adjusting Paper Position” on
page 145.
You may also enable or disable the Novell or NetBIOS Protocols within this
menu, as well as selecting which Novell Frame scheme is used in processing
Novell signals. See Chapter 10, “Novell Configuration” for more details.
If the printer is connected to the LineJet Printer Manager utility, the PPM Port
number and PPM Port Timeout settings must match the settings in the LineJet
Printer Manager program.
120
Printer Control
Printer Control Menu
The Printer Control Menu allows you to choose the printer’s behavior. Options
on this menu, as shown below, are described in the following pages.
PRINTER
CONTROL
Unidirectional
Disable*
Enable
PMD Fault
Enable*
Disable
Open Platen
@BOF
Slow Paper
Slew
Power Saver
Time
Disable*
Enable
Disable*
Enable
15 mins.*
(5 sec.-60 min.)
Disable
Instant
To view options, press:
6 Down
5 Up
4 Next
3 Prev
To select an option, press ENTER.
To return to main menu, press
CLEAR.
To exit menu, press ON LINE.
* = Default Setting
Printer Control
Unidirectional
The Unidirectional feature affects both print quality and printing speed. By
setting this feature, you can configure the printer to print in both directions of
the shuttle sweep (bidirectional), or to print in one direction only
(unidirectional).
You might want to enable this feature when printing bar codes, high quality
text and graphics, or other printing that requires precise vertical alignment.
Although enabling this feature reduces print speed, it enhances the vertical
alignment of dots and produces cleaner, sharper bar codes and text. Choices
include the following:
•
Disable. The default. The printer will print all data in both directions of the
shuttle sweep (bidirectional printing). This choice produces higher printing
speed.
121
Chapter
4
Printer Control Menu
•
Enable. The printer will print all data in only one direction of the shuttle
sweep (unidirectional printing). This choice produces higher print quality.
PMD (Paper Motion Detection) Fault
•
Enable. If a paper jam occurs, an audible alarm beeps, the LCD displays
the message, “CLEAR PAPER JAM,” and the printer stops printing.
•
Disable. You should disable PMD only if special paper requires it.
Caution
Once PMD is disabled, paper motion is not monitored. If a paper jam
occurs, the printer ignores the condition and continues to print,
which can cause severe damage to the printer.
Slow Paper Slew
This parameter affects the speed at which paper advances into the stacking
area of the printer. The speed may be slowed down by enabling this feature.
•
Disable. The default. The printer will slew and stack paper at maximum
speed.
•
Enable. Causes the paper to stack at a slower pace. This ensures that
certain forms will stack more neatly.
Power Saver Time
Power Saver is also referred to as the ENERGY STAR® Office Equipment
Program. The Power Saver feature places the printer in “sleep mode” when
the printer has not been used for a specified number of minutes. In sleep
mode the printer is in low-energy idle state, all fans and higher voltages are
off, and only +5Vdc logical circuits are active.
You can designate the number of minutes after which the printer will go into
sleep mode. The range of time is from 0 to 60 minutes. The default is 15
minutes.
Pressing any key on the control panel or sending a print job to the printer will
turn off sleep mode.
122
Diagnostics
Diagnostics Menu
The diagnostics menu allows you to choose the diagnostics tests to be run
and provides you with important system information. Options on this menu, as
shown below, are described in the following pages.
1
If Ethernet adapter is present
DIAGNOSTICS
Printer Tests
Test Width
Shift Recycle* Full Width*
All E’s
80 columns
E’s + TOF
All H’s
All Underlines
All Black
Shuttle Slow
Shuttle Fast
Shuttle Only
Phase Printer
217* (500 lpm)
123* (1000 lpm)
62* (1500 lpm)
(1 to 2000)
Paperout Adj.
Burnin Test
Print Error Log
Clear Error Log
E-Net Test Page1
Paper Out
Dots
40 dots*
(4-76 dots)
System
Memory
x Megabytes
Print Statistics
On: x.x Hrs.
Print: x.x Hrs.
Print Strokes
Print Lines
11 inch Pages
Diagnostics
Printer Tests
The printer tests are used to check the print quality and printer operation.
Note
Your Customer Service Engineer typically runs these tests. They are
described in more detail in the LineJet Printers Maintenance Manual.
The Printer Tests parameters are described below. (For test running
procedures, see page 255.)
•
Shift Recycle. A sliding alphanumeric pattern that identifies missing or
malformed characters, improper vertical alignment, or vertical
compression.
123
Chapter
4
Diagnostics Menu
•
All E’s. A pattern of all uppercase E’s that identifies missing characters,
misplaced dots, smeared characters, improper phasing problems, or light/
dark character variations.
•
E’s + TOF. A pattern of all E’s followed by a form feed to the next page
top of form, that identifies paper motion or feeding problems.
•
All H’s. A pattern of all uppercase H’s used to detect missing characters,
misplaced dots, smeared characters, or improper phasing.
•
All Underlines. An underline pattern useful for identifying hammer bank
misalignment.
•
All Black. A condition where all dot positions are printed, creating a solid
black band.
•
Shuttle Slow. Verifies proper operation by exercising shuttle and ribbon
motion at low speed.
•
Shuttle Fast. Verifies proper operation by exercising shuttle and ribbon
motion at fast speed.
•
•
Shuttle Only. Exercises only the shuttle at fast speed.
Phase Printer. It is recommended that only a Hewlett-Packard Customer
Service Engineer run this test.
The Phase Printer test checks for wavy print. The initial phase value is set
in the factory. The Customer Service Engineer (CSE) runs the test and
checks the quality. (The phase value prints on the left margin.) If the print
looks too wavy, the CSE changes the Phase Value parameter by
pressing the 6 key while the test is running. A value between 1 and 2000
displays. To change the value, the CSE presses the4or3key until the
desired value displays, and then presses ENTER.
Note
The printer must be printing the phase pattern of “H’s” when the Phasing
Value is changed or the new phasing value will not be written into nonvolatile RAM (NVRAM). If the value is changed when not printing, the
printer will return to its default phasing value when powered off and then
back on.
•
Paperout Adj. It is recommended that only a Hewlett-Packard Customer
Service Engineer run this test.
The Paperout Adj. allows the Customer Service Engineer to specify
where the last line of text will print when there is a paper out condition.
Setting this parameter correctly prevents printing on the platen. (See the
LineJet Printers Maintenance Manual for more information.)
124
•
•
Burnin Test. Running this test is not recommended.
•
•
Clear Error Log. Clears the error log.
Print Error Log. Prints a log of the last 50 errors that have occurred in
the printer.
E-Net Test Page. Prints the Ethernet statistics stored on the Ethernet
adapter (if present).
Diagnostics
Test Width
This parameter permits you to run the self-tests at full width or 80 columns.
Caution
This parameter must match paper width used. If full width is selected
for use with 80-column or 8.5-inch wide paper, damage to the
hammer tips and platen may result.
Paper Out Dots
It is recommended that only a Hewlett-Packard Customer Service Engineer
set this parameter.
Paper Out Dots allows the Customer Service Engineer to specify where the
last line on the page will print when there is a paper out condition. Setting this
parameter correctly prevents printing on the platen.
System Memory
This parameter displays the amount of RAM installed.
Print Statistics
You can view various printer statistics, such as hours of usage, and refer to
these figures for preventive maintenance purposes. Printer statistics
accumulate continuously; they do not reset when you turn off the printer.
All of the printer statistics are set to zero at the factory after burn-in testing.
•
On. The cumulative time in hours the printer has been powered on. The
range is from 0 to 30,000 hours.
•
Print. The cumulative time in hours the printer has actually been printing.
The range is from 0 to 30,000 hours.
•
Print Strokes. The cumulative number of back-and-forth shuttle strokes
the printer has printed during normal operation. The range is from 0 to
2,147,483,648 shuttle strokes.
•
Print Lines. The cumulative number of lines the printer has printed. The
range is from 0 to 2,147,483,648 print lines.
•
11 inch Pages. The cumulative number of pages the printer has printed.
The range in print pages is from 0 to 2,147,483,648 total inches of paper
movement divided by 11.
125
Chapter
4
RibbonMinder
RibbonMinder
RibbonMinder is a user-definable software feature which notifies the user
when a ribbon should be changed. It does this by monitoring ink consumption
and alerts you when the print quality falls below a level you designate. This is
especially important if you are printing bar codes to be scanned.
ON LINE
100%
<printer emulation>
As printing continues, the percentage of usable ink in the ribbon decreases.
ON LINE
74%
<printer emulation>
Ribbon ink being consumed
ON LINE
8%
<printer emulation>
Ribbon life approaching end
When 0% usable ink appears, the printer is typically configured to stop
printing and display the following message:
RIBBON INK OUT
CHANGE RIBBON
Note
Once you have set up options for RibbonMinder, it works without attention.
When you begin printing with RibbonMinder enabled, the message display
shows a ribbon life value of 100%. The ribbon life decreases as the ink is
consumed.
New Ribbon
Whenever you install a new ribbon, you must reset the ribbon life to 100%.
Once you install the new ribbon, work your way through the configuration
menus until “New Ribbon” appears on the LCD. Press the ENTER key to
reset the ribbon life to 100%.
Ribbon Action
126
•
Disable. Removes the ink consumption display. RibbonMinder will
continue to monitor how much ink is left in the ribbon.
•
Display. Activates the RibbonMinder ink consumption display. Allows you
to continually monitor the percentage of ink left in the ribbon.
•
Fault. Activates a fault message when the display reaches 0%.
RibbonMinder Menu
RibbonMinder Menu
RIBBON
MINDER
New
Ribbon
(Press ENTER
to reset ribbon
life to 100%. A
new ribbon
must be
installed after
setting the
ribbon life to
100%.)
* = Factory Default
Ribbon
Action
Disable*
Display
Fault
Ribbon
Size
60 yards*
(1-255)
Ribbon
Adjust
0%*
(-99% to 99%)
Fault
Action
New Ribbon*
Do Nothing
Ribbon Size
The standard ribbon size is 60 yards. You can use the Ribbon Size option to
specify the ribbon length in one-yard increments, with a maximum of 255
yards.
Ribbon Adjust
Adjusts the number of pages printed before the display reaches 0%. If the
ribbon normally prints 1000 pages before reaching 0%, configuring the
Ribbon Adjust to 20% will print 200 more pages than normal before reaching
0%. A Ribbon Adjust setting of -20% will cause the display to reach 0% after
200 fewer pages than normal. The setting can range from -99% through 99%.
Fault Action
•
New Ribbon. Changing the ribbon while in the RIBBON INK OUT /
CHANGE RIBBON fault mode will reset the ribbon life to 100%, just as if
the New Ribbon menu option was executed.
•
Do Nothing. The ribbon life may only be reset through the New Ribbon
menu option.
RibbonMinder Fault
When the RIBBON INK OUT / CHANGE RIBBON fault message appears on
the LCD, press the CLEAR key to remove the fault message, then replace the
ribbon (see your Quick Reference Guide ). If you need to complete a current
print job before replacing the ribbon, press ON LINE. This allows the printer to
continue printing for an additional two minutes. After the two-minute period
has elapsed, the fault will reoccur if the Ribbon Action parameter remains set
on Fault. If Ribbon Action is changed to Disable or Display within the twominute period, the fault will not recur; disable RibbonMinder if you do not want
to change the ribbon at this time. The fault message will reappear once the
function is enabled again, and the printer status indicator will flash until the
ribbon is changed.
127
Chapter
128
4
RibbonMinder
5
Approaches To Network
Printing
Overview
Configuring your network printing is based on the network protocols and host
environments you already use or plan to use. It is common to find multiple
network protocols co-existing in the same network.
The LineJet Print Server is a multi-protocol device that is able to
accommodate many protocols at the same time. The actual print job order
operates on a first-in/first-out basis. This means it is possible to configure your
LineJet Print Server using any or all of the methods listed in this manual for
use at the same time. This concept is what creates the ability to use powerful
printer management tools in parallel with the act of printing. The protocol for a
print job and the protocol for the management tool will often be different.
These ideas are also what differentiate networks by size and network protocol
use. Some common network arrangements include peer to peer networks and
print job servers.
Peer To Peer Networks
Peer to peer networks can be used when you have few machines, few
printers, only one network protocol, and when any host can print to the printer.
A variation of this is a mini-server which “shares” its printer with the other
networked computers in a single room or building. The LineJet Print Server
improves flexibility in printer placement and setup by becoming just another
“peer,” rather than dedicated to a single machine.
A common peer to peer network arrangement is comprised of Windows
95/98 with TCP/IP configured to use the netBEUI protocol to connect to the
print server. A second common extension of this arrangement is to install a
third party LPR PORT MONITOR on each PC and use simple TCP/IP to
connect to the print server. If Windows NT is used for the peer computers,
LPR is included and is easy to set up. Windows 95/98 does not have such a
monitor, but many are available for free for download from the Web.
129
Chapter
5
Overview
Print Job Servers
In most larger networks, print jobs usually are managed by designating one
protocol and method for printing and then designating specific computers as
print job servers, rather than by directing any host running any protocol to the
networked printer resource. Computers designated as print job servers have
large hard disk space to store print data and spool management software. All
clients direct their print job to the computer designated as the print job server
rather than the printer; therefore, the client to print job server network protocol
used might not be the same as the print job server to LineJet Print Server.
Large network environments today are generally TCP/IP or Novell network
protocols or a mixture of the two.
Common examples of larger networks utilizing the LineJet Printer and Print
Server:
130
•
Many Windows 95/98 clients directing print jobs to an NT server. The
Windows 95/98 clients, NT server, and LineJet printer might or might not
be in the same physical location, building, or even country. The LineJet
printer is located based on where its output is needed, not where the jobs
originate. Remote printer management tools (LineJet Printer Manager,
SNMP, etc.) give the same ability to the administrator today that
networking provided in the past.
•
Windows 95/98, NT, Novell network client computers direct output to
a Unix machine designated as the print job server which spools
and manages print jobs. The designated print server could be an
HP e3000, IBM AS/400, Unix (or Linux), or Novell machine.
6
TCP/IP Configuration
TCP/IP LineJet Print Server Configuration
This configuration procedure assumes you have an existing network and
TCP/IP attached to a Windows 95/98/NT, Unix, or other machine.
You will configure network printing by adding the necessary TCP/IP values to
the LineJet Print Server and associating the Print Server as an output port for
a Windows printer on a 95/98/NT client or server, or to a print queue or logical
printer in Unix, AS/400, or HP e3000.
Before You Begin
1. You must obtain the IP address and subnet mask to be used for the
LineJet Print Server. In addition, a gateway value may be needed. A
gateway is a device that knows how to find other TCP/IP devices on other
sections of the network that may need to know about the LineJet printer.
2. The NetBEUI/NetBIOS protocol may be used to define the network port
for a Windows printer, for example. (Use the following sequence: Start,
Settings, Printers, Add, network printer, network path or queue name...)
NetBEUI/NetBIOS does not route, which means you must use it on a
single network segment, but this setup is ideal for a single network or a
small network.
131
Chapter
6
TCP/IP LineJet Print Server Configuration
Creating Aliases
All TCP/IP systems are designed to make multiple operations easy by using
an alias, which is a logical name to IP/MAC address association. This step is
important in the Unix world if DNS (Domain Name Services) is being used; it
can also simplify the other environments.
Locate the hosts file. (If you are using Windows 95/98 and have never had a
hosts file, you can create one by using Notepad or any other text editor and
saving it to the Windows directory.) Edit the file to add your new LineJet
Printer, and save the file. Rebooting is not necessary.
Location of hosts file:
Windows 95/98windows
NTwindows/system32/drivers/etc
Unix/etc
HP e3000host.net.sys
Example of entries in a hosts file:
10.200.30.123 printer1
10.200.30.130 accounting
192.168.2.33 next_state
10.200.30.18 MIS
Note
Make the names easy to remember but descriptively useful.
In most Unix systems using DNS, a hosts table is constructed as shown
above. The file nsswitch.conf or its equivalent is then edited to associate a
MAC (hardware address) to an IP address in the hosts file. In doing this, any
individual client workstation needs only a single address entry—specifically,
the DNS host address—as a ping to printer1 is actually resolved by the DNS
machine and returned to the client workstation. This means an administrator
need maintain only one hosts file for all to use, making updating central.
For peer to peer and small networks, using a local hosts table on each
workstation can function in place of DNS.
132
Methods For Setting TCP/IP Values
Methods For Setting TCP/IP Values
Methods available to set TCP/IP values vary based the operating
environment (see Table 11).
Table 11. Available TCP/IP Setup Methods
Note
Operating Environment
arp
bootp
DHCP
Unix, HP e3000, Windows NT, OS/2
á
á
á
Windows 95/98
á
AS/400
á
á*
*AS/400 can use bootp as of OS/400 v4.3
•
arp. Easy to use but cannot be routed, so printer and host computer must
be on same network segment. Requires the use of print server MAC.
•
bootp. Workhorse method. Can be routed, and allows assigning of IP
address, subnet mask, and gateway value in one step.
•
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol). Easy in concept, but a
poor choice for printers, because printers must always have the same IP
values. If the MAC value is known, however, DHCP can be used to
facilitate the location of print servers.
If you are unsure which method to use, you can use the front panel of the
printer to set the TCP/IP values without a live network connection.
For bootp, arp, and NetBEUI/NetBIOS, the MAC address of the LineJet Print
Server is required. If the LineJet Print Server is pre-installed, the MAC
address can be obtained by using the LineJet printer diagnostic print test
E-Net Test Page, or by using the printer control panel to view the MAC
Address value in the ETHERNET PARAMS configuration submenu (see page
120 for details). In addition, a label attached to the rear of the printer shows
the MAC address, which reads 00:80:72:xx:yy:zz. This value is also known as
the “hardware address” or “ethernet address.”
The DHCP is useful to locate a print server. DHCP generally is not useful for
using other than NetBEUI/NetBIOS, as most queueing mechanisms need to
know the static location (IP address) of a printer, and with each DHCP power
on cycle will likely change.
133
Chapter
6
TCP/IP LineJet Print Server Configuration
Assign TCP/IP Values
Method 1: Using the Printer Control Panel
All of the basic TCP/IP values can easily be set and stored in the LineJet Print
Server via the printer front panel under the ETHERNET PARAMS menu.
Refer to “Configuration Using The Printer Control Panel” on page 62 for
detailed instructions.
Set the IP Address, Subnet Mask or Gateway Values, then press the ON
LINE key to store those values in the LineJet Print Server. These steps do not
require the printer to be connected to your network.
After setting the TCP/IP values, connect the printer to the designated hub or
switch port via UTP cable. With the LineJet printer powered on, use a ping to
the assigned IP Address for the LineJet Print Server:
•
Windows 95/98/NT, OS/2. Open a DOS shell (or OS/2 window) and type:
ping xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx using the IP value you assigned above.
•
AS/400. At a command prompt, type:
ping ‘xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx’ (IP address must be in single quotes).
•
Unix. At a terminal session command prompt, type:
ping xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx.
Note
If you made a hosts table alias name entry (or set up DNS) you can ping the
alias instead of having to remember the actual IP Address. Similarly, the
alias can be substituted for the URL in telnet sessions or Web browser
sessions.
If you receive a “reply received from…” message, then proceed. If you get a
“destination unreachable” message or “no reply from...” message, recheck
values and cables you have used.
Once you have established a positive ping response, you may wish to use a
browser to change or set items (such as the workgroup name to match that of
your client network), or to change other values or names or check printer
status. To do this, open your browser. In the URL line, enter the IP Address of
the LineJet Print Server and press ENTER. When the LineJet Web Page
displays, click on “Configuration.” When prompted for a user name and ID,
enter root and press ENTER. Press ENTER again for a blank password. You
may now change the workgroup name and other values.
If your web browser is set to use a proxy (or you don’t know), use a telnet
command session order to finish your setup using store and set commands
(refer to Chapter 12, “Commands”).
Use the following example of a telnet session to change the Windows
workgroup name in the LineJet Print Server from “workgroup” (the default) to
“Acme.”
134
Assign TCP/IP Values
For Windows 95/98/NT or OS/2, open a DOS window. For AS/400, start from
a command prompt. For Unix, start from a terminal session prompt:
telnet xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
> login
> user ‘root’ (default user name for configuration)
> anything (default is no password)
> welcome root user (sample response)
> store pserver smb workgroup Acme
> ok
> reset (print server will need about 30 seconds to reset)
session disconnected
You should now be able to browse the LineJet Print Server in “Network
Neighborhood,” which has resources d1prn, d2prn, d3prn, d4prn.
•
The TCP/IP values are not stored in the printer configuration, so it is not
necessary to use the printer configuration menu for the above.
•
If the printer is attached to your network via UTP cable and you entered a
gateway value, then executing the E-Net Test Page will verify your
settings and execute a ping to the gateway. A “good” response is “gw-IP
is alive” which assures you of a functioning network connection
(cable is good, connection is functional, values are correct, all that
remains is setting up printing).
Method 2: Setting TCP/IP Values Using A Network
Start with the printer powered off. Have the IP Address, Subnet Mask, and
Gateway values ready.
For arp assignment, the syntax is:
arp -s
ipaddress
MAC_address
Example using Windows 95/98/NT:
On a DOS command prompt, enter:
arp -s 192.168.20.20 00-80-72-09-00-5F
(set the static arp value; be certain to replace the IP Address of this
example with a valid one of your own)
list arp -a
(to ensure you have the “static entry”)
Example using Unix (not AIX):
On a command prompt, enter:
arp -s 192.168.20.20 00:80:72:09:00:5F
(set the static arp value; be certain to replace the IP Address of this
example with a valid one of your own)
Example using AIX:
On a command prompt, enter:
arp -s ether 192.168.20.20 00:80:72:09:00:5F
(set the static arp value; be certain to replace the IP Address of this
example with a valid one of your own)
135
Chapter
Note
6
TCP/IP LineJet Print Server Configuration
Windows uses hyphens to separate the values in the MAC address; Unix
and others use colons.
Now power the printer up, and wait a minute or more for the LineJet Print
Server to obtain the address above.
Test by issuing the command ping IP_address.
If you do not get a positive ping response, check your arp table entry, and
check that the printer is on the same “wire” as you (the same IP address
range, different only in the value after the last period). Verify that you have not
typed an IP address that you or someone else is already using. If you have,
type the command arp -d IP_address at a DOS prompt to delete the
incorrect entry and then type the correct value.
If you do get a positive ping response, remove the static arp entry (to avoid
conflict) by using either telnet or a web browser. At a DOS prompt, type the
command arp -d 192.168.20.20 (with your own IP Address value in
place of this one). Then store this value into the LineJet Print Server.
Telnet
Using a DOS window (or a third party tool capable of a telnet session), use
the following:
telnet xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx or hosts_table_name
login: root (default)
password: (no password is default)
welcome root user> (ignore warning messages about differences)
store TCP/IP 1 addr from current (save the arp assigned value)
list TCP/IP (you will see your IP address and a subnet address. If the
subnet address is incorrect, use the following command to modify it)
store TCP/IP 1 mask 255.255.255.0 (enter your mask value in place
of this one)
If you have a gateway value, enter it now using the following commands:
store TCP/IP add default router gateway_value 1
reset (after a minute or so, you should be able to ping the print server)
136
Using BOOTP
Web Browser
Initiate the Web browser and enter the IP Address or hosts table name in the
URL line.
Click on “Configuration.”
Log in as root, no password.
Enter the values you need for subnet mask and gateway and click “Submit.”
Delete the static arp entry: at a DOS prompt, type the command arp -d
192.168.20.20 (with your own IP Address value in place of this one). Then
click on “System Administration” and “Reset Adapter” to store the values.
Note
Windows 95/98 pre-winsoc2 TCP/IP has a bug in which an arp entry will
not be created unless a valid arp entry exists in the arp table on the client
you are using. To ensure you have a valid arp entry, ping your own
workstation in the DOS window and type the command arp -a to view the
arp table before using the arp -s command.
Using BOOTP
BOOTP allows you to assign an IP address to the LineJet Print Server upon
bootup. In addition, the BOOTP server can provide additional details such as
a default router/gateway address. To configure the LineJet Print Server with
its TCP/IP settings using BOOTP, complete the following steps.
1. On your BOOTP server, make an entry in the /etc/bootptab file for the
LineJet Print Server.
Syntax:
LineJetIPname:\
:sm=netmask:\
:hd=homedirectory:\
:bf=null:\
:gw=defaultgateway:\
:ht=ethernet:\
:ha=ethernetaddress:\
:ip=ipaddress:\
:ts=timeserver:\
:to=timezone:
Example:
spike:\
:sm=255.255.255.0:\
:hd=/usr/null:\
:bf=null:\
:gw=192.75.11.1:\
:ht=ethernet:\
:ha=008072070060:\
:ip=192.75.11.9:\
:ts=192.75.11.7:\
:to=25200:
137
Chapter
6
TCP/IP LineJet Print Server Configuration
2. Turn the LineJet Print Server on so that it immediately sends out a
BOOTP request. Wait one minute to allow the IP address assignment
process to complete. You should see the STAT LED (on the LineJet Print
Server interface) slow down indicating it knows about an IP address to
use.
3. Try to ping the LineJet Print Server IP address from a network station to
see if it can be seen on your network.
Note
138
You will be able to communicate with the LineJet Print Server from
network stations on different subnets if the print server has been told about
its default router/gateway in the BOOTP response from the BOOTP
server.
7
HP e3000/LineJet Print
Server Configuration
Overview
This chapter details the HP e3000 Host Configuration setup and the
HP e3000 LineJet Print Server Configuration setup.
HP e3000 / MPE-XL / MPE / iX: Host Configuration
Note
With the release of MPE/iX version 5.5 and higher, it is now possible to use
the spooler on the HP e3000 to control printing on devices attached to a
network. The Native Mode Spooler Reference Manual (HP P/N 3265090166, Edition 5, Sept. 1998 or later) and Configuring and Managing MPE/
iX Internet Services (HP P/N 32650-90835) are essential references to
assist you in this configuration.
Follow the instructions below to configure printing to a LineJet Print Server by
using TCP/IP print to socket, sometimes referred to as “native tcpip mode.”
The configuration parameters are set via entries in the file “npconfig”
(npconfig.pub.sys).
1. If you have not already done so, use program sysgen (sysgen.pub.sys) to
add the necessary logical device descriptions. Create one logical device
for each LineJet Printer you wish to add:
a. log in as MANAGER.SYS
b. enter the command :run sysgen.pub.sys
c.
at the > prompt, enter io to start the I/O configurator
d. enter the command
io> ad ldev=xx;id=HPTCPJD;path=NONE
HPTCPJD is the HP-supplied logical network device type.
e. enter the ld xx configuration command to view the addition, where
xx is the logical device number you chose in step d.
f.
enter the commands:
io> hold (to save the I/O configuration)
io> exit (to exit the I/O configurator)
139
Chapter
7
HP e3000 / MPE-XL / MPE / iX: Host Configuration
g. at the SYSGEN prompt, enter the commands:
SYSGEN> keep
SYSGEN> exit
h. to have the new configuration take effect, reboot the system with the
command, start norecovery. It is also possible to configure the
device online by using the command, ioconfig.
2. Identify the IP address, Subnet mask, and Gateway value to be used for
each LineJet Print Server. These values are necessary for any network
printing. Often, only the IP address value will vary from printer to printer.
You can assign these values to the LineJet Print Server by entering the
values in the printer control panel (see page 62), or by using the bootpd
process as described in Configuring and Managing MPE/iX Internet
Services. If you use bootpd, create an entry in the bootpd configuration file
for each LineJet Print Server you are adding. For example:
printer1: ht=ether: ha=00807209yyyy:
ip=xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx:\
sm=xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx: gw=xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx:
Note
Be sure to replace the xxx fields with the correct IP Address, Subnet
mask, and Gateway mask values you are using.
In this example, the ha value is the MAC address of the LineJet Print
Server being added. Replace yyyy with the last four digits of the MAC
address for the individual print server. If the LineJet Print Server is preinstalled, the MAC address can be obtained by using the LineJet printer
diagnostic print test E-Net Test Page, or by using the printer control panel
to view the MAC Address value in the ETHERNET PARAMS
configuration submenu (displayed on page 120). In addition, a label
attached to the rear of the printer will show the MAC address, which reads
00:80:72:xx:yy:zz.
3. Configure the printer so the active emulation is PCL, PCL/PGL, or
PCL/VGL, depending on your printer software. This configuration should
also be set as the printer’s power-up configuration.
4. Log in to the LineJet Print Server using a telnet session. You can use
telnet on your HP e3000, or another workstation with TCP/IP installed
(such as Windows, etc.), or via a web browser session. Use the following
commands to establish a reverse communication channel for PJL to
function:
a. telnet xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx or telnet host_name
(example: telnet 192.192.192.192 or telnet LineJet1)
Note
The telnet host_name command will only work if the host's table entry
(with the xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx format has been defined in the host file of the
HP e3000).
b. log in as user name root, no password (or by using the user name
and password you may have stored in the adapter).
140
c.
set dest d1prn backchannel prn
save
list dest (this will allow you to see your change)
exit
5. The npconfig file is read each time the printer commands spooler
nn;start or startspool nn are used, meaning if corrections are
needed to the file it is not necessary to restart the HP e3000, only the
spooler. Stop the spooler by using a stopspool command, then restart it
using one of the commands described above.
Create or modify the npconfig file. As a starting point, you can use the
system file npconfig.samp.
For each logical network printer that points to a physical LineJet Print
Server using the npconfig file entries, make the following minimum entries
(assume a logical device 201 has been set in sysgen):
201 ( network_address = xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
tcp_port_number = 9100
pjl_supported = true
snmp_enabled = false
jam_recovery = false
data_timeout = 30 )
The entry snmp_enabled = false must be entered as shown.
If you have other HP LaserJet printers already configured while using a global
setup_file entry, and you experience font or other difficulties with the
LineJet line matrix printers, create a separate setup file which is empty to
override the global entries. This may be required since the LineJet printer
uses PCL Level II, which is a minimal set of PCL, and the typical HP e3000
global setup file may contain PCL commands beyond those in PCL II. This will
not affect your ability to use the LineJet printer effectively. The syntax for the
setup file is setup_file = name.
Use npconfig entries banner_header and banner_trailer for banner or
trailer pages. Be aware that the default value is “true,” so banners will print by
default.
141
Chapter
7
LineJet Print Server Configuration Verification
LineJet Print Server Configuration Verification
1. Print the Current Configuration in the printer and verify the installed
Function Code (minimum version 356351, Version 2.07P or later). Install
the latest version via ftp if not present and reenter all printer
configurations. (For ftp instructions, see “Loading Code Through The
Ethernet Port Using ftp” on page 36.) The Function Code version installed
is listed as "Program File Version xxxx Part No. xxxxxx" at the top of the
configuration printout. Ethernet Version is a few lines below the program
File version on the configuration printout. The Ethernet firmware version
must be 1.1.3 or later and is only copied to the printer when the Function
Code is loaded via the Network Interface (via ftp).
2. On the Current Configuration printout:
a. Under Host Interface, verify Ethernet is selected and change the
buffer size to 8K (from 16K).
b. Under Ethernet Parameters, verify the IP address, Subnet mask, and
Gateway are correctly listed.
c.
Note
If you are not using Novell or NetBIOS for network printing, disable
Novell and NetBIOS under Ethernet parameters. This avoids
unnecessary protocol broadcasts.
When going through the menus, continue pressing the arrow key until the
menu you want displays.
3. Print the E-Net Test Page as follows:
a. OFFLINE / CONFIG CONTROL
b. LEFT ARROW twice to PRINTER DIAGNOSTICS
c.
DOWN ARROW to PRINTER TESTS
d. DOWN ARROW again to SHIFT RECYCLE
e. LEFT ARROW to E-NET TEST PAGE (or, if something else displays,
press left arrow repeatedly until E-Net Test Page is displayed).
4. Verify the Subnet mask (Netmask) is correct in two locations on the E-Net
Test Page: under Network Information and TCP/IP Routing Table. The
Netmask must be the same in both locations.
For example, if the desired Netmask is listed as 255.255.255.0
under Network Information, and if the Netmask is listed as
255.255.255.255 under TCP/IP Routing Table, then the Netmask
does not match and you must correct the Netmask.
To correct an incorrectly associated Subnet mask (Netmask) complete
the following steps:
a. Take the printer offline.
b. Modify the Gateway from the front panel to the default address of
0.0.0.0.
142
c.
Place the printer online and wait for the front panel to display “E-Net
Ready.” This will write the Gateway address to the network I/F
NvRam.
d. Take the printer offline and enter the desired Gateway address.
e. Place the printer online and wait for the front panel to display “E-Net
Ready.” This will write the Gateway address to the network I/F
NvRam.
f.
Print E-Net Test Page and verify both listed Netmasks are the same
and that xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx is alive is printed under Default
Gateway Ping Test (xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx = Gateway IP address).
5. Inspect “Printer Destinations” on the E-Net Test Page. Reprint the E-Net
Test Page and verify the backchannel is set to prn for the d1prn queue.
On an HP e3000 host, prn must be listed under BACK for the d1prn
queue so that Printer Job Language (PJL) will operate properly. (PJL
must be operational for Page Level Recovery [PLR] to function.) The
backchannel for the d1prn printer queue can be set with a telnet session
from a PC running a DOS session as shown below:
C:\telnet 15.31.40.147
Network Printer Server Version 1.1.3 (15.31.40.147)
login: root
Password: (carriage return)
Welcome root User
15.31.40.147:root> set dest d1prn backchannel prn
ok
15.31.40.147:root> save
15.31.40.147:root> exit
6. The npconfig.pub.sys file is loaded each time the spooler is started.
Verify the npconfig.pub.sys file contains the (pjl_supported),
(snmp_enabled), and (data_timeout) lines for each LineJet
printer. Here is a typical list of the npconfig.pub.sys entry for a LineJet:
npconfig.pub.sys listing:
Comments:
6 (NETWORK_ADDRESS = 192.6.1.71 (IP address – no
leading zeros)
tcp_port_number = 9100
setup_file = SETUP6.PUB.SYS
(this line optional)
(optional - specific
setup file for LDev 6)
pjl_supported = TRUE
(required for PJL to
function)
snmp_enabled = FALSE
data_timeout = 30
banner_header = false
(required)
(required)
(optional – turns
off headers)
banner_trailer = false)
(optional – turns
off trailers)
143
Chapter
7
LineJet Print Server Configuration Verification
The line setup_file = filename is the file that contains
customized setup strings to specify the printer operating mode for this
logical device. This file must be an unnumbered file. When no setup file is
specified, the default MPE/iX environment or the global setup file is
applied at print time to the printer. The spooler will send the contents of
the setup file, even if it is empty, which overrides its own default
initialization. So, for example, if you want the pitch to be determined by
the printer’s front panel setting (e.g., CPI 10, etc.), set the setup_file
to an empty file.
7. Whenever any parameters are changed (PCL-II, Host Interface, etc.) the
configuration must be saved. Then, the saved configuration must be
designated as the Power Up Configuration. If this step is not performed,
the printer will revert to the factory default configuration at power up
(parallel I/F – not Ethernet) and communication with the host would
become non-functional.
As we have changed some configuration values in this procedure (Host
Interface Buffer size), you must save this configuration to a numbered
location (1-8) and designate that configuration as the power up
configuration. Failure to save and designate the saved configuration as
the desired power up configuration will result in problems, such as loss of
communication, after powering off/on the printer.
144
Method 1
Methods Of Adjusting Paper Position
When the HP e3000 spooler is active and the paper needs to be adjusted (the
print is too far up or too far down on the page) or replaced, use one of the
methods below to set the paper position. You can also defer printing or
temporarily stop the spooler (stopspool nn) to ensure no print jobs will
release.
Note
LineJet printers have Line Feed (LF), Form Feed (FF), and Set TOF keys
on the printer panel. These keys are intended to be used to adjust paper
position before the start of any print job.
When the HP e3000 spooler owns the printer, the FF, LF, and Set TOF
keys do not operate. If you press any of these keys, the message “Invalid
Key - Press View” displays. (If you want to check your output, press the
View key.) When the HP e3000 spooler does not own the printer, these
keys have their normal function.
Method 1
Place the printer offline from the control panel, open the printer platen, and
manually roll paper back and forth as required via the knob on the tractor
shaft. To put the printer back into active service, close the platen, press
CLEAR, and place back online. This procedure is safe at any time.
Method 2
Place the printer offline from the control panel. Press and hold either the
SHIFT+Up arrow or SHIFT+Down arrow to “micro-step” the paper up or down
as needed. Place the printer back online.
Note
The operation of the View key has been enhanced to include a new
function. Normally, pressing the View key will move paper six inches up so
the print can be viewed, and a second depression of the View key will
move the paper down into the print position. This function is helpful when
aligning forms.
The new function of the View key is invoked with a long depression of the
View key. When the View key is pressed and held, paper will advance
three complete forms, allowing tearoff at the rear of the printer. After
advancing paper three forms for tearoff, placing the printer ONLINE will
move paper downward two forms and printing will resume.
The new function of the View key is only available with Function Code
Version 356351, Rev. 2.07P or later.
145
Chapter
7
Using Page Level Recovery On LineJet Printers
Using Page Level Recovery On LineJet Printers
The native mode spooler on MPE/iX 5.5 (and later) supports Page Level
Recovery (PLR). PLR provides the ability to restart printing at any page of a
document due to device problems or a suspended spooler. (Refer to the HP
e3000 MPE/iX Native Mode Spooler Reference Manual for more information.)
Clarification on how it is handled for LineJet printers is described below.
Note
One feature of the Printer Job Language (PJL) spooler is the ability to
keep track of pages printed as a part of Page Level Recovery. On a paper
jam or paper out condition, the printer control panel displays the page
number counted.
For Page Level Recovery to be operational, the printer must have a
minimum of 4 MB Flash and DRAM memory; CMX Controller, Version 5.5
or later; and be running Function Code, Version 356351, Rev. 2.07P or
later. All of these requirements are satisfied with the LineJet and LP Series
“C” and above models. However, LP Series “A” and “B” models require
upgrading to gain Page Level Recovery functionality.
There are three types of PLR that can occur, and all three use silent run
techniques. That is, the data is sent to the printer and the printer interprets it
but does not start actual printing until the printer reaches a target starting
page specified by the spooler (e.g., the page following the last one printed).
Restarting at a user-specified page number in a command
Processing of a spool file can be suspended and then resumed. It can be
suspended by using the spooler command with the suspend parameter
or by using the suspendspool command. It can be resumed with the
spooler command with the resume parameter or by using the
resumespool command. When the spool file resumes printing, it can start
exactly where it left off or at another specified page.
For LineJet printers, the optional offset parameter in the spooler
command can only be used to specify an absolute offset (i.e., absence of a +
or – sign). When the offset parameter is not used, printing resumes where
it stopped. When the offset parameter is used, a silent run (PLR) will occur
up until the specified starting place.
Note
The CIPER protocol devices (e.g., C256x using the HP-IB interface) allow
you to specify the offset parameter with the + or – sign. With spooled
network printers such as LineJet printers, unpredictable results will occur if
the offset parameter is used with the + or – sign.
For example, to suspend spooling and to position 7 pages from the beginning
of the spool file, enter the following command:
spooler 6;suspend;offset=7
In this case, the absence of a + or – sign indicates an absolute offset from the
beginning of the spool file.
146
Method 2
Because LineJet printers are typically connected to the network with a Print
Server internal network card or JetDirect EX interface, many of the spooler
commands (e.g., those described above) should be avoided for mid-file
suspension. This is because of two reasons: 1) a great deal of data is
buffered in the network process and must be completed, and, 2) the network
connection can be dropped if the printer is ready to receive data but no data is
being sent. (Refer to the HP e3000 MPE/iX Native Mode Spooler Reference
Manual.)
Restarting at the point of interruption when a device
exception occurs
When a device exception occurs, this is an unexpected recovery situation. A
device exception includes things such as paper jams, load paper error, etc.
Assume that the LineJet printer is connected to the network with a LineJet
Print Server internal network card or an “external” JetDirect EX interface. In
order for PLR (silent run) to take place after a device exception and without
specifying spooler commands to restart, the printer must be power cycled
(e.g., after the jam). This is different from the way it may work with other HP
printers that support PLR and use an “internal” JetDirect interface. This is also
different from the way it works with the C256X printers that use the HP-IB
interface. This caveat may be one of the reasons it appears that PLR does not
work for LineJet printers. Note that printing will start with the page following
the last one printed.
Restarting at the point of interruption when a particular
spool file is reprinted after being interrupted previously by a
command
In this case, a spool file is reprinted after being interrupted by a command
such as spoolf #0 nnn;defer. For LineJet printers, when the spool file
is undeferred, after being interrupted with the deferred option, a silent run
(PLR) will occur up until the page following the last one printed.
A spool file can also be interrupted with the spooler ldev; stop
command, but this command should be avoided for a LineJet printer
connected to the network with the JetDirect EX or internal Print Server
interface. This is due to network printing problems with stopping mid-file
server.
147
Chapter
7
HP e3000 / MPE-XL / MPE / iX: DTC Configuration
HP e3000 / MPE-XL / MPE / iX: DTC Configuration
MPE-XL / MPE / iX Typical Configuration
Within NMMGR follow the menu:
Open Config
DTS
Go to Profiles
Add or
Modify
Printer Type [22]
or Printer Type File Name _______
Line Speed [9600]
Record Width [132]
Modem Type [0]
Parity [NONE]
Initially Spooled [Y]
Device Class . . . user’s choice
Save Data
Prior Screen . . . twice
Go to DTC
Config Card
Assign Profile to LDEV
Save Data
Validate Link/DTX
(21, 22, or 26)
(300 through 38400)
(1 . . . 2048 bytes)
(0-None, 1-US, 2-Europe)
(None, Even, Odd, 0’s, 1’s)
(Y,N)
After successful Validation, run SYSGEN to cross-validate the DTS
configuration with the system configuration. In order for any TIO changes to
take effect, you must reboot the system.
Within SYSGEN
sysgen> io
io> LD
io> HO
sysgen> K . . . (Keep configuration)
Note
148
Ensure that the LineJet Printer configuration matches the system baud
rate and parity.
8
Windows Configuration
Overview
This chapter details a complete Windows configuration setup including:
1. Identifying the LineJet Print Server on the network using TCP/IP as the
underlying protocol
2. Configuring the LineJet Print Server with its mandatory TCP/IP settings
(IP address and subnet mask)
3. Configuring a new printer on the Windows station
Windows Environment Description
The LineJet Print Server card supports network printing under Windows
environments by using TCP/IP. In a Windows NT setup, pure TCP/IP is used
as the network protocol whereas with Windows 95 or Windows 98,
NetBIOS over TCP/IP is used.
Figure 10 shows two of the most common Windows setups you will see with
the LineJet Print Server. The ideal configuration is a network printer defined
on the NT server to be shared by Windows 95 clients. However, any Windows
station can also go directly to the LineJet Print Server.
149
Chapter
8
Windows LineJet Print Server Configuration
Win 95
Win 95
Win 95
Win 95
NT Server
IP Router
Win 95
Figure 10. Windows Integration
Windows LineJet Print Server Configuration
The IP address and subnet mask are mandatory TCP/IP settings and are
needed before the print server can be detected on the network. There are
also additional optional settings. This section offers alternative methods for
configuring your LineJet Print Server in a Windows environment and mentions
some of the more common optional settings available.
Mandatory
Since TCP/IP is used for Windows printing, the LineJet Print Server must be
configured with a minimum of an IP address and subnet mask before it can be
seen on the network.
Optional
Additional settings, like routing entries, can be configured. This allows
communication across subnets when no other router exists.
Configuration of the LineJet Print Server can be done from the printer control
panel, Web browser, or host commands.
150
Communicating Across Routers
Communicating Across Routers
Since Windows environments rely on TCP/IP to communicate with the LineJet
Print Server, crossing routers becomes an issue.
After following one of the LineJet Print Server configuration methods
mentioned, you should be able to communicate only with the print server from
the same subnet. This means any hosts across a router will not see your
LineJet Print Server. In order for hosts across a router to see your LineJet
Print Server, store a default router/gateway within the print server so that any
packets destined for another subnet get forwarded to this router
automatically. The router (or series of routers) can then take over ensuring
the packets get to their final destination on another subnet on your network.
To configure a default router/gateway within the LineJet Print Server:
1. Load a Web browser on your Windows station and direct it to the URL
http://LineJetIPaddress/networkConf.html
(e.g., http://192.75.11.9/networkConf.html).
Note
If prompted for a User ID and password first, type in root for the ID and
press ENTER at the password prompt since there is no password by
default.
2. At the Network Configuration HTML form that displays, click in the first
field below the “Gateway” heading and type in the IP address of the
default router/gateway for the LineJet Print Server subnet.
3. Click on the SUBMIT button when done and physically repower the print
server to make the new settings take effect.
Changing Workgroup Names
Windows environments define groups of related computers as “workgroups.”
By default, the LineJet Print Server belongs to the workgroup called
WORKGROUP. However, you may want to change this to suit your network
better. To do this:
1. Load a Web browser on your Windows station and direct it to the URL
http://LineJetIPaddress/networkConf.html
(e.g., http://192.75.11.9/networkConf.html).
Note
If prompted for a User ID and password first, type in root for the ID and
press ENTER at the password prompt since there is no password by
default.
2. At the Network Configuration HTML form that displays, search for the
“Windows (NetBIOS TCP/IP)” section and highlight the “Workgroup
Name” field.
3. Type in the new workgroup name for the LineJet Print Server.
4. Click on the SUBMIT button when done and physically repower the print
server to make the new settings take effect.
151
Chapter
8
Windows LineJet Print Server Configuration
Changing Destination Names
When defining some printers within Windows environments, the LineJet Print
Server requires that you specify a pre-defined destination rather than any
name you would like. For example, when creating a new printer under
Windows NT, you are presented with a screen similar to Figure 11.
Figure 11. Windows NT Print Setup Dialogue Box
The first field requires the IP address for the LineJet Print Server and the
second field must be filled in with a valid destination from the print server
(e.g., d1prn). Otherwise, LPR will not be able to access the printer. Table 12
outlines the default destinations to choose from.
Table 12. LineJet Print Server Default Destinations
Destination
Mapped I/O Port
d1prn
PRN
d2prn
PRN
d3prn
PRN
d4prn
PRN
This name can be changed to something more meaningful using the built-in
HTML forms. To do this:
1. Load a Web browser on your Windows station and direct it to the URL
http://LineJetIPaddress/destConf.html
(e.g., http://192.75.11.9/destConf.html)
Note
If prompted for a User ID and password first, type in root for the ID and
press ENTER at the password prompt since there is no password by
default.
2. At the Print Path Configuration HTML form that displays, select a
destination link from the top of the page to bring up the appropriate
destination form. By default, you should see a line near the top of the form
showing the destinations listed in Table 12.
3. Once the desired destination HTML form displays, highlight the “Name”
field and type in the new name for this destination.
4. Click on the SUBMIT button when done and physically repower the print
server to make the new setting take effect.
152
Windows NT 3.51 Host Setup
Windows Host Configuration
This section covers Windows NT and Windows 95, Windows 3.1 and
Printronix Printing System (PPS) new printer setups.
Windows NT 3.51 Host Setup
To configure a new printer on a Windows NT 3.51 station:
1. Open the “Control Panel.”
2. Double click on “Printers.”
3. Select “Create a Printer” from the Printer menu to display the dialogue
box in Figure 12.
Figure 12. Create a Printer Dialogue Box
4. Define a name to represent this print setup and select the appropriate
driver for the printer that will be used in this setup. For printer driver
choose “generic text” or Epson “FX1050” or “Proprinter” based on print
need.
5. Under the “Print To” field, select “Other...”
6. Select “LPR Port” from the list that displays, and click OK to bring up a
dialogue box similar to the one found in Figure 13.
Figure 13. Add LPR Compatible Printer Dialogue Box
7. Type in the IP address or host name of the LineJet Print Server in the first
field.
153
Chapter
8
Windows Host Configuration
8. Type in the name of a pre-defined destination/queue on the LineJet Print
Server in the second field.
Note
This name must be a name of an existing destination/queue on the LineJet
Print Server, and it must be lowercase by default. You will probably use
d1prn.
9. Click OK when done specifying these two fields.
You now have a new network printer which relies on the standard TCP/IP
print protocol, LPD, to print remotely to a printer with the LineJet Print Server.
Windows NT 4.0 Host Setup
This installation procedure assumes that the LineJet Print Server adapter is
configured with the correct IP address, subnet mask, and gateway (if
required). In addition, the administrator can ping and telnet to the LineJet Print
Server adapter from the server console.
If this is not the case, use the printer front panel to configure the LineJet Print
Server adapter before proceeding.
1. Select “Settings:Printers” from the Start menu.
2. Double click on the “Add Printer” icon. The “Add Printer Wizard” window is
displayed.
3. Select “My Computer” and click “Next.”
154
Windows NT 4.0 Host Setup
4. At the next window, click on “Add Port ...”
5. Double click on LPR Port. If LPR Port is not listed, it means that Microsoft
TCP/IP Printing service is not installed.
155
Chapter
8
Windows Host Configuration
6. In the “Name or address of server providing lpd:” box, enter the IP
address of the LineJet Print Server adapter. In the “Name of printer or
print queue on that server:” box, enter d1prn.
7. Select the “Generic/Text only” printer driver or install the LineJet printer
driver. The generic driver is good for troubleshooting installation
problems. The network administrator can always go back and install the
LineJet printer driver at a later time. If you have the LineJet Utility CD and
you want to install the LineJet printer driver, click on “Have Disk...”
156
Windows NT 4.0 Host Setup
8. In the “Copy manufacturer’s files from” box, enter the path to the LineJet
Utility CD printer driver folder containing the NT driver. Click on “OK.”
9. Click on the “HP LineJet” in the “Printers” box, then click “Next.”
157
Chapter
8
Windows Host Configuration
10. In the “Printer name” box, enter a name for this printer. Click “Next.”
11. Determine if the printer is shared with other network users. If it is shared,
the share name and the operating system must be selected.
158
Windows NT 4.0 Host Setup
12. Print a Windows test page.
13. If there are any problems during or after installation, see “Windows NT 4.0
Host Setup Problems” on page 167.
159
Chapter
8
Windows Host Configuration
Windows 95/98 Host Setup
To configure a new printer on a Windows 95 station:
1. Select “Settings:Printers” from the Start menu.
2. Double click on the “Add Printer” icon.
3. Select “Network Printer” from the second window of the Add Printer
wizard that loaded.
4. At the next window, click on BROWSE to help fill in the network path of
this printer.
5. At the “Browse for Printer” dialogue box that displays, double click on the
appropriate workgroup containing the LineJet Print Server. By default, the
print server falls under the workgroup, “WORKGROUP.”
6. Continue searching the network until you see the LineJet Print Server
name, M_xxxxxx, where xxxxxx equals the last six digits of the print
server Ethernet address found when a configuration is printed.
7. Once you see the LineJet Print Server, double click on it to display a list of
pre-defined destinations/queues to choose from.
8. Select a destination/queue that will use d1prn.
9. Click OK once you have selected a destination.
10. Back at the network path window, select NEXT since this path should now
be filled in for you.
11. At the next window, select the appropriate print driver and click on NEXT.
12. Fill in a name for this new network printer at the next window and decide if
you want this to be the default printer. This printer name can be anything
you would like as long as it is unique.
13. When prompted for a test page, select either “Yes” or “No” depending on
the state of the attached printer and click on FINISH.
Windows may ask for a disk or CD-ROM to load the appropriate printer driver
to complete this new printer setup.
There should now be a new printer icon within the Printers folder. This new
network printer relies on NetBIOS over TCP/IP as the underlying protocol to
print to the LineJet Print Server.
Printronix Printing System (PPS) Host Setup
To configure a PPS LPR port for a printer on a Windows station, you will need
to:
1. Insert the CD and locate the “PPS” file in the Utilities section.
2. Double click on the PPS ZIP file to extract all files within it to a directory
on the Windows station.
3. Once extracted to a directory, find the Setup file and double click on this
to load the InstallShield Wizard.
4. Answer the prompts throughout the wizard and select “Yes” to restart
your computer at the end.
160
Windows 3.1 Host Setup
5. Once your computer is rebooted, open the Settings:Printers folder to view
your existing printers.
Note
PPS will only work with an existing printer. Therefore, if you do not have an
existing printer that you can alter, create one now using any port settings
you would like. These will be changed in the following steps.
6. Select the printer that you want to use with PPS and click the right mouse
button to bring up a sub-menu.
7. Select “Properties” from this menu to display the current settings for this
printer.
8. Click on the “Details” tab to display the printer port settings.
9. Click on the ADD PORT button.
10. At the “Add Port” dialogue box that displays, click on the button labeled
“Other.”
11. Click on “TCP/IP Printer Port” within the Other list.
12. At the next dialogue box that displays, fill in the host name or IP address
of the LineJet Print Server in the first field.
13. Fill in a valid TCP port number on the LineJet Print Server in the second
field. The choice is 4400 or 9100 for PRN.
14. Click OK when done to return to the “Details” window. You should now
see something relating to “PPS Port” within the “Print to the following
port:” field.
15. Click OK to close this printer properties window.
You now have a new network printer which relies on PPS to print remotely to
a printer off of the LineJet Print Server.
Windows 3.1 Host Setup
If you are running Windows 3.1 stations on your network, you will need to rely
on either TCP/IP or IPX to print to the LineJet Print Server. If IPX is used, you
will have a print queue defined on a Novell file server to which your Windows
3.1 stations will send their print jobs. The LineJet Print Server will then service
this print queue as either a PSERVER or an RPRINTER. Please see Chapter
10, “Novell Configuration” for additional details.
If you want to rely on TCP/IP, you will need a third party TCP stack loaded
onto your Windows station since TCP/IP support did not automatically come
with Windows until the introduction of Windows NT and Windows 95. You
may also be running a third party stack if you decided not to use a Microsoft
operating system.
Some common TCP stacks are FTP Software's OnNet, NetManager's
Chameleon, and Frontier Technologies' SuperTCP. In each case, they allow
your Windows 3.1 station to communicate with other TCP/IP devices. This
means you can send print jobs to the LineJet Print Server as well.
161
Chapter
8
Windows Host Configuration
The most common print method offered with Windows TCP stacks is LPR/
LPD, a multi-platform remote printing protocol used on everything from PCs to
mainframes. The LPR print setup is very simplistic, involving only two
parameters:
1. LineJet Print Server IP address. The IP address or host name of the
print server you want to print to.
2. LineJet Print Server destination/queue. A pre-defined name on the
print server telling the device which I/O port to send the jobs to. The
standard name for the PRN port is d1prn. This destination name is case
sensitive, and, by default, all names are lowercase.
162
LineJet Print Server Card Cannot Be Found On The
Windows Troubleshooting Tips
This section provides information on possible solutions to some standard
configuration errors. If you require technical support, please have as much of
the following information as you can available when you call:
1. What level of software are you running?
2. What type of attachment do you have?
3. What is your host operating system?
4. Give a detailed description of the problem.
5. How often, and when, does the problem occur?
6. Give a detailed description of your network and the components attached.
Please follow these tips to determine what the problem may be with your
LineJet Print Server configuration.
LineJet Print Server Card Cannot Be Found On The
Network
•
Have you assigned the LineJet Print Server a unique and valid IP address
which corresponds with the other IP addresses on your network? For
example, are you sure no other device is using this IP address?
•
Are you sure you are trying to talk to the LineJet Print Server from a
Windows station on the same subnet? Currently, the print server can only
be seen locally unless you configured a routing entry earlier.
•
If you look at the back of the printer, is the STAT LED flashing once a
second or is it quicker than that? A slower, once-a-second rate tells you
that the print server is in fact configured with an IP address. A faster rate
says it knows nothing about this so, you may need to try the configuration
process again.
•
Have you confirmed that the network connection to the LineJet Print
Server is working correctly? Trying different network cables and locations
will help narrow down the problem.
HTML Configuration Forms Will Not Display
•
Can you ping the LineJet Print Server from your Windows station? If not,
refer to the section titled, “LineJet Print Server Card Cannot Be Found On
The Network”.
•
Have you used the correct URL for the LineJet Print Server home page?
It should be http://LineJetIPaddress
(e.g., http://192.75.11.9)
163
Chapter
8
Windows Troubleshooting Tips
Errors Occur When Defining An LPR Printer
•
Can you ping the LineJet Print Server from your Windows NT station? If
not, refer to the “LineJet Print Server Card Cannot Be Found On The
Network” section.
•
Did you specify the correct IP address or host name for the LineJet Print
Server in the first field of the “Add LPR Compatible Printer” box?
•
Did you specify a valid destination/queue on the LineJet Print Server in
the second field of the “Add LPR Compatible Printer” dialogue box? If so,
did you also enter it in lowercase letters?
•
LPR is available only on Windows NT, not on Windows 95 or 98 (unless
third party software is added).
Cannot Browse The LineJet Print Server Card On
The Network
•
Have you looked under the right Windows workgroup? By default, the
LineJet Print Server will be found under “WORKGROUP.”
•
Are you able to browse other Windows stations and devices on the
network from this same station?
•
Has this Windows station been given enough time to update its registry so
it can see this newly added workgroup device? Sometimes Windows
stations can take considerable time, depending on the size of the
network.
Printer Errors When Printing Or No Output
Note
164
•
Is there a large job currently printing taking up all of the printer resources?
Usually when printing from Windows 95 stations, a busy printer can cause
Windows to display a printer error message. This is because it demands
immediate printer attention rather than holding the data until the printer is
ready again. The best way around this is to use a central spooling station
like an NT server.
•
Have you tried restarting the spooler under “Control Panel:Services”?
Sometimes this is needed to get printing started.
As a last resort, you may want to reboot the Windows station. Sometimes
this is the only option to completely clear this situation. The LineJet Print
Server usually has nothing to do with this problem.
TCP/IP Access Problem
TCP/IP Access Problem
If you can ping the printer from a workstation, but you cannot Web browse,
Telnet, or print to the printer through the LineJet Print Server, there may be an
incorrect entry in the TCP access list. In order for this workstation to use the
LineJet Print Server interface in this case, one of two things must happen:
1. The TCP list must have an entry added to grant access to this
workstation.
2. All entries must be deleted from the TCP list to grant all workstations/
hosts access to the above TCP services.
To view the current access list, use the printer control panel to access the
configuration menu (see Chapter 4 for configuration menu information). From
the DIAGNOSTICS/Printer Tests menu choose the E-Net Test Page. When
the page prints, look under the “TCP ACCESS TABLE” section for the TCP
access list entries.
To add or delete a TCP access list entry, refer to “TCP Access Lists” on page
237.
Note
When the following procedure is used, the TCP access list will be cleared,
but all IP addresses will need to be entered again after the procedure is
complete.
To reset all TCP/IP values to the factory defaults when access is impossible:
1. Obtain a printer configuration printout using the control panel. See
Chapter 4 for configuration menu information.
2. Power off the printer.
3. On the Print Server Interface, place SWITCH 2 in the down position.
4. Power on the printer and wait for the ONLINE state.
5. On the Print Server Interface, place SWITCH 2 in the up position.
6. From a workstation attached to this network segment, create an ARP
entry. The LineJet Print Server IP address and hardware or MAC address
are needed. At the workstation enter:
arp -s <ipaddress> <MACaddress>
ping <ipaddress>
7. Try to ping this IP address to see if the LineJet Print Server can be seen
on your network. If the interface does not respond, verify you are on the
same network segment as the printer and that the ARP entry was
created.
8. Telnet into the Print Server using the same IP address as above. Log in
as root with no password.
165
Chapter
8
Windows Troubleshooting Tips
9. At the system prompt, enter:
store tcpip from default
config http on
save
reset
Note
This will reset all TCP/IP settings to factory default and reset the LineJet
Print Server.
10. Power the printer off and then back on.
11. Set the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway parameters to the
desired values.
12. If Web browser access does not work, Telnet into the LineJet Print Server
as root. Enter the following command:
config http on
If you are still experiencing difficulty accessing or browsing the printer, contact
technical support.
Web Browser/HTTP Problem
In some cases you may not be able to browse the printer web page simply
because the LineJet Print Server HTTP may be turned off.
If you cannot ping the LineJet Print Server IP address, make sure the IP
Address, subnet mask, and default gateway are set correctly by checking the
Ethernet Parameters menu from the operator panel. See Chapter 4 for
configuration menu information.
If you can ping the LineJet Print Server IP address but cannot access the web
pages, perform the following procedure to verify the LineJet Print Server
HTTP is turned on.
1. Telnet into the Print Server and log in as root with no password.
2. At the system prompt enter the following commands:
config http on
save
reset
3. After approximately 30 seconds, point your browser to the Print Server IP
address. The printer web pages should now be accessible.
If you are still experiencing difficulty accessing or browsing the printer, contact
technical support.
166
Windows NT 4.0 Host Setup Problems
Windows NT 4.0 Host Setup Problems
The installation procedure covered earlier in this chapter assumes that the
LineJet Print Server adapter is configured with the correct IP address, subnet
mask and gateway (if required), and that the administrator can ping and telnet
to the LineJet Print Server adapter from the server console. If this is not the
case, use the printer front panel to configure the LineJet Print Server adapter
before proceeding.
The LineJet Print Server installation for Windows NT 4.0 also requires
“Microsoft TCP/IP Printing” service on the server. To install this service, click
on the Network icon in the Control Panel and click on the “Services” tab. Click
on “Add Service” and select “Microsoft TCP/IP printing.”
•
Are you logged in as the “Administrator”?
This installation requires administrator privileges.
•
“LPR port” is not listed in step 5.
Cancel the installation and install Microsoft TCP/IP printing service on the
server.
•
LPR configuration warning during step 6.
The Ethernet cable is not plugged in, or the printer is not turned on. This
message is a communication failure between the NT server and the
LineJet Print Server card. Check cabling, IP address settings, gateway,
etc.
•
Test page does not print or prints incorrectly.
1. Is the printer online? Re-send test page.
2. The print queue name in step 6 should be d1prn; however, the name can
be changed. To verify the queue names, print an Ethernet Test Page.
3. The Printronix NT print driver requires P-Series emulation active on the
printer. The Generic/Text driver should print in any printer emulation.
4. Delete then re-install Microsoft TCP/IP Print service on the server.
167
Chapter
168
8
Windows Troubleshooting Tips
9
Unix Configuration
Overview
This chapter details a complete Unix setup including:
1. Configuring the LineJet Print Server with its mandatory TCP/IP settings
(i.e., IP address and subnet mask).
2. Configuring the Unix host station with a new printer.
169
Chapter
9
Unix Environment Description
Unix Environment Description
The LineJet Print Server supports network printing under various TCP/IP
environments including all variations of Unix. Printing can come from multiple
hosts directly or through central spooling machines. Figure 14 illustrates this.
Linux
XTerm
Solaris
PC
PC
PC
Ultrix
OSF/1
XTerm
IRIX
SparcStation
SunOS 4.1.1
IP Router
SCO
HP-UX
Figure 14. Unix Integration
170
Mandatory
Unix LineJet Print Server Configuration
There are mandatory settings needed before the print server can be detected
on the network, as well as some additional optional settings. This section
offers alternative methods for configuring your LineJet Print Server and
mentions some of the more common optional settings available.
Mandatory
The LineJet Print Server must be assigned TCP/IP values of IP Address,
Subnet Mask, and Gateway Value (if required) before setting up and
establishing print queues and logical Unix printers. Refer to Chapter 6, “TCP/
IP Configuration” for more information.
Additionally, the file “etc/hosts” on the Unix system (or the DNS server known
to the Unix workstation being set up) must be updated to include the IP
Address and logical name for the LineJet Print Server, or a DNS server needs
to be set with this information so that the Unix print daemons (software
processes) can communicate with the physical LineJet Print Server.
Optional
Additional settings, like routing entries, can be configured allowing for
communication across subnets.
Configuration of the LineJet Print Server can be done from the control panel
or through host commands.
Communicating Across Routers
Since Unix environments rely on TCP/IP to communicate with the LineJet
Print Server, attention must be paid to routing.
After following one of the LineJet Print Server configuration methods
mentioned (other than the BOOTP method), you will most likely only be able
to communicate with the print server from the same subnet. This means any
host across a router will not be able to see your LineJet Print Server. In order
to communicate across a router, it is possible to store a static default router/
gateway within the print server so that any packets destined for another
subnet get forwarded to this router automatically. The router (or series of
routers) can then take over ensuring the packets get to their final destination
on another subnet on your network.
To configure a default router/gateway within the LineJet Print Server:
1. Use the printer front panel to configure the gateway value.
2. Load a Web browser on your Unix station on the same subnet and direct
it to the URL http://LineJetIPaddress/networkConf.html
(e.g., http://192.75.11.9/networkConf.html)
Note
If prompted for a User ID and password first, type in root for the ID and
press ENTER at the password prompt since there is no default password.
171
Chapter
9
Unix Host Configuration
3. At the Network Configuration HTML form that displays, click in the first
field below the “Gateway” heading and type in the IP address of the
default router/gateway for the LineJet Print Server subnet.
4. Click on the SUBMIT button when done and physically repower the print
server to make sure the new setting is in effect.
Unix Host Configuration
There may be times when you would prefer to or have to perform the manual
setup steps for a new printer definition. There may also be times when you
require a less common print solution such as direct socket capabilities. This
section covers these additional setups.
Printing Setup On HP-UX
Method 1, SAM
A simple way to set up printing on HP-UX is using SAM, the system
administration tool.
1. At the command prompt in a terminal session, start SAM.
2. Double click on “Printers/Plotters.”
3. Under “Actions,” choose “Add Remote Printer.”
4. In the entry panel that opens, make the following entries (remember Unix
is case sensitive, so d1prn is not the same as D1PRN):
a. For Printer Name, enter anything you want. This is actually the Unix
Queue name, for example, “Accounting.”
b. For Remote System Name, enter the DNS/pingable name, for
example, “MyLineJet.”
c.
For Remote Printer Name, enter a dest on the LineJet, for example,
“d1prn.”
d. Accept defaults for Remote Cancel model and Remote Status model.
e. Check the box next to “Remote Printer is on a BSD system.”
f.
Click on OK.
5. You will be asked if you want to add the new printer to HP Vue, this is
optional. Other optional choices include making this the system printer
and allowing anyone to cancel a job.
6. Test your new printer by either a command line print:
lp -d Accounting /etc/inetd.conf
or, via an application which can be directed to a selected printer.
172
Printing Setup On HP-UX
Method 2, Command Line
The following procedure requires root privilege.
1. Assume a print queue (aka Unix printer). Quality is desired.
2. DNS/IP Address name of LineJet Print Server is MyLineJet.
3. The dest d4prn is to be used on the LineJet Print Server.
4. The default BSD interface file rmodel on the HP-UX system will be
used.
5. Issue the following commands (in order shown):
lpshut (stops the print scheduler)
lpadmin -pQuality -mrmodel -v/dev/null -ormMyLineJet orpd4prn -ob3 (sets up queue)
lpsched (restarts print scheduler)
accept Quality (allows queue to accept jobs)
enable Quality (allows queue to pass jobs)
Explanation of command line:
-m indicates the model rmodel is to be associated with Quality
-v indicates the use of /dev/null as a file interlock to avoid contention
-orm is the name of remote Print Server
-orp is the name of the remote printer on the remote Print Server
-ob3 declares that the remote Print Server is a BSD type
Other useful commands are lpstat and lpmove [ /usr/lib ]
6. You can now do a test print:
lp -d Quality /etc/inetd.conf
HP-UX Typical Configuration, Parallel or Serial Attachment
Printers set up on HP-PB & CIO computers
Table 13. Drivers Required
Interface
HP-PB
CIO 6 CHANNEL
MUX
CIO 16 CHANNEL
MUX
Serial
mux2
mux0,cio_ca0
mux0_16,cio,ca0
Parallel
lpr2
N/A
N/A
The Drivers shown in this table should be installed in the Kernel
Configuration.
173
Chapter
9
Unix Host Configuration
HP-UX Configuration Guidelines
Within SAM follow the menu:
Printers and Plotters
Printers/Plotters
Printer/Plotter Manager menu ... select Actions
Add Local Printer/Plotter
Add parallel Printer/Plotter or
Add serial Printer/Plotter
If parallel printer is selected:
Printer Name
Printer Model Interface
Printer Device File Name
Printer Class
user’s choice
user’s choice
SAM creates a special file
user’s choice
If serial printer is selected:
The system displays the Serial Interface Hardware Paths
Port
select a valid port
Printer Name
user’s choice
Printer Model Interface
user’s choice
Printer Device File Name
SAM creates a special file
Printer Class
user’s choice
174
Printing Setup On Sys V
Printing Setup On Sys V
This setup involves any Unix operating system using System V print spooling
(e.g., SCO, Solaris, DG/UX, Sun 2.5.x, 2.6, 2.7 and similar, etc.). This
means an interface file is used for each defined printer and in the case of any
System V print setup involving a LineJet Print Server, the RSHD protocol is
used to transfer data from the host to the print server.
To manually configure a new System V printer on a Unix station, create a
dummy device file that acts as a locking mechanism between contending print
jobs.
Sys V printing is characterized by use of the lp printer interface program,
lpsched printer scheduler, and the use of an interface file. The file lpadmin
is used in setting up the print queue definition. As of Sun 2.6 and on, the
interface file netstandard is provided in a generic interface file intended for
network print servers such as the LineJet Print Server. Also as of Sun 2.6 the
ability to print to a socket (sometimes called raw tcp) or a remote printer
(dest for LineJet) is provided.
Root access is required to use lpshut (stop the print scheduler to add a new
printer with lpadmin), lpsched and lpadmin.
For the following example, assume the print queue to be created is lobby,
and the ping-able IP Address name of the LineJet is LJ_PS1, and you wish to
print to remote printer (dest) d1prn on LJ_PS1. As always with Unix,
commands are case-sensitive. Also, be sure to use the bourne or korn shell,
not the cshell when using the commands.
The command structure:
- stop print scheduler
- use lpadmin to describe print queue (often referred to as the
logical Unix printer of the same name)
- start the print scheduler
- enable the print queue
- accept the print queue (allow it to accept print jobs)
- do a test print
Several examples are shown below.
Example 1: Using the dest d1prn (Sun 2.5.x)
lpshut
lpsystem -t bsd lobby
lpadmn -p lobby -v/dev/null (gives file locking)
lpadmin -p lobby -i/usr/lib/lp/model/netstandard
lpadmin -p lobby -sLJ_PS1!d1prn
lpsched
enable lobby
accept lobby
175
Chapter
9
Unix Host Configuration
Example 2: Using the dest d1prn (Sun 2.6, 2.7 and Similar)
lpshut
lpadmn -p lobby -v/dev/null (gives file locking)
lpadmin -p lobby -i/usr/lib/lp/model/netstandard -o
protocol=bsd
lpadmin -p lobby -sLJ_PS1!d1prn
lpsched
enable lobby
accept lobby
Example 3: Using the raw tcp socket 9100 (Sun 2.1, 2.7 and
Similar):
lpshut
lpadmn -p lobby -v/dev/null (gives file locking)
lpadmin -p lobby -i/usr/lib/lp/model/netstandard
lpadmin -p lobby -o dest=LJ_PS1:9100 -o protocol=tcp
lpsched
enable lobby
accept lobby
To do a test print for either form using the /etc/hosts file:
lp -d lobby /etc/hosts
176
LPR/LPD Printing Setup On BSD Systems (Sun 4.x,
LPR/LPD Printing Setup On BSD Systems
(Sun 4.x, DEC‚ Ultrix‚, Free BSD, etc.)
The LineJet Print Server also supports Unix operating systems which follow a
BSD print system (e.g., SunOS 4.1.x). This means a printcap file is used to
define all printers available on the host and interface scripts are not commonly
used. Instead, LPR/LPD printers are defined.
To manually configure an LPR/LPD printer on a BSD Unix system:
1. Define an entry for this new printer within the printcap file, /etc/printcap.
Syntax:
printername:
:sh:pw#80:mx#0:\
:rm=LineJetname:\
:rp=LineJetdestination:\
:lp=:\
:sd=/usr/spool/lpd/printername:\
:lf=/usr/spool/lpd/printername/log:\
:af=/usr/spool/lpd/printername/acct:
where printername is any name you would like to give to this new
printer, LineJetname is the host or IP name of the print server, and
LineJetdestination is one of the pre-defined destinations/queues
on the device.
Example:
LPQ1000:
:sh:pw#80:mx#0:\
:rm=spike:\
:rp=d1prn:\
:lp=:\
:sd=/usr/spool/lpd/ LPQ1000:\
:lf=/usr/spool/lpd/ LPQ1000/log:\
:af=/usr/spool/lpd/ LPQ1000/acct:
2. Create the spool directory specified by the sd= entry in the printcap entry
for this printer.
Example:
touch /usr/spool/lpd/ LPQ1000
3. Create the log and account files specified by the lf= and af= entries in
the printcap entry for this printer.
Example:
touch /usr/spool/lpd/LPQ1000/log
touch /usr/spool/lpd/LPQ1000/acct
4. Create the spool directory to use, set the correct permissions and
ownership of the spool directory and objects within it, and start the printer
daemon for this new printer:
mkdir /usr/spool/lpd/LPQ1000
chmod -R g+rwx,o+rx /usr/spool/lpd/LPQ1000
chmod -R daemon.daemon /usr/spool/lpd/LPQ1000
lpc start LPQ1000
177
Chapter
9
Unix Host Configuration
5. Start the printer daemon for this new printer.
Example:
lpc start LPQ1000
You now have a new printer which relies on LPR/LPD to print to a LineJet
Print Server printer. Use the following command to test printing:
Syntax:
lpr -printername filename
Example:
lpr -LPQ1000 /etc/hosts
178
FTP Printing
FTP Printing
The LineJet Print Server contains four logical printers (destinations) labeled
as d1prn through d4prn. For FTP printing, establish an FTP session, followed
by a put to the dest. Since the printer emulation can be PCL-II, Epson, or
Proprinter, be sure the file you put to print is both printable and suitable for
the printer emulation. Straight text is usable in all cases.
Example:
Type the commands as shown, followed by the enter key. Assume the file you
want to print is /etc/inetd.conf, which is a simple text file.
ftp MyLineJet (MyLineJet needs to be a ping-able DNS name, or if no
DNS, in the local /etc/hosts file, or it can be a dotted IP Address for the
LineJet Print Server)
at the user prompt, type root
at the password prompt, press ENTER (default password for root is blank
until you change it)
cd dest/d1prn
put /etc/inetd.conf
quit
Note
If the file you want to print is a binary file, enter the command bin before
the put command.
Remote Shell Printing
The LineJet Print Server is BSD capable, and has an internal lp daemon.
Each Unix system has a remote shell function which can be used to access
this process: Sun, etc. is rsh; UX is remsh; AIX is rcmd.
For example, printing the file /etc/inetd.conf on an HP-UX system to
the second logical dest in the LineJet Print Server:
remsh MyLineJet lp -d d2prn < /etc/indetd.conf
You may also use this form:
cat /etc/inetd.conf | remsh MyLineJet lp -d d2prn
In this form of printing the printer status will be fed back as to on/off line.
179
Chapter
9
Unix Troubleshooting Tips
Unix Troubleshooting Tips
This section provides information on possible solutions to some standard
configuration errors. If you require technical support, please have the
following information (or as much as possible) when you call:
1. What level of software are you running?
2. What type of attachment do you have?
3. What is your host operating system?
4. Give a detailed description of the problem.
5. How often, and when, does the problem occur?
6. Give a detailed description of your network and the components attached.
Please follow these tips to determine what the problem may be with your
LineJet Print Server configuration.
Nothing Prints
•
Can you ping the LineJet Print Server from your Unix station? If not,
please refer to Chapter 6, “TCP/IP Configuration” for information.
•
Is the LineJet Print Server able to communicate with the attached printer?
To test this, you can:
1. telnet to the print server (e.g., telnet 192.75.11.9) and log
in as root.
2. Enter the command start fox prn .
3. Execute stop prn right after starting the test.
This test will send the same text line over and over to the attached printer.
180
•
Is the job getting stuck in the Unix host queue? If so, check that the printer
is online. If it is, there is a configuration error on the Unix station so
creating a new print setup may be needed.
•
Is the control panel showing any activity to indicate it is receiving data? If
so, but there is nothing printing, check to see if a manual form feed is
needed. Also, ensure that the printer can support the type of job coming
through.
•
Do all jobs fail or just certain ones? For example, is it possible that jobs
from a certain application are the only ones to fail? If so, check the type of
data it sends to make sure it matches the printer emulation. Check the
application printer configuration for mistakes.
•
If you are using System V, was the spooler restarted?
Stair-stepped Output
Stair-stepped Output
Stair-stepped output is print which starts at the top left of the page but every
line thereafter starts a little further over to the right. It also refers to Unix jobs
that print one line of text at the top of a page followed by a series of blank
pages.
This kind of output happens only with Unix text jobs if carriage return insertion
is not incorporated into the print setup. The printer may be told to do a
linefeed but the Unix job does not specify anything about a carriage return to
follow this.
To fix this, carriage return insertion must be enabled somewhere in the print
setup. The easiest and most common location is on the LineJet Print Server
itself within the appropriate model. The feature is called onlcr and the
command syntax is:
set model modelname stty onlcr
save
For example, if printing to the destination d1prn, the associated model is m1.
Therefore, the command is:
set model m1 stty onlcr
save
No Form Feed Or Extra Page Comes Out
Unix text jobs may also have problems outputting the last page of a job
especially when the BSD Remote (LPD) print method is used. This means the
form feed button has to be pressed on the printer to get this last page out.
To make this process automatic, tell the LineJet Print Server to handle this
task by setting this feature “on” in the appropriate model. The command
syntax is:
set model modelname trailer $FF
save
For example, if printing to the destination d2prn, the associated model is m2.
Therefore, the command is:
set model m2 trailer $FF
save
For default destination model mappings of the LineJet Print Server, please
see “LineJet Print Server Naming Schemes” on page 240.
181
Chapter
182
9
Unix Troubleshooting Tips
10
Novell Configuration
Overview
This chapter details a complete Novell setup, including:
1. Identifying the LineJet Print Server card on the network.
2. Configuring the LineJet Print Server with its mandatory print setup
settings.
3. Configuring a new print queue on the file server.
See Chapter 11, “Novell Configuration For 10/100Base-T Interfaces” for
information about additional options available with the 10/100 Base-T
interface.
183
Chapter
10 Novell Environment Description
Novell Environment Description
The LineJet Print Server card supports network printing under Novell
environments by using IPX. It supports all 3.1X versions of NetWare. Figure
15 provides a Novell setup overview. Version 4.1X is supported under bindery
emulation only.
NetWare
Workstation
NetWare 4.1
File Server
NetWare 4.1
File Server
NetWare
Workstation
NetWare
Workstation
Bridge/Router
NetWare
Workstation
Figure 15. Novell Integration
Novell LineJet Print Server Configuration
Mandatory
Under all Novell environments, the LineJet Print Server card does not require
any network settings to make it visible on the network. Simply plug it in to your
network and power it on. However, with a new print queue setup on a Novell
file server, there can be some mandatory settings needed on the LineJet Print
Server.
184
Using HTML Forms
Optional
Additional settings are available to fine-tune the LineJet Print Server’s Novell
functionality. These options include:
•
NDS Context. The NDS context in which the print server object was
created. This option is required if you create the print server object in a
different context from the context the file server object for the file server
that you logged in with is on.
•
NDS Tree. The NDS tree the print server object was created in. This is
only needed if your environment uses more than one NDS tree.
•
Mode. The mode the LineJet Print Server will run in. This can be either
auto, bindery, or NDS. The default is auto so that the LineJet Print Server
can autosense which mode it should run in. See “NetWare Version 4.x
RPRINTER Setup” on page 191 for information on what to do when using
both bindery and NDS file servers at the same time.
•
Preferred File Server. In a bindery setup, this specifies the file server
that the print server object was created on. In an NDS setup, this
specifies a file server(s) that the print server object resides on. Since NDS
is distributed, most administrators will not know which file server(s) the
print server object is actually stored on, so in most NDS environments this
option is not used.
See Chapter 11, “Novell Configuration For 10/100Base-T Interfaces” for
additional information about these options.
Using HTML Forms
When defining a new print queue on a Novell file server, a new print server
must be defined to represent the LineJet Print Server. This name must match
the pre-defined name given to the print server. By default, this name is in the
format M_xxxxxx where xxxxxx equals the last six digits of the LineJet
Print Server Ethernet address found on a configuration printout or control
panel settings under Ethernet parameters, MAC Address (e.g., M_071C1A).
185
Chapter
10 Novell Host Configuration
To use the HTML forms to define a print queue, do the following:
1. Load a Web browser on a network station that can communicate with the
print server over TCP/IP. The command to change the print server name
is:
Syntax:
store pserver name newname
Example to change the name to micro1:
store pserver name micro1
2. Direct your Web browser to URL
http://LineJetIPaddress/adminConf.html
(e.g., http://192.75.11.9/adminConf.html)
Note
If prompted for a User ID and password first, type in root for the ID and
press ENTER at the password prompt since there is no password by
default.
3. At the Administration Configuration HTML form that displays, highlight the
field beside the “Name” heading and type in the new name of the print
server.
4. Click on the SUBMIT button when done and physically repower the
printer to make the new setting take effect.
Novell Host Configuration
Under all versions of NetWare, both PSERVER and RPRINTER setups are
supported by the LineJet Print Server. Since a PSERVER setup is the most
common, you will find the necessary steps to configure the LineJet Print
Server as a PSERVER shown first. Configuration for RPRINTER and
NPRINTER setup follow the PSERVER information.
Note
The LineJet Print Server can service up to four printers on one file server. It
can not service multiple file servers at one time.
NetWare Version 3.x PSERVER Setup
To configure a print queue on a NetWare 3.1x network:
1. Log on to the Novell file server as supervisor.
2. Enter PCONSOLE.
3. Select “Print Queue Information” from the PCONSOLE Main Menu.
4. Press INSERT to add a new queue to the list of currently defined queues
showing.
5. Type in the name of this new queue when prompted and press ENTER.
This can be any name you would like.
6. Press ESCAPE to return to the Main Menu.
186
NetWare Version 3.x PSERVER Setup
7. Select “Print Server Information” and press ENTER.
8. Press INSERT when the list of existing print servers displays.
9. Type the name of the LineJet Print Server when prompted for a print
server name and press ENTER when done. By default, the LineJet Print
Server is named M_xxxxxx where xxxxxx equals the last six digits of
the print server Ethernet address found on configuration printouts or
reading MAC address on control panel. (e.g., M_071C1A).
10. Back at the print server list, select this newly defined LineJet Print Server
and press ENTER.
11. Select “Print Server Configuration” from the menu that displays.
12. Select “Printer Configuration” from the next menu to display a list of
configured printers.
13. Select the first item listed as “NOT INSTALLED” and press ENTER.
14. At the printer configuration window, type in the name for this new printer.
This name must be one of the pre-defined destinations/queues on the
LineJet Print Server. This will normally be “d1prn.”
15. Go to the “Type” field and press ENTER to see the possible choices.
16. Select “Defined Elsewhere” from this list.
17. When done, press ESCAPE and select “Yes” to save the changes to this
new printer.
18. Press ESCAPE again to return to the Print Server Configuration menu.
19. Select “Queues Serviced by Printer.”
20. Select this new printer from the printer list that displays and press
ENTER.
21. At the empty queue list that displays, press INSERT.
22. Select the queue created in step 5 and press ENTER.
23. When prompted for the priority, press ENTER to select the default or
select a priority.
24. Press ESCAPE until back at the PCONSOLE Main Menu.
25. Repower the printer.
26. Wait two minutes and then select “Print Queue Information” from the
PCONSOLE Main Menu.
27. Select this new queue from the menu that displays. Select “Currently
Attached Servers” to see which print server is servicing this queue.
At this point, the LineJet Print Server name (e.g., M_071C1A) should show
within this window. This means the LineJet Print Server knows about this new
Novell print queue it must service as a PSERVER. Therefore, it will poll this
queue regularly looking for jobs to print.
Note
The LineJet Print Server can service up to four printers on one file server.
It can not service multiple file servers at one time.
187
Chapter
10 Novell Host Configuration
NetWare Version 3.x RPRINTER Setup
These steps are for Novell environments with Netware 3.x (or earlier) file
servers.
To configure a new RPRINTER on a NetWare 3.x network:
1. Log in to the LineJet Print Server command shell, npsh, as root.
If you have TCP/IP available and this print server already has an IP
address stored within it, you can use the built-in HTML configuration
forms or a Telnet session. Please see “Configuration Alternatives” on
page 64 for additional details. If you have only Novell available, you will
need to use a PC, laptop, or terminal.
Note
If you use HTML configuration, you will need to go to the Network
Configuration HTML form http://LineJetIPaddress/
networkConf.html (e.g., http://192.75.11.9/
networkConf.html) and look under the “Novell” section. The settings
in the following step are found there. If using a Telnet session, you will
need to manually execute the commands listed in the next step.
2. Store the RPRINTER settings on the LineJet Print Server. This will refer
to an existing PSERVER.NLM on the file server or to one that you will
create later in these steps.
Syntax:
store rprinter add PSERVERname printernumber
LineJetdestination
Example for an RPRINTER servicing printer 0 of the PSERVER.NLM
called pserver1 and sending jobs to the LineJet Print Server
destination d1prn:
store rprinter add pserver1 0 d1prn
3. Leave this LineJet Print Server login session and log on to the NetWare
3.x file server as Supervisor.
4. Load a PSERVER.NLM if there is not one loaded already. This will be the
PSERVER that the LineJet Print Server services as an RPRINTER so it
must match the PSERVER name given in step 2.
5. Enter PCONSOLE.
6. Select “Print Queue Information” from the PCONSOLE Main Menu.
7. Press INSERT to add a new queue to the list of currently defined queues.
8. Type in the name of this new queue when prompted and press ENTER.
This can be any name you would like.
9. Press ESCAPE to return to the Main Menu.
10. Select “Print Server Information” and press ENTER.
11. Press INSERT when the list of existing print servers displays.
12. Select the print server that you want the Print Server to service as an
RPRINTER. This is the PSERVER.NLM loaded in step 4.
13. Select “Print Server Configuration” from the menu that displays.
188
NetWare Version 4.x PSERVER Setup
14. Select “Printer Configuration” from the next menu to display a list of
configured printers.
15. Select an item from the list (e.g., either an existing printer name or a “Not
Installed” one) to display the printer configuration window.
16. Assign a name (if not an existing printer) to this printer.
17. At the “Type” field, select “Remote Other/Unknown.”
18. Press ESCAPE to save the changes.
19. Press ESCAPE until back at the Print Server Configuration menu.
20. Select “Queues Serviced by Printer” to display a list of defined printers.
21. Select the printer you just defined and press ENTER.
22. At the list of queues that displays, press INSERT to add a queue to the
list.
23. Select the queue defined and press ENTER.
24. When prompted for a priority, press ENTER to select the default or select
a priority.
25. Press ESCAPE until you have exited PCONSOLE.
26. Reload the PSERVER.NLM that the LineJet Print Server is to service as
an RPRINTER.
27. Repower the Print Server by turning the printer off and then on.
28. Wait two minutes and then check your PSERVER to see if the appropriate
printer is being serviced. The PSERVER should indicate that the printer is
“Waiting for job.”
At this point, the LineJet Print Server knows to receive any jobs this
PSERVER.NLM has to send to it through the defined printer.
NetWare Version 4.x PSERVER Setup
LineJet Print Server destinations are case sensitive and will not be recognized
if they are typed incorrectly. By default, they are all lower case. If you are
setting up a NetWare 4 environment, the destination must be renamed to
uppercase to match the PCONSOLE entry.
The LineJet Print Server can be used in a NetWare 4 environment with either
of the following options:
•
Set the LineJet Print Server up as a PSERVER, replacing a dedicated
printer.
•
Set the LineJet Print Server up as an RPRINTER, interacting with an
existing PSERVER (see page 191).
Following a PSERVER setup, bindery emulation is required. To configure the
LineJet Print Server as a PSERVER in a NetWare 4 environment:
1. Log in to the Novell as supervisor.
2. Enter PCONSOLE.
3. Press F4.
4. Select “Print Queues.”
189
Chapter
10 Novell Host Configuration
5. Press INSERT to add a queue.
6. Type in a new queue name and press ENTER.
7. Press ESCAPE.
8. Select “Print Servers.”
9. Press INSERT to add the new print server.
10. Type the name of the LineJet Print Server. By default, it is M_xxxxxx
where xxxxxx equals the last six digits of the Ethernet address
(e.g., M_000BF5)
11. Select this new print server and press ENTER.
12. Select “Printers.”
13. Press INSERT to add a printer to the list.
14. Type in the name of one of the default destinations on the unit for the
“Name” field and go to the type field.
15. Press ENTER at this field and select “Defined Elsewhere.” If “Defined
Elsewhere” is not available, choose “Parallel.”
16. Press ENTER on the “Print Queues Assigned” field.
17. Press INSERT to display all queues; select the one you defined in step 6.
Then press ENTER.
18. Select a priority and press ENTER. Priority 1 should be sufficient.
19. Press ESCAPE until you are back to Main Menu.
20. Reboot the Print Server by repowering the printer.
21. Check the “Currently Attached Servers” and verify the print server is
active.
22. Press ESCAPE until you are out of the PCONSOLE.
Even though the entire print set up is done through PCONSOLE, you may
want to communicate directly with the print server in order to modify
settings, monitor the unit, etc. To communicate with the print server, the
optional host software, npsh.exe, may be used. npsh.exe is a DOS
executable program that can be run from a DOS prompt on a NetWare
workstation.
npsh.exe performs the following:
npsh nvplist
Lists all of the LineJet Print Server devices on the network; each name is
in the default format M_ xxxxxx (where xxxxxx equals the last six digits of
the unit Ethernet address). This is regardless of whether it is configured
as a PSERVER or an RPRINTER.
npsh unitname
Starts a Telnet-like session with the named print server, allowing you to
configure, monitor, and troubleshoot the unit with the built-in command
set.
npsh unitname command
Initiates a single Command with guest access only to the unit instead of
entering into a complete session.
190
NetWare Version 4.x RPRINTER Setup
To communicate with the unit using npsh.exe:
a. From a DOS prompt on a Novell workstation, begin an npsh session
with the unit.
npsh unitname
Starts a Telnet-like session with the named print server with guest
access only.
b. To obtain root access to the unit, type:
supervisor
A standard login screen is displayed prompting you for the login name
and password.
c.
Login to the unit as root user.
root
Root users require the use of a password as configured in the unit
user list.
d. Enter the password. If this password is not yet set, press enter at the
password prompt. Otherwise, enter the password that is already
stored in the unit.
password
You are now logged in to the unit as a root user and can access any npsh
command on the unit.
Note
Because npsh.exe makes use of broadcasts, you may have problems
communicating across a router.
NetWare Version 4.x RPRINTER Setup
LineJet Print Server can be configured to service both RPRINTER, NDS
mode, and PSERVER, bindery mode.
Use the following procedure to set up an RPRINTER form of attachment on a
4.x server:
1. LineJet Print Server requires a bindery server login on the 4.1x as the first
step to servicing RPRINTER. This bindery login is necessary for
registering the LineJet Print Server PSERVER name; no bindery queues
or printers are set up. Using PCONSOLE, bindery mode, create a bindery
printer server object whose name matches that of the LineJet Print Server
at the root context of the 4.1x box (i.e., M_03092B). After creating the
bindery PrintServer on the 4.1x server, reboot LineJet Print Server and
use the debug Novell pserver command via a Telnet or npsh
session, or print the E-Net Test Page out to make sure there is a
successful server login.
2. Using either PCONSOLE in NDS mode, or NWADMIN:
a. create an NDS queue (any name you want), or simply use an existing
one;
b. create a print server to use (any valid name, or choose one already in
existence);
191
Chapter
10 Novell Host Configuration
c.
Note
create a printer object to use with the print server object you chose or
created, and attach it to the chosen queue;
The 4.1x queue name, print server name, and printer object don't have to
match any LineJet Print Server name; multiple printers can be defined, but
only one print server can be attached to.
Example:
NDS queue name:
NDS print server name:
NDS printer name:
NDS printer name:
Finance
Fin_Q
Fin_Prt_1
Accounting_Prt_1
3. At a 4.1x console session, if a pserver.nlm session is already running for
Fin_Q, first unload it, then reload it to find the new objects, or, simply
issue load pserver Fin_Q.
If you are successful the print server console screen will show a “printer
status” option. In the “printer status” window, note the numbers assigned
to the printers you created. Assume for our example that one printer
previously existed (number 0), and we are adding two more, whose
numbers became 1, and 2.
On the load command you must strictly follow case of the name (this is
not required on the LineJet Print Server).
4. Via a Telnet or npsh session create RPRINTER attachments:
store rprinter add Fin_Q 1 d1prn
This command assigns destination d1prn as the RPRINTER 1 service
path.
store rprinter add Fin_Q 2 d4prn
This command assigns destination d4prn as the RPRINTER 2 service
path.
For LineJet Print Server entries, case does not have to be observed. Also,
if you want to change the destination names from dxprn, do so first with
the set dest dest name new name command, being sure to use the
save command so these reappear after a reboot.
5. Reboot the LineJet Print Server adapter (power the printer off and on, or
use the reset command) so the new RPRINTER service names are
broadcast.
6. Open a Telnet or npsh session and log into LineJet Print Server. Wait a
minute or two, then use the list rprinter command, and you should
see your entries. You could also do this by looking at the connection
status on the 4.1x PSERVER printer status entries.
7. If you add, delete or change RPRINTER entries on LineJet Print Server or
4.1x console, you should always unload and reload the pserver.nlm
module to register the changes. The LineJet Print Server can be
configured and ready before the pserver.nlm is reloaded, or LineJet Print
Server can be reset after pserver.nlm is reloaded.
8. A web browser can also be used to see the RPRINTER attachments, etc.
and status.
192
NetWare 3.x - No PSERVER Connection
Novell Troubleshooting Tips
This section provides information on possible solutions to some standard
configuration errors. If you require technical support, please have as much of
the following information available when you call:
1. What level of software are you running?
2. What type of attachment do you have?
3. What is your host operating system?
4. Give a detailed description of the problem.
5. How often, and when, does the problem occur?
6. Give a detailed description of your network and the components attached.
Please follow these tips to determine what the problem may be with your
LineJet Print Server configuration.
NetWare 3.x - No PSERVER Connection
•
Has the LineJet Print Server been power cycled once the PCONSOLE
steps were completed? This will make the print server boot up and realize
which print queue and file server it needs to service.
•
Is the LineJet Print Server already servicing a queue on another file
server? If so, it can not service another file server at the same time.
•
When defining a new print server within PCONSOLE, did you use the
correct name for the LineJet Print Server (e.g., M_071C1A)? By default, it
only recognizes itself as M_xxxxxx where xxxxxx equals the last six
digits of its Ethernet address found on the configuration printout.
•
When defining a new printer name within PCONSOLE, did you use a predefined destination/queue rather than a name of your own? By default,
the LineJet Print Server only recognizes names like “d1prn.” All other
names will be ignored by the device.
•
Is the LineJet Print Server in Bindery mode as seen under the list
pserver output on the device? If servicing only a NetWare 3.x file
server, it must be set to handle Bindery services. The default setting is
“Bindery.”
•
Is there an available NetWare user license for the LineJet Print Server to
use while it acts as a PSERVER? Every PSERVER takes up one user
license since it logs in to the Novell file server.
•
Have you given the connection process some time after repowering the
LineJet Print Server? In larger Novell environments, the file server
identification and connection process can take several minutes.
193
Chapter
10 Novell Troubleshooting Tips
NetWare 4.x - No PSERVER Connection
•
Has the LineJet Print Server been power cycled once the PCONSOLE
steps were completed? This will make the print server boot up and realize
which print queue and file server it needs to service.
•
Is the LineJet Print Server already servicing a queue on another file
server? If so, it can not service another file server at the same time.
•
When defining a new print server within PCONSOLE, did you use the
correct name for the LineJet Print Server (e.g., M_071C1A)? By default, it
only recognizes itself as M_xxxxxx where xxxxxx equals the last six
digits of its Ethernet address found on the configuration printout.
•
When defining a new printer name within PCONSOLE, did you use a predefined destination/queue rather than a name of your own? By default,
the LineJet Print Server only recognizes names like “d1prn.” All other
names will be ignored by the device.
•
Is the LineJet Print Server in Bindery mode as seen under the list
pserver output on the device? If servicing only a NetWare 4.x file
server, it must be set to handle Bindery services. The default setting is
“Bindery.”
194
•
Is there an available NetWare user license for the LineJet Print Server to
use while it acts as a PSERVER? Every PSERVER takes up one user
license since it logs in to the Novell file server.
•
Have you given the connection process some time after repowering the
LineJet Print Server? In larger Novell environments, the file server
identification and connection process can take several minutes.
11
Novell Configuration For
10/100Base-T Interfaces
Overview
This chapter provides additional information for Novell environments using the
10/100Base-T interface, including:
1. LineJet Print Server Configuration. This section includes information
about setting the preferred file server; setting password security;
adjusting polling time; changing the LineJet Print Server name; changing
the LineJet Print Server frame type; changing the LineJet Print Server
mode; setting the LineJet Print Server NDS context; and setting the
LineJet Print Server preferred NDS tree.
2. Host Configuration. This section includes information about the NDS
PSERVER setup; Bindery PSERVER setup; referencing a Bindery queue
in NDS; and RPRINTER/NPRINTER setups.
3. Troubleshooting tips. This section covers PSERVER setups,
RPRINTER/NPRINTER setups, and printing related problems.
195
Chapter
11 Novell LineJet Print Server Configuration (10/100Base-T)
Novell LineJet Print Server Configuration (10/100Base-T)
There are no mandatory Novell settings needed before the print server can be
detected on the network. However, there can be some mandatory settings
needed before a Novell print queue can be serviced by the LineJet Print
Server. These mandatory settings are covered separately for Netware 3.x and
4.x under the Host Configuration heading.
The print server setup in a Novell environment is much simpler than that
required in a TCP/IP one. No addresses, masks, or router entries are
necessary, and, in most cases, the LineJet Print Server can simply be
connected to the network, turned on, and then configured for printing from a
Novell station through PCONSOLE or Netware Administrator. See Figure 16
for an example of a Novell network which shows the use of file servers and
how they relate to the print server.
There are, however, some optional parameters you may wish to change such
as the preferred file server(s), print server password, polling time, frame type,
print server name, NDS context, and NDS preferred tree. The following
sections describe these optional parameters.
NetWare
Workstation
NetWare 4.1
File Server
NetWare
Workstation
NetWare 4.1
File Server
NetWare
Workstation
Bridge/Router
NetWare
Workstation
Figure 16. Novell Integration
196
Preferred File Server (NDS & Bindery)
Preferred File Server (NDS & Bindery)
In a bindery setup, the preferred file server specifies the file server that the
print server object was created on. In an NDS setup, it specifies a file server
that the print server object resides on. Since NDS is distributed, most
administrators will not know which file server(s) the print server object is
actually stored on, so in most NDS environments this option is not used. This
feature is useful in a large Novell network so that the LineJet Print Server
does not ignore important file servers. If you are setting up the LineJet Print
Server to work with a Bindery file server, it is a good idea to set a preferred
server on the LineJet Print Server.
To view those file servers that the LineJet Print Server does acknowledge at a
given time, use the debug nest fserver command. See Chapter 12,
“Commands” for more information.
Adding Preferred File Server
HTML Method
1. Load a Web browser on a network station that can communicate with the
print server over TCP/IP.
2. Direct your Web browser to URL:
http://LineJetIPaddress/networkConf.html
(e.g., http://192.75.11.9/networkConf.html)
Note
If prompted for a User ID and password first, type in root for the ID and
press ENTER at the password prompt since there is no password by
default.
3. Look under the “Novell” section and add the name of the preferred file
server in the “File Server” field.
4. Click on the SUBMIT button when done and physically re-power the print
server to make the new settings take effect.
Manual (Telnet) Method
1. Telnet to the print server. This will bring up a login screen:
telnet ipaddress
Note
If prompted for a User ID and password first, type in root for the ID and
press ENTER at the password prompt since there is no password by
default.
2. You should now see a prompt displayed that has the LineJet Print
Server’s IP address followed by a colon then root.
ipaddress:root>
197
Chapter
11 Novell LineJet Print Server Configuration (10/100Base-T)
3. At the prompt, enter:
store pserver novell fserver add fservername
where fservername is the name of the Novell file server you want to add
as a preferred file server. This adds the specified file server as a preferred
file server on the LineJet Print Server.
4. Reset the unit to ensure the changes take effect.
reset
Removing Preferred File Server
HTML Method
1. Load a Web browser on a network station that can communicate with the
print server over TCP/IP.
2. Direct your Web browser to URL:
http://LineJetIPaddress/networkConf.html
(e.g., http://192.75.11.9/networkConf.html)
Note
If prompted for a User ID and password first, type in root for the ID and
press ENTER at the password prompt since there is no password by
default.
3. Look under the Novell section and remove the name of the preferred file
server from the File Server field.
4. Click on the SUBMIT button when done and physically re-power the print
server to make the new settings take effect.
Manual (Telnet) Method
1. Telnet to the print server. This will bring up a login screen:
telnet ipaddress
Note
If prompted for a User ID and password first, type in root for the ID and
press ENTER at the password prompt since there is no password by
default.
2. You should now see a prompt displayed that has the LineJet Print
Server’s IP address followed by a colon then root.
ipaddress:root>
3. At the prompt, enter:
store pserver novell fserver del fservername
where fservername is the name of the Novell file server you want to
remove as a preferred file server.
4. Reset the unit to ensure the changes take effect.
reset
198
Setting Password Security (NDS & Bindery)
Setting Password Security (NDS & Bindery)
In addition to the general security measures, a Novell setup provides further
password security. A password can be set on the LineJet Print Server and
within your PCONSOLE or Netware Administrator setup so that when the
LineJet Print Server tries to login to the file server, the passwords are
compared.
To set the password on the Novell host for use in a PSERVER setup, you will
need to complete the steps as follows.
Netware 4.x
1. Log in to NetWare Administrator as a user with security equal to “Admin”
on your Novell host.
2. Double click on the print server object you are using for your setup. This
will bring up the print server objects details pages.
3. Select the “Change Password...” button on the “Identification” page.
4. At the prompts, type and re-type the new password. Press OK when you
are finished.
5. Proceed to the next section to store the password on the LineJet Print
Server.
Netware 3.x
1. Enter PCONSOLE as supervisor on your Novell host.
2. Select “Print Server Information” from the main menu.
3. Select the appropriate printer and press ENTER.
4. Select “Change Password.”
5. At the prompts, type and re-type the new password. Press ENTER when
you are finished.
6. Proceed to the next section to store the password on the LineJet Print
Server.
Print Server Setup - HTML Method
1. Load a Web browser on a network station that can communicate with the
print server over TCP/IP.
2. Direct your Web browser to URL:
http://LineJetIPaddress/networkConf.html
(e.g., http://192.75.11.9/networkConf.html)
Note
If prompted for a User ID and password first, type in root for the ID and
press ENTER at the password prompt since there is no password by
default.
199
Chapter
11 Novell LineJet Print Server Configuration (10/100Base-T)
3. Look under the “Novell” section and add the new password to the
“Pserver Password” field.
Note
The passwords entered in Netware Administrator or PCONSOLE must
match the password set on the unit.
4. Click on the SUBMIT button when done and physically re-power the
printer to make the new settings take effect.
Print Server Setup - Manual (Telnet) Method
1. Telnet to the print server. This will bring up a login screen:
telnet ipaddress
Note
If prompted for a User ID and password first, type in root for the ID and
press ENTER at the password prompt since there is no password by
default.
2. You should now see a prompt displayed that has the LineJet Print
Server’s IP address followed by a colon then root.
ipaddress:root>
3. At the prompt, enter:
store pserver novell passwd password
Note
The passwords entered in Netware Administrator or PCONSOLE must
match the password set on the unit.
4. Reset the unit to ensure the changes take effect.
reset
Adjusting Polling Time (NDS & Bindery)
You can set the poll time the LineJet Print Server will use when checking for
new jobs under a PSERVER setup. To do this, complete the following steps.
Netware 4.x
1. Log in to NetWare Administrator as a user with security equal to “Admin”
on your Novell host.
2. Double click on the printer object for which you wish to change the poll
time. This will bring up the printer objects details pages.
3. Click on “Configuration” to display the configuration page.
200
Changing The Print Server Name (NDS & Bindery)
4. Change the “Service Interval” to the desired number (in seconds).
Note
You may also want to change the “Service mode for forms” to “Change
forms as needed.” If you do not do this, the LineJet Print Server will need to
poll the file server twice as much to get all the information it needs.
5. Re-power the LineJet Print Server by turning the printer off and on to
make the changes take effect.
Netware 3.x
1. Enter PCONSOLE as supervisor on your Novell host.
2. Select “Print Server Information” from the main menu and press ENTER.
3. Select the print server you have been using for your PSERVER setup and
press ENTER. By default, this will be M_xxxxxx where xxxxxx equals
the last six digits of the print server’s Ethernet address found on the
bottom of the device (e.g., M_091C1A).
4. Select “Print Server Configuration” from the menu that displays.
5. Select “Printer Configuration” from the next menu to display a list of
configured printers.
6. Select the printer for which you wish to alter the poll time and press
ENTER.
7. Change the “Sampling Interval” to the desired number (in seconds).
Note
You may also want to change the “Service mode for forms” to “Change
forms as needed.” If you do not do this, the LineJet Print Server will need to
poll the file server twice as much to get all the information it needs.
8. Press ESCAPE and select “Yes” to save the changes to this new printer.
9. Re-power the LineJet Print Server by turning the printer off and on to
make the changes take effect.
Changing The Print Server Name (NDS & Bindery)
When defining a new print queue on a Novell file server, a new print server
must be defined to represent the LineJet Print Server. This name must match
the pre-defined name given to the print server. By default, this name is in the
format M_xxxxxx where xxxxxx equals the last six digits of the LineJet
Print Server’s Ethernet address found on the bottom of the device
(e.g., M_091C1A). You must make sure that the print server object that you
are using for your PSERVER setup has the same name as that stored on the
LineJet Print Server. If you need to rename the print server object in Netware
Administrator, please delete the object and re-create it with the new name.
Netware administrator seems to have some problems with renaming objects.
Note
Changing the name will effect all of the protocols that are running on the
LineJet Print Server.
201
Chapter
11 Novell LineJet Print Server Configuration (10/100Base-T)
HTML Method
1. Load a Web browser on a network station that can communicate with the
print server over TCP/IP.
2. Direct your Web browser to URL:
http://LineJetIPaddress/adminConf.html
(e.g., http://192.75.11.9/adminConf.html)
Note
If prompted for a User ID and password first, type in root for the ID and
press ENTER at the password prompt since there is no password by
default.
3. Look under the “System Information” section and enter the new name into
the “Name” field.
4. Click on the SUBMIT button when done and physically re-power the
printer to make the new settings take effect.
Manual (Telnet) Method
1. Telnet to the print server. This will bring up a login screen:
telnet ipaddress
Note
If prompted for a User ID and password first, type in root for the ID and
press ENTER at the password prompt since there is no password by
default.
2. You should now see a prompt displayed that has the LineJet Print
Server’s IP address followed by a colon then root.
ipaddress:root>
3. At the prompt, enter:
store pserver name name
4. Reset the unit to ensure the changes take effect.
reset
Changing The Frame Type (NDS & Bindery)
The LineJet Print Server allows the user to store a particular frame type for
the unit to adhere to in a Novell environment.
HTML Method
1. Load a Web browser on a network station that can communicate with the
print server over TCP/IP.
202
Changing The Print Server Mode (NDS & Bindery)
2. Direct your Web browser to URL:
http://LineJetIPaddress/networkConf.html
(e.g., http://192.75.11.9/networkConf.html)
Note
If prompted for a User ID and password first, type in root for the ID and
press ENTER at the password prompt since there is no password by
default.
3. Look under the “Novell” section and go to the “Frame Type” field to select
the appropriate frame type.
4. Click on the SUBMIT button when done and physically re-power the
printer to make the new settings take effect.
Manual (Telnet) Method
1. Telnet to the print server. This will bring up a login screen:
telnet ipaddress
Note
If prompted for a User ID and password first, type in root for the ID and
press ENTER at the password prompt since there is no password by
default.
2. You should now see a prompt displayed that has the LineJet Print
Server’s IP address followed by a colon then root.
ipaddress:root>
3. At the prompt, enter:
store pserver novell frametype [ethernet2 | 802.3
|802.2 |802.2snap | autosense]
4. Reset the unit to make the changes take effect.
reset
Changing The Print Server Mode (NDS & Bindery)
The LineJet Print Server allows the user to store a particular mode for the unit
to operate in. This will be either NDS, Bindery, or autosense. If autosense is
used, the LineJet Print Server will first attempt to log in to a NDS file server,
and, if it fails, it will try to log in to a Bindery file server.
Note
If you are using both NDS and Bindery file servers in your setup, make
sure the mode is set to auto.
HTML Method
1. Load a Web browser on a network station that can communicate with the
print server over TCP/IP.
203
Chapter
11 Novell LineJet Print Server Configuration (10/100Base-T)
2. Direct your Web browser to URL:
http://LineJetIPaddress/networkConf.html
(e.g., http://192.75.11.9/networkConf.html)
Note
If prompted for a User ID and password first, type in root for the ID and
press ENTER at the password prompt since there is no password by
default.
3. Look under the “Novell” section and go to the “Service Type” field to
select the appropriate mode.
4. Click on the SUBMIT button when done and physically re-power the
printer to make the new settings take effect.
Manual (Telnet) Method
1. Telnet to the print server. This will bring up a login screen:
telnet ipaddress
Note
If prompted for a User ID and password first, type in root for the ID and
press ENTER at the password prompt since there is no password by
default.
2. You should now see a prompt displayed that has the LineJet Print
Server’s IP address followed by a colon then root.
ipaddress:root>
3. At the prompt, enter:
store pserver novell mode [nds | bindery | auto]
4. Reset the unit to make the changes take effect.
reset
Setting The LineJet Print Server Context (NDS)
The LineJet Print Server allows you to store the print server object in any
context within the NDS tree you choose. By default, the LineJet Print Server
will look for the print server object in the same context as the file server object
it connects to is stored in.
HTML Method
1. Load a Web browser on a network station that can communicate with the
print server over TCP/IP.
2. Direct your Web browser to URL:
http://LineJetIPaddress/networkConf.html
(e.g., http://192.75.11.9/networkConf.html)
Note
204
If prompted for a User ID and password first, type in root for the ID and
press ENTER at the password prompt since there is no password by
default.
Setting The Print Server Preferred NDS Tree (NDS)
3. Look under the “Novell” section and enter the new context in the “NDS
Context” field.
4. Click on the SUBMIT button when done and physically re-power the
printer to make the new settings take effect.
Manual (Telnet) Method
1. Telnet to the print server. This will bring up a login screen:
telnet ipaddress
Note
If prompted for a User ID and password first, type in root for the ID and
press ENTER at the password prompt since there is no password by
default.
2. You should now see a prompt displayed that has the LineJet Print
Server’s IP address followed by a colon then root.
ipaddress:root>
3. At the prompt, enter:
store pserver novell context context
4. Reset the unit to make the changes take effect.
reset
Setting The Print Server Preferred NDS Tree (NDS)
The LineJet Print Server supports Novell environments that have multiple
trees. If your environment has more than one tree, you may want to set a
preferred tree. By default, the LineJet Print Server will try to log in to each tree
it finds until it is successful.
HTML Method
1. Load a Web browser on a network station that can communicate with the
print server over TCP/IP.
2. Direct your Web browser to URL:
http://LineJetIPaddress/networkConf.html
(e.g., http://192.75.11.9/networkConf.html)
Note
If prompted for a User ID and password first, type in root for the ID and
press ENTER at the password prompt since there is no password by
default.
3. Look under the “Novell” section and enter the preferred tree in the “NDS
Preferred Tree” field.
4. Click on the SUBMIT button when done and physically re-power the
printer to make the new settings take effect.
205
Chapter
11 Novell LineJet Print Server Configuration (10/100Base-T)
Manual (Telnet) Method
1. Telnet to the print server. This will bring up a login screen:
telnet ipaddress
Note
If prompted for a User ID and password first, type in root for the ID and
press ENTER at the password prompt since there is no password by
default.
2. You should now see a prompt displayed that has the LineJet Print
Server’s IP address followed by a colon then root.
ipaddress:root>
3. At the prompt, enter:
store pserver novell tree tree
4. Reset the unit to make the changes take effect.
reset
206
NDS PSERVER Setup (Netware 4.x)
Novell Host Configuration (10/100Base-T)
This section covers PSERVER and RPRINTER/NPRINTER setups on the
LineJet Print Server. The LineJet Print Server can handle up to eight
RPRINTER/NPPRINTER setups.
Although the entire print setup is done through Netware Administrator or
PCONSOLE, you may need to communicate directly with the print server in
order to modify settings, monitor the unit, etc.
For Netware 4.x environments, you can obtain a NWAdmn3x snap-in program
called MPAdmin. This snap-in can be used to configure PSERVER setups as
well as additional settings on the LineJet Print Server.
Note
NWAdmn3x is only included with Netware 4.11 and higher releases. If you
are using Netware 4.10, you can either upgrade to Netware 4.11 or go to
Novell’s web site and get the patches to upgrade the Nwadmin program for
Netware 4.10 to Nwadmn3x for Netware 4.11. Alternatively, you can
perform the setup without using MPAdmin.
NDS PSERVER Setup (Netware 4.x)
There are a number of ways to configure the LineJet Print Server for use in a
Novell NDS PSERVER setup. These include using the MPAdmin snap-in for
Netware Administrator, using generic print server objects in Netware
Administrator, or by using PCONSOLE. The following steps describe a setup
using generic print server object in Netware Administrator. Setups using
PCONSOLE are less common and will not be discussed.
To create a printer/print queue in an NDS environment using Netware
Administrator print server objects, you will need to complete the following
steps:
1. Log in to NetWare Administrator as a user with security equal to “Admin”
on your Novell host.
2. Click with the right mouse button on a branch in the tree that you would
like to create a print queue object in.
3. Select “Create...” from the menu that pops up to bring up the “New
Object” dialogue.
4. Select “Print Queue” from the “Class of new object” list, and then click on
“OK.”
5. Select “Directory Service Queue,” and type the name of the queue into
the “Print Queue name” field.
6. Fill in the “Print Queue Volume” field by typing in a volume or browsing for
one. Click on “Create” when you are done.
7. Click with the right mouse button on a branch in the tree that you would
like to create a printer object in.
8. Select “Create...” from the menu that pops up to bring up the “New
Object” dialogue.
9. Select “Printer” from the “Class of new object” list, and then click on “OK.”
207
Chapter
11 Novell Host Configuration (10/100Base-T)
10. Type in the name for the printer in the “Printer name” field.
Note
The Printer object name must match one of the destination names on the
LineJet Print Server. Most likely, this will be d1prn.
In NDS, a printer object can only be attached to one print server object at a
given time, as Novell is using the printer object to represent a physical printer.
A physical printer can only be attached to one parallel or serial port at a time.
Thus, if you assign a printer object to another print server object, the new print
server object will “steal” it from the old one (this also happens with nonLineJet Print Server print server objects).
In order to properly process print jobs sent to the LineJet Print Server, the
printer object created in Novell must refer to the destination on this server and
not to the actual physical printer. On the LineJet Print Server, print jobs must
pass through an extra layer (a “destination”) before being sent on to the
printer. This destination allows for further processing of the print job before
sending it to the printer.
If you are using multiple print servers, you will have to either rename all your
destinations to ensure that no printer object names conflict or keep all the
printer objects for one print server in a different context than those for the
other print server.
11. Select “Define additional properties” and click on “Create.”
12. Click on “Assignments” in the dialogue that pops up, and then on the
“Add...” button.
13. Select the queue you defined earlier, or browse for a different one.
14. Click on “OK” to assign this queue to this printer.
15. Click on “OK” to close the Printers details dialogue and make the changes
permanent.
16. Click on a branch in the tree (i.e., context) that you would like to create
the LineJet Print Server print server object in.
Note
If the context you choose is different than the one the file server object for
the file server you are using is in, you must set the context on the LineJet
Print Server. See “Setting The LineJet Print Server Context (NDS)” on
page 204.
17. Click with the right mouse button to bring up a submenu, and choose
“Create...” from this menu.
18. A dialogue titled “New Object” will pop up. In the “Class of new object” list,
select “Print Server” and click on “OK.”
19. Type in the name for the print server in the “Print Server name” field. By
default, the name is M_xxxxxx where xxxxxx equals the last six digits
208
Bindery PSERVER Setup (Netware 3.x and 4.x)
of the print server’s Ethernet address found on the bottom of the device
(e.g., M_091C1A).
Note
The name you use here must match the name stored on the LineJet Print
Server. This name can be found by using the list pserver command.
See “List Commands” on page 230 for more information.
20. Select the “Define additional properties” and click on the “Create” button.
21. Click on “Assignments” in the dialogue that pops up, and then on the
“Add...” button.
22. Select the printer you created earlier.
23. Click on “OK” to assign this printer to this print server.
24. Click on “OK” to close the printer servers details dialogue and make the
changes permanent.
25. Physically re-power the printer to make the new settings take effect.
Bindery PSERVER Setup (Netware 3.x and 4.x)
A Bindery PSERVER setup is possible under both Netware 3.x and Netware
4.x. If you are using Netware 4.x, Bindery emulation is required. Please
consult your Novell manual on how to set up Bindery emulation. A Bindery
setup using PCONSOLE in Netware 3.x is described in “NetWare Version 3.x
RPRINTER Setup” on page 188. The setup using PCONSOLE in Netware 4.x
is described in “NetWare Version 4.x RPRINTER Setup” on page 191.
Referencing A Bindery Queue In NDS (Netware 3.x
and 4.x)
If you would like to reference a Bindery queue when you perform your
PSERVER setup in NDS, you must create a PSERVER object for the LineJet
Print Server on the file server where the Bindery queue resides. This is
important because in order to service the queue, the LineJet Print Server
must log on to the queue’s file server. Since the queue is not an NDS queue,
the LineJet Print Server cannot log in under NDS, so it must log in under
Bindery.
This will only work if there is a valid PSERVER object on the file server. This
PSERVER object must have the same name that was used for the NDS
setup. By default, this will be “M_xxxxxx” where “xxxxxx” equals the last
six digits of the print server’s Ethernet address found on the bottom of the
device (e.g., M_091C1A). This PSERVER object does not need to have any
printers or queues assigned to it. Also, when referencing a Bindery queue in
NDS, the Novell Mode on the LineJet Print Server must be set to “auto” so
that both NDS and Bindery logins are possible. See “Setting The LineJet Print
Server Context (NDS)” on page 204.
209
Chapter
11 Novell Host Configuration (10/100Base-T)
RPRINTER/NPRINTER Setup (Netware 3.x and 4.x)
This procedure associates an existing PSERVER with a remote LineJet Print
Server acting as a RPRINTER/NPRINTER in a NetWare 3.x or Netware 4.x
environment. It is the PSERVER’s responsibility to get jobs from the queue
and to pass them off to the LineJet Print Server acting as the remote printer.
Unlike a PSERVER setup, the LineJet Print Server does not deal directly with
the queues.
Note
As an RPRINTER/NPRINTER, the print server does not use a login ID. A
non-LineJet Print Server print server such as PSERVER.NLM or
PSERVER.EXE must be running for RPRINTER to operate. Also, if the
LineJet Print Server loses a connection to a PSERVER, it will automatically
reconnect when that server becomes available again.
The following steps assume that you have created a PSERVER object in
either Netware 3.x or Netware 4.x and have assigned printers and queues to
it. If you have not already done this, do it now. The setup is similar to creating
a PSERVER setup for the LineJet Print Server, except that there are no
restrictions about which names may be used for the print server and printer
objects.
Note
Write down the printer number(s) assigned to the printer(s) you are going
to be using for this setup. You will need them in a later step.
HTML Method
1. Load a PSERVER on your Netware 3.x or Netware 4.x file server (i.e.,
issue a load pserver pservername command on the file server).
Note
If it is an NDS PSERVER on a Netware 4.x file server, you must specify the
PSERVER name and context for pservername. For example:
load pserver .sales_ps.sales.hp
2. Load a Web browser on a network station that can communicate with the
print server over TCP/IP.
3. Direct your Web browser to URL:
http://LineJetIPaddress/networkConf.html
(e.g., http://192.75.11.9/networkConf.html)
Note
If prompted for a User ID and password first, type in root for the ID and
press ENTER at the password prompt since there is no password by
default.
4. Look under the “Novell” section and find a row in the RPRINTER
category.
210
RPRINTER/NPRINTER Setup (Netware 3.x and 4.x)
5. Click on “Enabled” and enter the name used with the PSERVER.NLM
started in step 1 into the “Print Server Name” field.
Note
If it is an NDS pserver, only enter the PSERVER name and not the context
(e.g., sales_ps).
6. Enter the printer number of the printer you would like serviced into the
“Printer Number” field, and then select the destination on the LineJet Print
Server you would like to use for output.
7. Repeat steps 4 through 6 for each additional printer you would like to
have serviced.
8. Click on the SUBMIT button when done and physically re-power the
printer to make the new settings take effect.
Manual (Telnet) Method
1. Load a PSERVER on your Netware 3.x or Netware 4.x file server (i.e.,
issue a load pserver pservername command on the file server).
Note
If it is an NDS PSERVER on a Netware 4.x file server, you must specify the
pserver name and context for pservername. For example:
load pserver .sales_ps.sales.hp
2. Telnet to the print server. This will bring up a login screen:
telnet ipaddress
Note
If prompted for a User ID and password first, type in root for the ID and
press ENTER at the password prompt since there is no password by
default.
3. You should now see a prompt displayed that has the LineJet Print
Server’s IP address followed by a colon then root.
ipaddress:root>
4. At the prompt, store the RPRINTER settings on the LineJet Print Server.
The pservername refers to the existing PSERVER.NLM on the file
server created in step 1.
Syntax:
store rprinter add pservername printernumber
LineJetdestination
Example for an RPRINTER servicing printer 0 of the PSERVER.NLM
called pserver1 and sending jobs to the LineJet Print Server destination
d1prn:
store rprinter add pserver1 0 d1prn
Note
If it is an NDS pserver, only enter the PSERVER name and not the context
(e.g., sales_ps).
211
Chapter
11 Troubleshooting (10/100Base-T)
5. Physically re-power the printer to make the new settings take effect.
Wait two minutes and then check your PSERVER to see if the appropriate
printer is being serviced. The printer should display a message such as
“Waiting for job.” At this point, the LineJet Print Server knows to receive any
jobs this PSERVER.NLM has to send to it through the defined printer.
Troubleshooting (10/100Base-T)
PSERVER Setup
If there is no connection with the LineJet Print Server after you have
completed the print setup, there are several things to confirm.
Note
The debug information that is mentioned in this section can be
found by either telneting to the LineJet Print Server and issuing the
commands given, or by launching a browser to the Novell status
page on the LineJet Print Server
(e.g., http://192.168.11.9/networkNovellStatus.html).
•
Have you tried repowering the LineJet Print Server? Wait about a minute
before checking to see if it has logged in and attached to a queue.
•
•
Is the network connector fastened tightly to the unit?
•
Is there an available NetWare user license for the LineJet Print Server to
utilize while it acts as a PSERVER? Every PSERVER takes up one user
license since it logs in to the Novell file server.
•
When going through the PSERVER setup steps, did you name the
LineJet Print Server “M_xxxxxx” where “xxxxxx” equals the last six
digits of the Ethernet address? This is the default format of the unit’s
name when it is acting as a PSERVER.
Note
212
Is the LineJet Print Server already servicing a queue on another file
server? If so, it cannot service another file server at the same time.
This “M_xxxxxx” name must have six digits after the “_”, so if necessary,
pad out each byte with a zero (0).
•
Has the LineJet Print Server’s name been changed from its default of
“M_xxxxxx”, and, if so, have you incorporated this new name into your
PSERVER setup?
•
Is there a password set for the Print Server to utilize when it is logging in
to the file server? Make sure the LineJet Print Server’s PSERVER
password matches that of the PSERVER setup or set both places to no
password.
PSERVER Setup
•
Note
When setting the LineJet Print Server up as a PSERVER, did you specify
a destination on the LineJet Print Server (e.g., d1prn) for the printer name,
and did you remember this name is case sensitive?
LineJet Print Server destinations are case sensitive so they will not be
recognized if they are typed incorrectly. By default, they are all in
lowercase. If you are setting up in a NetWare 4.x environment, the
destination must be renamed to uppercase to match the PCONSOLE or
Netware Administrator entry. Please see set dest destination name
newname on page 223 for information on changing names.
•
Does the destination you used in your PSERVER setup have the Novell
service enabled? See Chapter 12, “Commands” for information on
enabling/disabling services.
•
Try doing a debug nest ipx telnet command on the LineJet Print
Server (or find the “IPX Layer” section on the Novell HTML status page).
Check that a board has been bound to the LineJet Print Server and that
the network number is correct for your network. If not, you may want to
set a specific frame type for the LineJet Print Server to use. You can find
out what frame type is bound to which board number using the debug
nest odi command (or from the “ODI Layer” section on the Novell
HTML status page).
•
Try a debug nest fserver telnet command (or find the “File Servers”
section on the Novell HTML status page). If no file servers show up, then
there is probably a problem with the network connection, or the LineJet
Print Server card is not on a Novell network. Try a debug nest sap
telnet command (or find the “SAP” section on the Novell HTML status
page) to see if the LineJet Print Server card is seeing any network
activity.
•
Try a debug nest pserver telnet command (or find the “PSERVER”
section on the Novell HTML status page). Look for a valid queue under
the “EPS QUEUES” section. If the printer field contains a number and
there is a valid file server but no queue, then you probably made an error
in the setup and should try again. If it is an NDS PSERVER setup, look for
a line with the following type of message “Could not login to NDS Tree
<TREE> as <PSERVER.<CONTEXT>.” This means that either the tree is
wrong; the context stored on the LineJet Print Server for the print server
object is wrong; the print server object password is wrong; or the print
server object name is wrong.
•
Try a debug nest rprinter telnet command (or find the “RPRINTER”
section on the Novell HTML status page). Look for the following type of
line: “(0:ENPReadConfig):[0:213] Destination = <X>,” where <X> is
between 0 and 3. If they all say “Destination = 65536,” then the
PSERVER setup did not complete properly. If there was a valid queue
under “EPS QUEUES” in the debug nest pserver command, then the
printer name probably doesn’t match an existing destination name on the
LineJet Print Server, or Novell has been disabled for that destination. If
213
Chapter
11 Troubleshooting (10/100Base-T)
there is a valid “Destination =” line, then double check that there is an
entry for this number under the “ENP INFO” section.
Note
Debug messages for the PSERVER setup are in the RPRINTER section
here because the PSERVER setup on the LineJet Print Server shares
some code with the RPRINTER setup.
•
Try a debug nest logs telnet command (or find the “General
Messages” section on the Novell HTML status page). Look for a valid
entry for the printer. It will look something like this: “(0:InitSinglePrinter):
printer=<X> name=<NAME>.” Then look for the following lines: “(0:Printf):
RemoteMonitor(<X>); printer is” and “(0:Printf): WAITING_FOR_JOB.” If
you see these lines, the LineJet Print Server is setup properly and the
problem points to a setup issue on the workstation.
•
If the LineJet Print Server has logged in to the file server but has not
attached to the queue, there may be a permission problem. Make sure
the appropriate users have rights to this queue (they should be in the
group “everyone”). Also, you may have to assign the queue to root so it
is available to everyone.
•
Did you rename any objects in Netware Administrator during your setup?
Netware Administrator seems to have problems renaming objects. If so,
delete everything and start over.
If none of these solutions help your situation, you may want to try the whole
setup again. Completely delete the setup that is giving you trouble and go
through the setup again following each step carefully.
Note
Be sure to reboot the printer before beginning a new setup and after
completing a PSERVER setup. Wait at least a minute for the Print Server
to log in and attach to a queue.
RPRINTER/NPRINTER Setup
If there is no connection with the LineJet Print Server after you have
completed the print setup, there are several things to confirm.
Note
214
The debug information that is mentioned in the section can be
found by either telneting to the LineJet Print Server and issuing
the commands given, or launching a browser to the Novell status
page on the LineJet Print Server.
(e.g., http://192.168.11.9/networkNovellStatus.html)
•
Have you tried repowering the printer? Wait about a minute before
checking to see if it has logged in and attached to a queue.
•
•
Is the network connector fastened tightly to the unit?
Is the LineJet Print Server already servicing a queue on another file
server? If so, it cannot service another file server at the same time.
RPRINTER/NPRINTER Setup
•
Is there an entry when a list rprinter telnet command is done on the
LineJet Print Server (not found on the Novell HTML status page)? When
the LineJet Print Server is configured as an RPRINTER, this command
should produce the appropriate entry.
•
If the LineJet Print Server has logged in to the file server but has not
attached to the queue, there may be a permission problem. Make sure
the appropriate users have rights to this queue (they should be in the
group “everyone”). Also, you may have to assign the queue to root so it
is available to everyone.
•
Does the destination you used in your RPRINTER setup have the Novell
service enabled? Please see Chapter 12, “Commands” for information on
enabling/disabling services.
•
Try doing a debug nest ipx telnet command on the LineJet Print
Server (or find the “IPX Layer” section on the Novell HTML status page).
Check that a board has been bound to the LineJet Print Server and that
the network number is correct for your network. If not, you may want to
set a specific frame type for the LineJet Print Server to use. See
“Changing The Frame Type (NDS & Bindery)” on page 202. You can find
out what frame type is bound to which board number using the debug
nest odi command (or from the “ODI Layer” section on the Novell
HTML status page).
•
Try a debug nest sap telnet command (or find the “SAP” section on the
Novell HTML status page) to see if the LineJet Print Server is seeing any
network activity.
•
Try a debug nest rprinter telnet command (or find the “RPRINTER”
section on the Novell HTML status page). Look for an entry for one of the
numbers 4 to 7 under “ENP INFO.” The “dest” field should match the
destination used on the LineJet Print Server. If no entry is found, check
that the destination has the Novell service enabled. If the “ERRORCODE” field has an error of 308, make sure no other RPRINTER setup is
servicing this printer object at the same time. Only one RPRINTER
connection is allowed to service a PSERVER.NLM printer.
•
If the LineJet Print Server has logged in to the file server but has not
attached to the queue, there may be a permission problem. Make sure
the appropriate users have rights to this queue (they should be in the
group “everyone”). Also, you may have to assign the queue to root so it
is available to everyone.
If none of these solutions help your situation, you may want to try the whole
setup again. Completely delete the setup that is giving you trouble and go
through the setup again following each step carefully.
Note
Be sure to reboot the printer before beginning a new setup and after
completing an RPRINTER setup. Wait at least a minute for the Print
Server to login and attach to a queue.
215
Chapter
11 Troubleshooting (10/100Base-T)
Printing Related
The job goes to the queue but nothing prints
If nothing is printing, make sure you have a connection to the LineJet Print
Server first. See the PSERVER or RPRINTER sections above if you are
having connection-related problems. Otherwise, consider these points when
trying to solve printing problems in a Novell environment:
•
Does the job leave the queue, or is it stuck there indefinitely? If it leaves
properly, the problem points to the actual printing mechanism on your
Novell system (e.g., CAPTURE, NPRINT, etc.); to the print job format; or
to the printer itself. Otherwise, review the configuration steps you have
already followed.
•
Have you confirmed that you can print from the LineJet Print Server to the
printer ignoring the Novell setup altogether? Please see start fox|
tts|loopb prn on page 233 for a good test.
•
Is anything happening on the printer when the print job is sent?
Sometimes, the print job may have arrived at the printer but can be
waiting for a manual form feed. If this is the case, please see “Set
Commands” on page 223 for information on trailer strings.
•
Is the printing mechanism you are using (e.g., CAPTURE, NPRINT, etc.)
configured to service the appropriate queue?
•
Is the LineJet Print Server configured as the queue’s “Currently Attached
Server”? If not, make sure you have associated the queue and the printer.
See “Novell Host Configuration” on page 186.
•
Is there a hold on the print job? If you select the job from PCONSOLE’s
CURRENT PRINT JOB ENTRIES, change the User Hold or Operator
Hold to “No.”
•
If you look in PCONSOLE’s CURRENT QUEUE STATUS within the
PRINT QUEUE INFORMATION menu, is the server configured to service
entries in this queue? It is possible to turn servicing off here.
If you have followed the suggestions above and are still having printing
problems, try rebooting the LineJet Print Server. Then either review every
step you took when configuring the LineJet Print Server, or try re-doing the
setup, paying special attention to each step explained in “Novell Host
Configuration” on page 186.
The job prints incorrectly
This category can be broken down into several sub-categories such as lost
characters, garbled data, extra banner pages, or blank pages at the end of the
job. However, the reason for these mishaps can generally be traced to the
printing mechanism used on your Novell system. These points should be
considered when configuring your print method (e.g., CAPTURE, NPRINT,
etc.):
•
•
216
Did you include the “No Tabs” option?
Did you specify “No Banner” with PostScript printers?
Printing Related
•
Did you turn off banner pages and form feeds if this is already taken care
of within an application or on the LineJet Print Server? Doubling up of
these types of print features is easy to do since these options are
provided both on the LineJet Print Server (in a model) and within the print
command.
•
Are you running the latest version of PSERVER (later than 1.22)? If not,
upgrade the PSERVER software.
•
In a PSERVER setup, did you ensure that the printer name (e.g., d1prn)
was set up as “Defined Elsewhere”?
•
Is the timeout option in the CAPTURE command set high enough so the
printer does not time out before the print processing has had a chance to
complete? This can be a problem with graphic jobs.
Some other things to consider when garbled data persists are:
•
•
tab expansion (xtab) set on (in a model) with graphic jobs
the correct driver for the printer if printing from within Windows
For additional information on these suggestions or on various Novell printing
mechanisms, please refer to your NetWare User Manuals.
217
Chapter
218
11 Troubleshooting (10/100Base-T)
12
Commands
Command Shell Overview
The LineJet Print Server comes with an in-depth command shell which allows
you to manipulate objects like destinations, I/O ports, and models.
Additionally, it provides you with monitoring and troubleshooting capabilities.
Access Methods
There are many ways this command shell can be accessed:
•
•
•
built-in HTML forms
a Telnet session from a TCP/IP host to the LineJet Print Server
a single remote shell command (i.e., rsh, rcmd, remsh) from a TCP/IP
host
Main Command Shell Prefixes
All configurable commands start with either store or set. Troubleshooting
commands usually start with debug, and view commands start with list.
If the store prefix is used, the LineJet Print Server must be repowered for
the changes to take effect. Since store affects flash memory settings only,
the print server must reset and read the new settings now in flash memory.
If the set prefix is used, a save command must also be executed so that the
new settings are retained after power cycles. Since set only affects the
settings in memory, they will be lost after a power cycle unless they are saved
to flash memory.
Getting Command Help
The LineJet Print Server command shell provides several online help tools.
These include the following:
? Command
Typing ? when logged in to the command shell will produce a full listing of all
commands available.
219
Chapter
12 Complete Command List
Command Prefixes
Typing in the first portion of a command will produce an error message
showing the correct syntax. For example, typing in store tcpip will
produce a list of all commands that start with this prefix.
Complete Command List
This section outlines the entire LineJet Print Server command set including
the command syntax, a description, and, in most cases, an example for each
command listed.
Note
If you see the word ifnum in any shell commands, you should substitute a
1 unless directed to do otherwise. This 1 represents the one network
interface (i.e., Ethernet) supported.
Store Commands
These commands change the settings stored in flash memory and do not
affect the current or working settings in memory. A power cycle is needed
before the stored settings become current.
store ifc ifnum utp [-]li [-]rx
store ifc 1 utp li
Modify the physical UTP interface properties where li enables link
integrity and rx enables the increased receive threshold.
store ifc from default
Set all UTP settings back to factory defaults.
store ifc from current
Store all current UTP settings to flash memory so they are retained after a
power cycle. This ensures all current settings match what is stored in
flash memory.
store pserver opts [[-]jobsecurity] [jobtimeout
seconds]
store pserver opts jobsecurity jobtimeout 5
If jobsecurity is disabled, any user can cancel queued jobs on the
LineJet Print Server including guest users. If jobtimeout is set to
some value other than 0, the LineJet Print Server will only wait this
amount of seconds when getting printer feedback. This is only used if
you have a logpath port and type set on a particular destination.
store pserver tcpsocket TCPportnumber port
newTCPportnumber
store pserver tcpsocket 4000 port 5000
Change a pre-defined TCPportnumber on the LineJet Print Server to a
newTCPportnumber. The default number is 9100 for prn.
220
Store Commands
store pserver tcpsocket TCPportnumber dest destination
store pserver tcpsocket 5000 dest d1prn
Assign a pre-defined TCPportnumber to a particular destination on
the LineJet Print Server. Therefore, if you are using a print method that
sends jobs directly to a TCP port number, you still have the option to
process the job data through this destination setting.
store pserver novell passwd password
store pserver novell passwd mplex
Store the password for the LineJet Print Server to use when logging in to
a Novell file server. This password would have to match one set on the
file server.
store pserver novell user name username
store pserver novell user name micro1
Define a username on the LineJet Print Server to be used when it logs in
to a Novell file server to find information. This username must match a
user pre-defined on the Novell file server.
store pserver novell user passwd password
store pserver novell user passwd mplex2
Define a password on the LineJet Print Server for the Novell user
already defined. This password must match the one stored on the Novell
file server. Passwords are optional as long as there is not one defined on
the file server for the user.
store pserver novell fserver add|del fileservername
store pserver novell fserver add fs1
Add or remove a server entry on the LineJet Print Server for the Novell file
server it will be servicing.
store pserver smb workgrp newworkgroupname
store pserver smb workgrp eng
Define a different Windows workgroup as defined by
newworkgroupname for the LineJet Print Server to be visible within. By
default, the print server only comes up within the group called
“WORKGROUP.”
store pserver from default
Set all general print server settings back to factory defaults.
store pserver from current
Store all current general print server settings to flash memory so they are
retained after a power cycle. This ensures all current settings match what
is stored in flash memory.
store rprinter add|del printservername
destination
store rprinter add pserver1 0 d1prn
printernumber
Add or delete the RPRINTER settings on the LineJet Print Server for a
Novell environment. The printservername must be the name of an
existing PSERVER.NLM on your Novell file server. The printernumber
is the printer number within this PSERVER.NLM. The destination is
the queue on the LineJet Print Server where the print jobs will be sent to.
221
Chapter
12 Complete Command List
store tcpip ifnum addr IPaddress
store tcpip 1 addr 192.75.11.9
Store the IP address for the LineJet Print Server.
store tcpip ifnum mask netmask
store tcpip 1 mask 255.255.255.0
Store the subnet mask for the LineJet Print Server.
store tcpip ifnum opts [[-]rarp] [[-]bootp] [[-]dhcp]
store tcpip 1 opts -rarp -bootp -dhcp
Enable or disable the automatic RARP, BOOTP, or DHCP requests for IP
addresses upon bootup. If you are storing the LineJet Print Server TCP/IP
network settings within the device, you will not need to rely on RARP,
BOOTP, or DHCP for new settings.
store tcpip ifnum frametype [[-]ethernet2]
[[-]802.2snap]
store tcpip 1 frametype ethernet2 802.2snap
Control which frame type(s) is supported with the TCP/IP protocol. By
default, both ethernet2 and 802.2snap are enabled but normal
TCP/IP communications rely on Ethernet 2. This setting has no affect on
other supported network protocols (e.g., Novell).
store tcpip route add|del host|net IPaddress ifnum
store tcpip route add net 192.75.12.0 1
store tcpip route del net 192.75.12.9 1
Add or delete a static route to a particular TCP/IP host or subnet specified
by IPaddress so the LineJet Print Server knows how to communicate
with it. Normally one entry for a default router/gateway is all that is
needed for communications between different subnets. Please see the
next command for details.
store tcpip route add|del default routerIPaddress
ifnum
store tcpip route add default 192.75.11.1 1
Store a default router/gateway defined by routerIPaddress so the
LineJet Print Server knows where to direct packets destined for another
subnet. It is easier to store one default entry rather than an entry per
remote host or network as in the previous command.
store tcpip tcp rxwin packets
store tcpip tcp rxwin 2
Determine the receive window size for the LineJet Print Server. Usually
the packets value ranges from 2 to 8 with the lower number allowing for
more simultaneous TCP connections with the print server.
store tcpip tcp opts [-]keepalive [-]disbufmgmt
store tcpip tcp opts keepalive -disbufmgmt
Control whether the LineJet Print Server maintains a connection with a
host when data cannot be accepted into its buffer. Normally the
keepalive feature is enabled so when the printer can not accept data,
the print job connection is maintained and continued once the situation
clears. If disbufmgmt is disabled (i.e., “-”), the LineJet Print Server will
222
Set Commands
not buffer any data when there is a blocked situation with the printer.
Normally it is best to have both keepalive and disbufmgmt enabled.
store tcpip tcp access [root] add|del IPaddress
store tcpip tcp access add 192.75.11.25
Add or remove an entry from the LineJet Print Server TCP access list
defined by IPaddress. If the list has an entry, only this host can print to
and remotely interact with the print server.
store tcpip from default
Set all TCP/IP network settings back to factory defaults.
store tcpip from current
Store all current TCP/IP network settings to flash memory so they are
retained after a power cycle. This ensures all current settings match what
is stored in flash memory.
Set Commands
These settings alter the current or working settings in memory only.
Therefore, they will be lost if the LineJet Print Server is power cycled. To
ensure this does not happen, be sure to issue a save command so the
current settings get written to flash memory.
set date year month day
set date 1997 02 10
Set the current date noting the four-digit year, the two-digit month from
01 through 12, and the day being the number in the month. If the LineJet
Print Server is reset, this value will be lost so you will need to set the date
again.
set dest destination name newname
set dest d1prn name laser
Change the current name of the destination to a new name as
indicated by newname. This newname must be nine characters or less or it
will be truncated. These names are case sensitive.
set dest destination backchannel prn [prn]
set dest d1prn backchannel prn
Establish a return path for printer feedback for a given destination.
Since the LineJet Print Server I/O port is bi-directional, however, you will
most likely use the same I/O port that the destination is currently
sending jobs to.
set dest destination model modelname
set dest d1prn model m4
Associate a model with a destination. Jobs sent to the named
destination are processed according to the options defined in the
named model.
set dest destination logpath logpathname
set dest d1prn logpath l4
Associate a logpath with a destination. Jobs sent to the named
destination are logged according to the settings defined in the named
logpath.
223
Chapter
12 Complete Command List
set dest destination service [[-]socket][[-]lpd]
[[-]lpsched] [[-]rprinter] [[-]pserver] [[-]netbios]
[[-]ftpd]
set dest d1prn service -netbios
Set the destination to handle only certain print services. To add a
service, specify the service name. To disable a service, use “-” before the
name. The available services are:
socket
Direct socket printing via TCP/IP.
lpd
LPR printing with TCP/IP including LPR clients on any
platform.
lpsched LP or System V printing with TCP/IP.
rprinter Novell RPRINTER support.
pserver Novell PSERVER support.
netbios Windows 95 and Windows for Workgroups printing.
ftpd
Printing using the File Transfer Protocol (ftp) via TCP/IP.
set dest from default
Set all destination settings back to factory defaults.
set dest from stored
Set all current destination settings to the values stored in flash memory.
set logpath logpath name newname
set logpath l1 name pagecount
Change the current name of the logpath to a new name as indicated by
newname. This newname must be nine characters or less or it will be
truncated. These names are case sensitive.
set logpath logpath type [[-]job] [[-]user] [[-]pgcnt]
[[-]cksum] [[-]printer] [[-]ioport]
set logpath l2 type job user printer pgcnt
Establish the type of printer and print job logging to be done within this
logpath. The options are:
224
job
Job ID, username, etc.
user
User ID along with three messages per job about start and
finish.
pgcnt
For total pages printed in a job.
cksum
16-bit checksum value to confirm integrity of data printed.
printer
For special printer feedback.
ioport
Printer error messages determined through the parallel port
pins.
Set Commands
set logpath logpath port TCPportnumber| email|syslog
set logpath l3 port 2000
Determine where the log information should be sent for a print job or
attached printer. The choices are:
TCPportnumber TCP port number ranging from 1024 to 65000.
email
Particular user’s email address. This address is set
using the set sysinfo email
emailname@IPaddress command.
syslog
A central TCP/IP host running the SYSLOG daemon.
This host is set using the set sysinfo syslog
IPaddress command.
set logpath from default
Set all logpath settings back to factory defaults.
set logpath from stored
Set all current logpath settings to the values stored in flash memory.
set model model name newname
set model m1 name landscape
Change the current name of the model to a new name as indicated by
newname. This newname must be nine characters or less or it will be
truncated. These names are case sensitive.
set model model type raw
set model m2 type raw
Set the model type to raw so that it does not process the data passing
through it in any way.
set model model banner [ps|text|auto [after]]
set model m2 banner text
Determine whether a banner page should be added for print jobs passing
through the model mapped destination/queue. auto will determine which
type is needed depending on the type of print job data passing through.
By default, banner pages are added to the front of the job. If after is set,
the banner page will come at the end.
set model model stty [[-]onlcr] [[-]descramble] [xtab
tablength|none]
set model m3 stty onlcr
Control extra job processing done by the model. The processing options
are:
onlcr
Carriage return insertion for Unix text jobs. Adds
carriage returns to text jobs with solitary linefeeds.
This will prevent stair-stepped output or output
running off the right side of the page.
descramble
Automatic descrambling of print jobs passing through
which have been scrambled using the proprietary
scramble Unix utility, npscramble.
xtab
Tab expansion from 1 to 16 spaces.
225
Chapter
12 Complete Command List
set model model trailer trailerstring
set model m7 trailer $FF
Set a trailer string to be sent to the printer at the end of any print jobs
passing through this model. trailerstring can consist of up to nine
elements. An example element is a hexadecimal code (e.g., 0x04) or a
pre-defined variable on the print server (e.g., $FF for a formfeed). Use
list var to see all available variables.
set model from default
Set all model settings back to factory defaults.
set model from stored
Set all current model settings to the values stored in flash memory.
set prn [-]autofd
set prn -autofd
Assert or do not assert the AUTOFD line for carriage return insertion. This
only affects printers that support this function (e.g., impact printers).
set prn flush
set prn flush
Flush the data in the parallel port input and output buffers.
set prn unlock
set prn unlock
Release the access lock on the parallel port.
set prn timeout minutes |none
set prn timeout none
Terminate the print job sent to the parallel port if it is not printed after the
timeout period in minutes expires. The minutes value ranges from 0
though 255 with 0 indicating no timing out to take place. This is the default
setting and should be fine for most print setups.
set prn [-]opost
set prn -opost
Allow or disallow output processing on the parallel port such as carriage
return insertion (i.e., onlcr).
set prn [-]onlcr
set prn -onlcr
Enable or disable carriage return insertion on the parallel port. This may
be needed for Unix text jobs coming through with solitary linefeeds. This
feature is almost always set at the model level rather than the I/O port
level though.
set prn xtab tablength |none
set prn xtab none
Set the tabstop width as indicated by tablength. The range is 1 through
16 spaces.
set prn from default
Set all parallel port settings back to factory defaults.
set prn from stored
Set all current parallel port settings to the values stored in flash memory.
226
Set Commands
set snmp
To add a user named snmp with root privileges, please follow the steps
below:
1. Login to the LineJet Print Server as a root user.
2. Add a user named snmp.
set user add snmp
3. Set the user type to root.
set user type snmp root
4. Set the password for the snmp user.
set user passwd snmp snmppassword
5. Save the changes.
save
The user snmp is now created and snmppassword is the only community
string which will allow write access.
set snmp manager index ipaddress trap-community
The Print Server continuously generates traps, but unless the trap table is
filled in, no SNMP manager will receive this information. To set the Print
Server to send traps to a particular SNMP manager, use this command to
add an SNMP manager to the trap table.
index is the index number of the trap table. ipaddress is the IP
address of the SNMP manager receiving traps. trap-community is the
community string sent along with the trap information.
set sysinfo name newname
set sysinfo name salesprinter
Set a descriptive name defined by newname for LineJet Print Server
identification purposes. This is not used in the operation of the print server
in any way.
set sysinfo location description
set sysinfo location salesdept
Set the physical location of the LineJet Print Server. This is for
identification purposes and is not used in the operation of the print server
in any way.
set sysinfo contact contactname
set sysinfo contact Paul_Harris
Set a person or department to contact in case of print server trouble.
227
Chapter
12 Complete Command List
set sysinfo loginfo [-]sys | [-]tcp | [-]ipx | [-]spx
set sysinfo loginfo -sys ipx
Set the LineJet Print Server debugging information type. Usually this
information includes unexpected errors or exceptions from the print
server divided into these groups:
Note
sys
General system messages.
tcp
TCP stack messages.
ipx
IPX stack messages.
spx
SPX stack messages.
This is not printer or job logging information.
set sysinfo logport null|syslog
set sysinfo logport null
Define where the debugging information should be sent to. This can be
sent to an output device off of the LineJet Print Server I/O port or to a
central TCP/IP host running a SYSLOG daemon. To set this host, use the
command set sysinfo syslog hostIPaddress.
set sysinfo email emailname@IPaddress
set sysinfo email joe@192.75.11.5
Define the user email address to receive printer and job logging
information from a particular logpath on the LineJet Print Server.
emailname is the host or IP name of the user, and IPaddress is the IP
address where the mail is stored on your network.
set sysinfo syslog hostIPaddress
set sysinfo syslog 192.75.11.30
Set the IP address of the host running the SYSLOG daemon. LineJet
Print Server debugging or print job and printer logging information can be
sent to that IP address.
set sysinfo dns DNSserverIPaddress
set sysinfo dns 192.75.11.2
Set your DNS server IP address so the LineJet Print Server can resolve
host names when used with its built-in Telnet and Ping clients.
set sysinfo descramblekey hexvalue
set sysinfo descramblekey 1234
Set the key value used for descrambling print jobs that have passed
through the npscramble utility on a TCP/IP host. This key is a four-digit
hexadecimal value obtained from the host software, npscramble. Within
the npscramble source code, there is a variable called SR_KEY which
contains the default key value. This can be changed to any four-digit
value you would like.
228
Set Commands
set sysinfo module [[-]novell] [[-]netbios]
set sysinfo module -novell
Enable and disable certain network protocol stacks within the LineJet
Print Server. Sometimes it helps to disable any protocols you are not
using on your network.
set time hours [minutes [seconds ]]
set time 10 30
Set the current time noting the hours based on the 24-hour system and
the minutes and seconds ranging from 0 through 59. If the LineJet Print
Server is reset, this value will be lost so you will need to set the time
again.
set user add|del username
set user add eng
Add or remove a user on the LineJet Print Server defined by username.
Note
Be careful not to delete the root user, or you will be unable to configure
any further settings on the print server. You will have to go back to factory
defaults to correct this problem.
set user passwd username password
set user passwd eng mplex1
Assign a password to a defined user on the LineJet Print Server. This
password must be less than eleven characters.
set user type username root|guest
set user type eng root
Assign root or guest privileges to a particular user defined by username.
Guest permissions allow viewing of settings only. Root permissions allow
complete control of the LineJet Print Server.
set user from default
Set all user settings back to factory defaults.
set user from stored
Set all current user settings to the values stored in flash memory.
set user passwd snmp com_name
Sets the new SNMP R/W community name as the com_name value.
set var variablename variablestring
set var LANDSCAPE 0x1b 0x26 0x6c 0x31 0x4f
set var FINISH $FF $PCL-RST
Define a new variable to be used in header, trailer, or switch strings on
the LineJet Print Server and call it variablename. variablestring
can be a space-separated list of words, hexadecimal numbers
(e.g., 0x04), or references to other pre-defined variables. It is easiest to
make up the variablestring with hexadecimal values as shown in the
example.
One variable counts as one element within header and trailer strings.
229
Chapter
12 Complete Command List
Defined variables are referenced in strings by placing an $ before the
variable name (e.g., set model m1 trailer $FF).
set var from default
Set all variable settings back to factory defaults.
set var from stored
Set all current variable settings to the values stored in flash memory.
List Commands
These commands list the current or working settings for a particular section
within the command shell. To view stored settings in flash memory, you will
need to add in stored within the beginning of any of the following
commands. For example, list prn shows you the current prn settings but
list stored prn shows you the settings sitting in flash memory.
Normally these should match.
list arp
List the current ARP table that the LineJet Print Server adheres to in a
TCP/IP network.
list date
List the current date on the LineJet Print Server.
list dest
List the current destination settings (e.g., names and mapped I/O ports,
models, and logpaths).
list diff
List the differences between the current settings and the stored settings in
flash memory. Normally, you want these values to match, so issue a
save command followed by a reset.
list ifc
List the current UTP interface settings (e.g., link integrity).
list key
List the license details and license key number.
list logins
List any active user logins on the LineJet Print Server.
list logpath
List the current logpath settings (e.g., names and mapped destinations).
list model
List the current model settings (e.g., names and mapped destinations).
list pserver
List the current general print server settings (e.g., print server name and
Novell mode).
list prn
List the current parallel port setting (e.g., mode).
list rprinter
List any current RPRINTER definitions.
230
Debug Commands
list snmp
List Trap Table containing SNMP Managers.
list sysinfo
List the current LineJet Print Server system information (e.g., contact
name and protocol stacks enabled).
list tcpip
List all current TCP/IP network settings (e.g., IP address and subnet
mask).
list test
List the status of output tests on the I/O ports.
list time
List the current time on the LineJet Print Server.
list user
List the current user definitions (e.g., user names and types).
list var
List all pre-defined variables including any newly created ones. Any of
these defined variables can be referenced in a string by placing a $
before the variable name (e.g., set model m1 trailer $FF).
Debug Commands
The debug set of commands help troubleshoot problems that may occur on
the LineJet Print Server. Some of the output may be cryptic, but it helps when
troubleshooting.
debug eeprom
List ROM contents.
debug io
List statistics from the I/O port module.
debug ip
List IP stack statistics.
debug lpd
List statistics from the lpd daemon.
debug lpq
List statistics from the queue module.
debug mem
List statistics from the LineJet Print Server memory module.
debug nest fserver
View the Novell file server(s) the LineJet Print Server has acknowledged
and connected to.
debug nest ipx
Determine whether a board has been bound to the LineJet Print Server
under Novell and that the network number is correct for your network.
231
Chapter
12 Complete Command List
debug nest logs
View miscellaneous Novell log messages.
debug nest odi
Determine what frame type is bonded to which board number under
Novell.
debug nest pserver
View the Novell PSERVER log messages including queues attached to.
debug nest rprinter
View the Novell PSERVER and RPRINTER log messages and
destinations used on the LineJet Print Server.
debug nest sap
Determine whether the LineJet Print Server is seeing any Novell network
activity.
debug netbios
List NetBIOS (i.e., Windows 95 and WfW) statistics.
debug nif
List network interface statistics.
debug novell
List file and print servers.
debug tcp
List TCP stack statistics.
Miscellaneous Commands
These commands do not fall under any specific section of the command shell,
but they are used quite frequently.
save [default]
Save the current settings to flash memory so they are available after
power cycles. Sysinfo, destination, model, logpath, variable, user, and I/O
port settings will be saved. If default is specified as well, factory
settings will be saved, overwriting any new settings you have configured.
reset
Perform a warm boot or hardware reset simulating a power-on reset.
Restores current settings to those stored in flash memory since the flash
memory settings will be read and loaded into memory upon bootup.
load [default]
Load the settings stored in flash memory and use them as the current or
working settings. If default is specified as well, factory settings will be
loaded.
lpstat [ioport] [jobID]
lpstat prn
Display active and queued jobs and I/O port status for a given ioport or
jobID. Specifying one of these parameters will shorten the output
focusing on the particular I/O port or print job specified.
232
Miscellaneous Commands
cancel jobID
cancel d1prn-10
Remove a job from an I/O port queue. Use lpstat to find a particular
job ID first.
start fox|tts|loopb prn
start fox prn
Begin a debugging test on one of the I/O ports on the LineJet Print
Server. The tests available are:
fox
A continuous stream of text sent to the attached printer. This
is a good test for troubleshooting hardware as long as the
attached printer supports text output.
tts
A continuous stream of Gandalf 400C TTS-compatible text
sent to the attached printer.
loopb Loopback test. Any input characters from the device attached
to the I/O port is echoed back.
stop prn
stop prn
Stop an output test on an I/O port.
disable ioport|destination
disable prn
Disable an ioport so that queued jobs are not printed, or disable a
destination so jobs can not be queued to it.
enable ioport|destination
enable prn
Enable an ioport so that queued jobs are printed, or enable a
destination so jobs can be queued to it.
close tcp TCPindexnumber
close tcp 3
Force a TCP/IP connection between a TCP/IP host and the LineJet Print
Server to close. The TCPindexnumber can be retrieved from “debug tcp”
output.
ping [-s] hostIPaddress [datasize [packetnumber]]
ping 192.75.11.30
ping another TCP/IP host specified by hostIPaddress on the LineJet
Print Server network. datasize is the datagram packet size which
defaults to 64 bytes if no size is included in the syntax, and
packetnumber is the number of requests to be sent.
Note
To use a host or IP name instead of the address, you must have set the
DNS server on the LineJet Print Server. Use the command set sysinfo
dns... to do this.
233
Chapter
12 Complete Command List
telnet hostIPaddress [escapecharacter]
telnet 192.75.11.35
Start a Telnet session with another TCP/IP host specified by
hostIPaddress on the LineJet Print Server network. If
escapecharacter is used, it resets the key sequence used to exit the
Telnet session. It will return you to the telnet> prompt where you can
execute quit. Use the keycode command to find out exact escape
characters if needed. The default character is CTRL-].
Note
To use a host or IP name instead of the address, you must have set the
DNS server on the LineJet Print Server. Use the command set sysinfo
dns... to do this.
chr string
Echo string or redirect string to an I/O port using chr string >
ioport.
keycode
Determine the hexadecimal value for a key to be used as the escape
character with the LineJet Print Server built-in telnet command.
234
13
Extra Features
LineJet Print Server Security
There are TCP access lists available to restrict host connections with the
device.
Users And Passwords
By default, the LineJet Print Server supports two logical user types:
root
Access to everything within the print server including all
configurable settings.
guest
Ability to list settings only.
Using set commands, other users can be created.
Passwords can be set for each user type. However, most often you would just
set a password for the root user to protect the LineJet Print Server
configuration. Guest users cannot alter the print server configuration in any
way.
You can configure a root password on your LineJet Print Server using either
Telnet or a Web browser as follows:
Telnet
Using Telnet, set a root password by entering the following commands.
Syntax:
set user passwd username password
save
Example:
set user passwd root your_password_for_root
save
Note
If prompted for a User ID and password first, type in root for the user ID
and press ENTER at the password prompt since there is no password by
default.
235
Chapter
13 LineJet Print Server Security
Web Browser
1. Using a Web browser, direct the browser to URL
http://LineJetIPaddress/adminConf.html
(e.g., http://192.75.11.9/adminConf.html)
Note
If prompted for a User ID and password first, type in root for the user ID
and press ENTER at the password prompt since there is no password by
default.
2. At the “Administration Configuration” HTML form that displays, scroll
down to the “Passwords” section.
3. Click within the “Old” field beside the “Root Password” heading and enter
the existing root password. By default, there is no root password so you
can go to the next step without typing anything in this field.
4. Within the “Root Password” section, click within the “New” field and enter
the new root password.
5. Within the “Root Password” section, click within the “Confirm” field and
enter the new root password again. Remember this is case sensitive.
6. Click on the SUBMIT button when done and physically repower the print
server to make the new setting takes effect.
From this point on, anytime you log in to the LineJet Print Server as root,
you will need to specify this password or your login attempt will fail.
To clear this password or change it, use the same “Administration
Configuration” HTML form. Just enter the appropriate “Old” password and put
in the new one (or nothing if you do not want a root password any longer). The
commands directly on the LineJet Print Server are:
set user from default
save
Note
Remember your password. If you forget it, the only way to recover your
password is as follows:
1. set Dipswitch 1 on the adapter to the “on” position
2. power up
3. set Dipswitch 1 to the “off” position
4. power up a second time.
You will also have to restore all IP values.
236
TCP Access Lists
TCP Access Lists
Within TCP/IP environments, the LineJet Print Server can restrict host access
to destinations/queues and remote command (i.e., rsh, rcmd, remsh and
telnet) execution services. This is done using an access list similar in
function to the Unix .rhosts file.
To view the current access list on the print server, complete the steps below.
Note
Access list settings are not configurable through the HTML forms provided
with the LineJet Print Server.
1. Start a Telnet session with the LineJet Print Server.
Syntax:
telnet LineJetIPaddress
2. Log in as root and press ENTER at the password prompt since there is
no password by default (or your password for your home set).
3. List the current access list.
Syntax:
List tcpip
If the TCP access table entry list is empty, all hosts have access to the
LineJet Print Server services. If there are entries in the list, only those
hosts specified have access to printing and remote command execution.
To add and delete access list entries, the commands are:
Syntax:
store tcpip tcp access add|del hostIPaddress|
networkaddress
reset
where hostIPaddress is the IP address of a TCP/IP host on your
network and networkaddress is the address of a subnet on your
network.
Example:
store tcpip tcp access add 192.75.11.25
store tcpip tcp access add 192.75.12.0
store tcpip tcp access del 192.75.11.25
reset
Note
Although the maximum number of entries in the access list is 10, each
entry can refer to a network rather than a specific host. This allows all
hosts on that specified network plus any individual hosts specified in the
list to have access.
237
Chapter
13 Printer Monitoring And Logging
Printer Monitoring And Logging
One of the key aspects of maintaining a computing environment is monitoring
printer status and logging this information to useful places. The LineJet Print
Server allows this through its built-in HTML forms, command set, and
logpaths.
Printer And Print Job Monitoring
To view the current status of an I/O port on the LineJet Print Server, you can
use either Telnet or a Web browser as follows:
Telnet
Using Telnet, enter the lpstat command directly on the print server (after
you have logged in as guest or root).
Web Browser
Using a Web browser, select the desired I/O port on the “Status” HTML form
that comes with the LineJet Print Server:
http://LineJetIPaddress/indexStatus.html
(e.g., http://192.75.11.9/indexStatus.html).
Whether using Telnet or a Web browser, you are given a description of each
I/O port status and a list of queued jobs. Table 14 describes some of the
common terms you may encounter.
Table 14. Key Printer Logging Terms
Term
238
Description
idle
There is no job queued for the LineJet Print Server I/O port.
blocked
The printer is not allowing the LineJet Print Server to send
data to it. If this condition persists, check that there is not a
printer error and that the printer is online and ready to go.
waiting
The LineJet Print Server knows about a print job but is
waiting for the host to send more data or to send an
expected packet.
Printer Logging Through Logpaths
Printer Logging Through Logpaths
Destinations are logical queues with associated models and logpaths. Models
allow extra processing needed with the print jobs. Logpaths are used if
logging is desired for each job.
Each logpath on the LineJet Print Server consists of two parts:
Type
The type of log information to be captured. The choices are job
for job ID and username, user for user ID (and three messages
per job), pgcnt for total pages printed in a job, cksum for file
checksums, printer for special printer feedback, and ioport
for parallel printer status messages.
Port
Where this log information will be sent to. The choices are a TCP
port number (e.g., 2000), an email address (including an alias),
or a central host running a SYSLOG daemon.
To view the current logpath settings on the print server, you can use either
Telnet or a Web browser as follows:
Telnet
Using Telnet, type the commands and your variable data as shown in the
example below:
Syntax:
list logpath
list logpath logpath
set logpath logpath port ioport
set logpath logpath type user job
save
Example:
10.221.1.25:root> list logpath
NAME
LOG PORT
LOG FLAGS
l1
l2
l3
l4
10.221.1.25:root> list logpath l2
log port:
log flags:
10.221.1.25:root> set logpath l2 port 9999
ok
10.221.1.25:root> set logpath l2 type user job
ok: user
ok: job
save
239
Chapter
Note
13 LineJet Print Server Naming Schemes
If prompted for a User ID and password first, type in root for the ID and
press ENTER at the password prompt since there is no password by
default.
Web Browser
1. Using a Web browser, direct the browser to URL
http://LineJetIPaddress/destConf.html
(e.g., http://192.75.11.9/destConf.html)
Note
If prompted for a User ID and password first, type in root for the ID and
press ENTER at the password prompt since there is no password by
default.
2. At the “Print Path Configuration” HTML form that displays, select a
destination link (e.g., d1prn) from the top of the page to bring up the
appropriate destination form.
3. Once the desired destination HTML form displays, scroll down to the
“Logpath Type” and “Logpath Port” sections to view the current logpath
settings for this particular destination.
Whether using Telnet or a Web browser, you can alter any of these settings at
this point and then click on the SUBMIT button to store them into the LineJet
Print Server. Remember to repower the LineJet Print Server to make the
settings take effect.
LineJet Print Server Naming Schemes
I/O PORT
DESTINATION
MODEL
LOGPATH
d1prn
m1
l1
d2prn
m2
l2
d3prn
m3
l3
d4prn
m4
l4
PRN
Figure 17. LineJet Print Server Default Names
240
14
Interfaces
Overview
The printer interface is the point where the data line from the host computer
plugs into the printer. The interface processes all communications signals and
data to and from the host computer. It consists of a printed circuit board
assembly (PCBA) and a connector for the data cable from the host computer.
Communication signals and data may be sent over Ethernet, parallel, or serial
lines.
When data is sent through multiple interfaces, the Autoport Switching feature
forces the printer to automatically switch between the serial and parallel port
and between the Ethernet adapter and the serial port when the LineJet Print
Server is installed.
This chapter describes the following interfaces provided with the printer.
•
•
•
•
Note
Centronics
Bi-Tronics
RS-232 serial
RS-422 serial
If you require a parallel interface, contact your Hewlett-Packard Customer
Service Engineer.
241
Chapter
14 Centronics Parallel Interface
Centronics Parallel Interface
The Centronics interface enables the printer to operate with controllers
designed for buffered Centronics printers. The length of the data cable from
the host computer to the printer must not exceed 15 feet (5 meters).
Table 15. Centronics Interface Connector Pin Assignments
Input Signals
Output Signals
Miscellaneous
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
DATA LINE 1
Return
2
20
ACKNOWLEDGE
Return
10
28
CHASSIS GROUND
17
DATA LINE 2
Return
3
21
ONLINE
Return
13
28
GROUND
30
DATA LINE 3
Return
4
22
FAULT
Return
32
29
Spares
14
DATA LINE 4
Return
5
23
PAPER EMPTY
Return
12
28
No Connection
34, 35,
36
DATA LINE 5
Return
6
24
BUSY
Return
11
29
+5 Volts
18
DATA LINE 6
Return
7
25
DATA LINE 7
Return
8
26
DATA LINE 8
Return
9
27
DATA STROBE
Return
1
19
PAPER INSTRUCTION
Return
15
29
PRIME
Return
31
30
Centronics Interface Signals
The Centronics interface signals between the host computer and the printer
are defined as follows:
Data Lines 1 through 8. Provide eight standard or inverted levels from the
host that specify a character or function code. Data Line 8 allows access to
the extended ASCII character set. You may enable or disable this line via the
Data Bit 8 parameter on the Centronics submenu.
242
Centronics Parallel Interface Configuration
Data Strobe. Carries a low true, 100 ns min. pulse from the host that clocks
data into the printer.
Paper Instruction (PI). Carries a VFU control signal from the host with the
same timing as the data lines.
Acknowledge. A low true pulse from the printer indicating the character or
function code has been received and the printer is ready for the next data
transfer.
Online. A high true level from the printer to indicate the printer is ready for
data transfer and the ON LINE key on the operator panel has been activated.
When the printer is in online mode, it may accept data from the host.
Paper Empty (PE). A high true level from the printer to indicate the printer is
in a fault condition.
Busy. A high true level from the printer to indicate the printer cannot receive
data.
Centronics Parallel Interface Configuration
Your printer is configured at the factory to match the interface you specified.
By using the operator panel, you may verify and change several interface
parameters in order to meet specific application requirements.
Refer to “Centronics (Parallel) Submenu” on page 112 for Centronics
parameter descriptions and information on selecting values for the following
parameters:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Data Bit 8 (enable or disable)
Data Polarity (standard or inverted)
Strobe Polarity (standard or inverted)
Response Polarity (standard or inverted)
Busy on Strobe (enable or disable)
Latch Data On Leading or Trailing Edge of Strobe
Prime Signal (enable or disable)
TOF Action at Prime Signal (do nothing or form feed)
I/O Buffer Size (1-6)
Some application programs require a unique configuration. If the printer is not
working properly in the configuration you have selected, contact a HewlettPackard Customer Service Engineer.
243
Chapter
14 Bi-Tronics Parallel Interface
Bi-Tronics Parallel Interface
Bi-Tronics is a parallel interface with bidirectional capabilities. Features
include the following:
•
Timing of the signals has been reduced, thereby speeding data
transmission.
•
•
Bidirectional communication. Both the host and the printer can send data.
•
Less user interaction. The host can ask the printer about printing status
and supported features, such as fonts and internal errors. For example,
instead of having to physically check if the printer has run out of paper,
you can create a program to query this from the host. The printer will
respond and a message will display on the host.
Versatility. If a device cannot send data along particular lines, the BiTronics interface can send data via other operating modes, such as
Nibble Mode which is discussed later.
Operating Modes
The Bi-Tronics interface supports three operating modes, which are
determined by negotiation between the printer and the host.
Compatibility Mode
This mode provides compatibility with Centronics-like host I/O. Data is
transferred from the host to the printer in 8-bit bytes over the data lines.
Compatibility mode can be combined with nibble and byte modes to provide
bidirectional communication.
Nibble Mode
Eight bits equals one byte. When a byte of data is sent to the printer, the eight
bits are sent over eight data lines.
Some devices cannot send data over their eight data lines. To bypass this,
the Bi-Tronics interface permits data to be sent as half a byte over four status
lines. (Half a byte equals one nibble.) Two sequential four-bit nibbles are sent
over the lines.
Data is transferred from printer to host in four-bit nibbles over the status lines,
and the host controls the transmission.
Byte Mode
The printer and host send data to each other along eight data lines (one bit
per line).
If bidirectional communication is supported by the printer and the host, the
host will take control of the data transfer.
244
The Negotiation Phase
The Negotiation Phase
The negotiation phase determines which operating mode will be used. At this
time, the host and the printer will sense what devices are attached, the
supported signals available, and which mode to use. The selected mode, in
turn, defines the pins on the Bi-Tronics interface connector.
There are 36 pins on the parallel interface. Each one sends a different signal.
Pin 1, for example, can send a Strobe signal or a HostClk signal, depending
on the mode selected. Table 16 shows the different definitions.
Signals
Bi-Tronics interface signals between the host and the printer are defined
below.
Host Clock / nWrite. Driven by the host. Data is transferred from host to
printer. When the printer sends data, two types are available. In Nibble mode,
the signal is set high. In Byte mode, the signal is set low.
Data 1 through Data 8. These pins are host-driven in Compatibility mode and
bidirectional in Byte mode. They are not used in Nibble mode. Data 1 is the
least significant bit; Data 8 is the most significant bit.
Printer Clock / Peripheral Clock / Interrupt. Driven by the printer. A signal
from the printer indicating the character or function code has been received
and the printer is ready for the next data transfer.
Printer Busy / Peripheral Acknowledge / nWait. Driven by the printer.
Indicates the printer cannot receive data. (Data bits 4 and 8 in Nibble Mode.)
Acknowledge Data Request / nAcknowledge Reverse. Driven by the
printer. Indicates the printer is in a fault condition. (Data bits 3 and 7 in Nibble
mode.)
Xflag. Driven by the printer. A high true level indicating the printer is ready for
data transfer and the printer is online. (Data bits 2 and 6 in Nibble mode.)
Host Busy / Host Acknowledge / NDStrobe. Driven by the host. Activates
auto-line feed mode.
Peripheral Logic High. Driven by the printer. When set high, the printer
indicates all of its signals are in a valid state. When set low, the printer
indicates its power is off or its signals are in an invalid state.
nReverse Request. Driven by the host. Resets the interface and forces a
return to Compatibility mode idle phase.
nData Available / nPeripheral Request. Driven by the printer. Indicates the
printer has encountered an error. (Data bits 1 and 5 in Nibble mode.)
1284 Active / nAStrobe. Driven by the host. A peripheral device is selected.
Host Logic High. Driven by the host. When set to high, the host indicates all
of its signals are in a valid state. When set to low, the host indicates its power
is off or its signals are in an invalid state.
nInit. Resets init interface from the host.
245
Chapter
14 Bi-Tronics Parallel Interface
Note
The length of the data cable from the host computer to the printer should
not exceed 10 meters (32 feet).
Table 16. Bi-Tronics Signals
Type of Mode
Pin
Source of Data
Compatible
1
Host
nStrobe
2
Host/Printer
Data 1 (LSB)
3
Host/Printer
Data 2
4
Host/Printer
Data 3
5
Host/Printer
Data 4
6
Host/Printer
Data 5
7
Host/Printer
Data 6
8
Host/Printer
Data 7
9
Host/Printer
Data 8 (MSB)
10
Printer
11
Nibble
Byte
HostClk
Host/Clk
nAck
PtrClk
PtrClk
Printer
Busy
PtrBusy
PtrBusy
12
Printer
PError
AckDataReq
AckDataReq
13
Printer
Select
Xflag
Xflag
14
Host
nAutoFd
Host Busy
HostAck
15
Not Defined
16
Logic Grid
17
Chassis Grid
18
Printer
Peripheral Logic High
19
Signal Ground (nStrobe)
20
Signal Ground (Data 1)
21
Signal Ground (Data 2)
22
Signal Ground (Data 3)
23
Signal Ground (Data 4)
246
Signals
Table 16. Bi-Tronics Signals (continued)
Type of Mode
Pin
Source of Data
Compatible
Nibble
Byte
24
Signal Ground (Data 5)
25
Signal Ground (Data 6)
26
Signal Ground (Data 7)
27
Signal Ground (Data 8)
28
Signal Ground (PError, Select, nAck)
29
Signal Ground (Busy, nFault)
30
Signal Ground (nAutoFd, nSelectIn, nInit)
31
Host
nInit
32
Printer
NFault
33
Not Defined
34
Not Defined
35
Not Defined
36
Host
nSelectIn
nDataAvail
aDataAvail
1284 Active
1284 Active
247
Chapter
14 RS-232 And RS-422 Serial Interfaces
RS-232 And RS-422 Serial Interfaces
Note
The RS-232 and RS-422 serial interface circuit characteristics are
compatible with the Electronic Industry Association Specifications
EIA®-232-E and EIA-422-B.
The RS-232 and RS-422 serial interfaces enable the printer to operate with bit
serial devices that are compatible with an RS-232 controller. The input serial
data transfer rate (in baud) is selectable from the printer operator panel. Baud
rates of 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19,200, and 38,400 are available for
RS-232 and RS-422.
The input format consists of a single start bit, 7 or 8 data bits, and one or two
stop bits. The number of data bits is determined by printer configuration. The
data bits are interpreted with the least significant bit first. Parity checking is
determined by printer configuration options selected from the operator panel.
The printer interface uses a first-in/first-out buffer. The asynchronous
interface accepts data as it is provided by the host. The length of the data
cable from the host computer to the printer must not exceed 50 feet (15
meters) for RS-232 or 4000 feet (1220 meters) for RS-422. (A copper
conductor, twisted-pair telephone cable with a shunt capacitance of 16 pF/
foot [52.5 pF/meter] terminated in a 100 ohm resistive load must be used for
the RS-422.)
Table 17. RS-232 Serial Interface Connector Pin Assignments
Input Signals
Output Signals
Miscellaneous
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
Receive Data (RD)
3
Transmit Data (TD)
2
Chassis Ground
1
Clear To Send (CTS)
5
Request To Send (RTS)
4
Signal Ground
7
Data Set Ready (DSR)
6
Data Terminal Ready (DTR)
20
Data Carrier Detect (DCD)
8
Table 18. RS-422 Serial Interface Connector Pin Assignments
Input Signals
Output Signals
Miscellaneous
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
- Receive Data (-RD)
15
- Transmit Data (-TD)
19
Chassis Ground
1
+ Receive Data (+RD)
17
+ Transmit Data (+TD)
25
Signal Ground
7
248
RS-232 And RS-422 Serial Interface Signals
RS-232 And RS-422 Serial Interface Signals
The RS-232/RS-422 connector mounted on the printer is a 25-pin DB-25S
type. The mating connector is a DB-25P. RS-232 and RS-422 compatible
serial interface signals are defined as follows:
RS-232
Transmitted Data (TD). Serial data stream from the printer for transmitting
status and control information to the host. Subject to protocol selection.
Received Data (RD). Serial data stream to the printer.
Request To Send (RTS). Control signal from the printer. Subject to
configuration.
Clear To Send (CTS). Status signal to the printer indicating the host is ready
to receive data/status signals from the printer.
Data Set Ready (DSR). Status signal to the printer indicating the host is in a
ready condition.
Data Carrier Detect (DCD). Status signal to the printer. The ON condition is
required for the printer to receive data.
Data Terminal Ready (DTR). Control signal from the printer. Subject to
configuration.
RS-422
+RD, -RD. Serial data stream differentially received by printer.
+TD, -TD. Differentially driven serial data stream for transmitting status and
control information to the host. Subject to protocol selection.
Note
±RD and ±TD form signal and return paths of a differential line signal.
RS-232 And RS-422 Serial Interface Protocol
X-ON/X-OFF. The printer transmits an X-ON character (hex 11) when
entering the Online mode or when the buffer is almost empty. The printer
transmits an X-OFF character (hex 13) when entering the Offline mode or
when the buffer is almost full.
249
Chapter
14 RS-232 And RS-422 Serial Interfaces
RS-232 And RS-422 Serial Interface Error Handling
Note
All serial errors are treated as faults that require operator intervention.
Parity Error Handling. Parity error checking is a configuration option
selected from the operator panel.
With odd or even parity checking selected, a character with a parity error is
replaced with a question mark (?) character.
When parity checking is not selected (“NONE” on the operator panel), parity
errors are ignored and the characters are printed as received.
Framing Error Handling. Framing error checking is always in effect for the
serial interface.
When a framing error occurs, an exclamation point (!) is printed. If 20
successive errors are received, a line feed is added to force printing to occur.
Overrun Error Handling. Overrun error checking is always in effect for the
serial interface.
When a data overrun error occurs, an asterisk (*) is printed. If 20 successive
errors are received, a line feed is added to force printing to occur.
RS-232 And RS-422 Serial Interface Configuration
By using the control panel, you can verify and change several interface
parameters in order to meet specific application requirements.
Refer to “Serial Submenu” on page 114 for RS-232 and RS-422 parameter
descriptions and information on selecting values for the following parameters:
RS-232 and RS-422
•
•
•
•
Baud Rate (data rate selected from the operator panel)
Data Bits (7 or 8 Bits)
Stop Bits (1 or 2 Bits)
Parity (None, Odd, Even, Mark or Sense)
RS-232 only
•
•
Data Terminal Ready logic
Request to Send logic
Some application programs require a unique configuration. If the printer is not
working properly with the configuration you selected, contact a HewlettPackard Customer Service Engineer.
250
15
Routine Service And
Diagnostics
Routine Service
Periodic cleaning ensures efficient operation and clear print quality, and it is
the only maintenance your printer requires. If the printer is located in a dusty
area or is used for heavy duty printing, clean it more often.
If print quality does not improve even after cleaning, contact your HewlettPackard Customer Service Engineer.
Warning
Disconnect the power source before cleaning the printer.
Vor dem Säubern des Druckers ist die Netzverbindung zu
unterbrechen.
Débranchez l’alimentation avant de nettoyer l’imprimante.
Desconecte la fuente de energía antes de limpiar la impresora.
Staccare la fonte di energia prima della pulitura della stampante.
Exterior Cleaning
Clean with a soft, lint-free cloth and mild detergent soap. (Dishwashing liquid
works well.) Do not use abrasive powders or chemical solvents. Clean the
windows with plain water or mild window cleaner. Always apply the cleaning
solution to the cloth; never pour cleaning solution directly onto the printer.
Interior Cleaning
Over time, particles of paper and ink accumulate inside impact printers. This
is normal. Paper dust and ink build-up must be removed periodically to avoid
degraded print quality. Most paper dust accumulates around the ends of the
platen and ribbon path.
To clean the interior of the printer, perform the following steps and refer to
Figure 18 for cabinet models and Figure 19 for pedestal models.
1. Power off the printer and unplug the printer power cord.
2. Open the printer cover. Fully raise the forms thickness lever. Unload
paper. Refer to the LineJet Printers Quick Reference Guide.
251
Chapter
15 Routine Service
3. Unlatch both ribbon spools and carefully lift them off the hubs. Raise the
ribbon out of the ribbon path.
4. Using a soft-bristled, non-metallic brush (such as a toothbrush), brush
paper dust and ribbon lint off the tractors, shuttle cover assembly, base
casting, and ribbon guides. Vacuum up the residue.
Caution
Vacuum carefully around the hammer bank and surrounding area to
avoid damage.
5. Wipe the splined shaft with a soft cloth.
6. Check the ribbon mask and hammer bank cover for bits of torn paper or
ribbon lint. Check the holes in the ribbon mask surrounding each hammer
tip. Gently remove paper or lint particles with a wooden stick or pair of
tweezers. (Do not pry or apply force to the hammer tips.)
7. Using a soft cloth lightly moistened with anhydrous alcohol (no water),
remove dust and ink from the platen. (The platen is the thick silver bar
behind the hammer bank cover that rotates when the forms thickness
lever is rotated.) Clean the ribbon guides.
Caution
When cleaning the platen, be very careful not to get any alcohol in the
hammer bank, because alcohol will cause severe damage to the
hammer bank. Only a trained service technician should clean the
shuttle assembly.
8. Brush and vacuum up dust or residue that has accumulated inside the
lower cabinet.
9. For cabinet models:
Wipe the lower cabinet interior with a clean, lint-free cloth dampened (not
wet) with water and mild detergent, or spray the surfaces lightly with
window cleaning solution. Dry the lower cabinet interior by wiping it with a
clean, lint-free cloth.
10. For models with a power paper stacker:
Wipe all power stacker components using a soft cloth lightly moistened
with anhydrous alcohol (no water) to remove dust.
11. Reinstall the ribbon and load paper. Refer to the LineJet Printers Quick
Reference Guide.
252
Interior Cleaning
Ribbon Spool
Splined
Shaft
Platen
(hidden)
Paper Support
Locking
Latch
Ribbon
Mask
Tractor
Base
Casting
Hammer
Bank
(hidden)
Forms Thickness
Lever
Hammer Bank
Cover
Shuttle Cover
Assembly
Ribbon
Guide (2)
Figure 18. Cleaning the Print Mechanism (Cabinet Models)
253
Chapter
15 Routine Service
Ribbon Spool
Printer Cover
Splined
Shaft
Locking
Latch
Ribbon Mask
Ribbon Hub
Forms
Thickness
Lever
Locking Latch
Ribbon
Guide (2)
phpclen
August 15 2000
Figure 19. Cleaning the Print Mechanism (Pedestal Models)
254
Printer Self-Tests
Diagnosing Problems
This section is designed to help you recover from any problems which may
arise with normal printer operation.
Printer Self-Tests
The printer self-tests are used to check the print quality and operation of your
printer. Your Hewlett-Packard Customer Service Engineer will typically run
these tests. For a description of each test, see page 123.
To activate a test, select it and press the ENTER key. To stop the test, press
ENTER again.
Note
Whenever you run a self-test, the top-of-form setting is lost. You must reset
the top-of-form. See your LineJet Printers Quick Reference Guide.
An example procedure for running the self-test “All E’s,” which determines
whether print quality is acceptable, is described in Table 19.
Table 19. Sample Print Test (All E’s)
Step
1.
2.
3.
Key
Result
Notes
Install the ribbon. Load full-width (136-column) computer paper. Set top-of-form.
See your Quick Reference Guide.
ON LINE
+
OFFLINE
CONFIG. CONTROL
The printer must be offline for
testing.
ENTER SWITCH
UNLOCKED
Allows you to make configuration
changes.
OFFLINE
CONFIG. CONTROL
4.
UNTIL
5.
6.
7.
OFFLINE
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
Printer Tests
UNTIL
DIAGNOSTICS
Test Width
Test Width
Full Width*
255
Chapter
15 Diagnosing Problems
Table 19. Sample Print Test (All E’s) (continued)
Step
Key
8.
OR
9.
ENTER
10.
UNTIL
11.
UNTIL
12.
OR
14.
ENTER
15.
ENTER
17.
Notes
Test Width
X
Cycle through the choices.
X = Full Width or 80 columns.
Test Width
X*
The width you have chosen will be
used for the printer test.
DIAGNOSTICS
Test Width
DIAGNOSTICS
Printer Tests
Printer Tests
Shift Recycle*
13.
16.
Result
+
ON LINE
Printer Tests
All E’s
Printer Tests
All E’s*
Printer Tests
All E’s*
ENTER SWITCH
LOCKED
Starts the test.
Stops the test.
Locks the ENTER key.
ONLINE
18.
Examine the print quality. The characters should be fully formed and of uniform
density. If the test does not run or characters appear malformed, contact your HewlettPackard Customer Service Engineer.
19.
If the print quality is good, set the top-of-form.
256
Printing A Hex Dump
Printing A Hex Dump
Figure 20. Hex Dump Sample
A hex code printout (or hex dump) is a translation of all host interface data to
its hexadecimal or symbolic equivalent. A hex dump lists all ASCII character
data received from the host computer with their corresponding two-digit
hexadecimal codes. Hex dumps are used to troubleshoot printer data
reception problems.
Printable characters print as the assigned symbol; nonprintable characters
are indicated by a period (.).
See Appendix C for hex-to-ASCII conversion. Table 20 shows the procedure
for printing a hex dump.
257
Chapter
15 Diagnosing Problems
Table 20. Printing a Hex Dump
Step
1.
2.
3.
Key
Result
Notes
Make sure the printer is on. Raise the printer cover.
ON LINE
+
OFFLINE
CONFIG. CONTROL
The printer must be offline for
testing.
ENTER SWITCH
UNLOCKED
Allows you to make configuration
changes.
OFFLINE
CONFIG. CONTROL
4.
UNTIL
5.
MAINT / MISC
Hex Dump Mode
7.
Hex Dump Mode
Disable*
8.
OR
9.
16.
17.
OFFLINE
MAINT / MISC
ENTER
+
ON LINE
Hex Dump Mode
Enable
Hex Dump Mode
Enable*
ENTER SWITCH
LOCKED
Cycle through the choices.
An asterisk (*) indicates this
choice is active.
Locks the ENTER key.
ONLINE
18.
Go to the host computer and send a file. The printer outputs a hex dump. Refer to the
ASCII chart in Appendix C.
19.
When the hex dump is complete, change the Hex Dump Mode back to Disable by
following the steps outlined above and selecting Disable.
258
Fault Messages
Fault Messages
If a fault condition occurs in the printer, the status indicator on the control
panel flashes on and off, and the message display indicates the specific fault.
Fault messages are summarized in Table 21.
Displayed faults fall into one of two categories:
•
•
Operator correctable
Field service required
For operator correctable faults, follow the suggested corrective action in the
fault message description. After correcting the displayed fault, press the
CLEAR key to clear the error message and status indicator, and resume
printing. If the fault message reappears, contact your Hewlett-Packard
Customer Service Engineer.
Fault Messages Requiring Field Service Attention
For faults that require field service, do two things to try to clear the fault before
calling your Hewlett-Packard Customer Service Engineer:
1. Set the printer power switch to O (off), wait 15 seconds, then turn the
printer on again. Run your print job again. If the message does not
appear, it was a false indication and no further attention is required.
2. If the message reappears, press the CLEAR key. If the message goes
away, it was a false indication and no further attention is required. If the
message reappears, call your Hewlett-Packard Customer Service
Engineer.
Table 21 explains the fault messages and offers solutions where possible.
259
Chapter
15 Diagnosing Problems
Table 21. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table
Displayed Message
Explanation
Action Required
8.5V PWR FAIL*
Internal power failure.
Contact your Hewlett-Packard
Customer Service Engineer.1
15V PWR FAIL*
Controller voltage failure.
Contact your Hewlett-Packard
Customer Service Engineer.1
23.5V PWR FAIL*
Controller voltage failure.
Contact your Hewlett-Packard
Customer Service Engineer.1
48V PWR FAIL*
Internal power failure.
Contact your Hewlett-Packard
Customer Service Engineer.1
A TO D OVERUN*
Fatal firmware error on controller
board.
Contact your Hewlett-Packard
Customer Service Engineer.1
ACCESS NULL PTR*
Fatal firmware error on controller
board.
Contact your Hewlett-Packard
Customer Service Engineer.1
BUFFER OVERRUN
Host sends data after the printer
buffer is full. (Serial interface.)
Check your serial host
interface parameter settings; if
necessary, adjust them so
they match the settings of the
attached host.
CLEAR PAPER JAM
No paper motion.
Clear jam and reload paper.
(See Quick Reference Guide.)
If this message recurs, contact
your Hewlett-Packard
Customer Service Engineer.1
CLEARING PROGRAM
FROM FLASH
The program successfully loaded
into printer RAM and the
checksum matched. The old
program is now being deleted
from flash memory.
None
CLOSE PLATEN
The forms thickness lever is open.
Close the forms thickness
lever.
COIL HOT*
One or more hammer coils are
overheating.
Contact your Hewlett-Packard
Customer Service Engineer.1
CTL VOLT FAIL*
Controller voltage failure.
Contact your Hewlett-Packard
Customer Service Engineer.1
DIAGNOSTIC
PASSED
The printer passed its memory
and hardware initialization tests.
None
DRVR CIR BAD*
Hammer coil count test failed.
Contact your Hewlett-Packard
Customer Service Engineer.1
260
Fault Messages
Table 21. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (continued)
Displayed Message
Explanation
Action Required
ERROR: DC
PROGRAM
NOT VALID
Printer cannot find the data
controller program or the
validation checksum is corrupt.
Download the program again.
If the message occurs again,
call your Hewlett-Packard
Customer Service Engineer.1
ERROR: DRAM AT
ADDRESS XXXXXXXX
The printer found a defective
memory location.
Call your Hewlett-Packard
Customer Service Engineer.1
ERROR: EC PROGRAM
NOT VALID
Printer cannot find the engine
controller program or the
validation checksum is corrupt.
Download the program again.
If the message occurs again,
call your Hewlett-Packard
Customer Service Engineer.1
ERROR: EC STOPPED
AT STATE XXXX
Hardware fault in the engine
controller.
Call your Hewlett-Packard
Customer Service Engineer.1
ERROR: FLASH
DID NOT PROGRAM
The printer encountered an error
trying to program flash memory.
Download the program again.
If the message occurs again,
call your Hewlett-Packard
Customer Service Engineer.1
ERROR: FLASH
NOT DETECTED
The printer could not find any flash
memory.
Call your Hewlett-Packard
Customer Service Engineer.1
ERROR: NO DRAM
DETECTED
The printer could not find any
DRAM.
Call your Hewlett-Packard
Customer Service Engineer.1
ERROR: NVRAM
FAILURE
The security PAL is not present or
the non-volatile memory has
failed.
Call your Hewlett-Packard
Customer Service Engineer.1
ERROR: PROGRAM
NEEDS MORE DRAM
The printer requires more DRAM
memory in order to run the
downloaded program.
Add DRAM. Call your
Hewlett-Packard Customer
Service Engineer.1
ERROR: PROGRAM
NEEDS MORE FLASH
The printer requires more flash
memory in order to run the
downloaded program.
Add flash memory. Call your
Hewlett-Packard Customer
Service Engineer.1
ERROR: PROGRAM
NOT COMPATIBLE
The printer is not compatible with
the downloaded program.
Use the correct emulation
software option(s) for this
model.
ERROR: PROGRAM
NOT VALID
The printer does not see a
program in flash memory.
There is no program in printer
memory. Download program
again.
ERROR: SECURITY
PAL NOT DETECTED
The security PAL is not present or
has failed.
Call your Hewlett-Packard
Customer Service Engineer.1
ERROR: SHORT AT
ADDRESS XXXX
Hardware failure in DRAM or CMX
controller circuitry.
Call your Hewlett-Packard
Customer Service Engineer.1
261
Chapter
15 Diagnosing Problems
Table 21. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (continued)
Displayed Message
Explanation
Action Required
ERROR: WRITING
TO FLASH
Hardware or software fault in flash
memory.
Download the program again.
If the message occurs again,
call your Hewlett-Packard
Customer Service Engineer.1
ERROR: WRONG
CHECKSUM
The printer received the complete
program but the checksum did not
match. The data was corrupted
during download.
Download the program again.
If the message occurs again,
call your Hewlett-Packard
Customer Service Engineer.1
ETHERNET ADAPTER
BEING INITIALIZED
LineJet Print Server interface is
processing the boot procedure.
None
ETHERNET
DETECTED
LineJet Print Server interface has
established communication.
None
EXHAUST FAN FLT
Sensors cannot detect current in
fan circuit.
Power off the printer and
remove the paper path. Check
that the fan cable connector is
connected. Check for
obstruction of vents and fan
airway, and remove any
obstructions. Check for items
beneath the printer blocking
cabinet vents. Power back on
the printer. If this message
recurs, contact your HewlettPackard Customer Service
Engineer.1
FIRMWARE ERROR*
Application software tried to
perform an illegal printer function
or damaged memory detected on
board.
Contact your Hewlett-Packard
Customer Service Engineer.1
FRAMING ERROR
Serial framing error. (Serial
interface.)
Check your serial host
interface parameter settings; if
necessary, adjust them so that
they match the settings of the
attached host.
HAM. COIL OPEN*
Electrical malfunction of one or
more hammer coils.
Contact your Hewlett-Packard
Customer Service Engineer.1
HAMMER COIL BAD
X, X, X,...
Coil # failed current test at powerup.
Record message, clear to
continue printing, and contact
your Hewlett-Packard
Customer Service Engineer.
HB NOT INSTALLD*
Self-test does not detect hammer
coils.
Contact your Hewlett-Packard
Customer Service Engineer.1
262
Fault Messages
Table 21. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (continued)
Displayed Message
Explanation
Action Required
HMR BANK FAN FLT
Sensors cannot detect current in
fan circuit.
Power off printer and remove
paper path. Check that fan
cable is connected. Check for
obstruction of vents and fan
airway; remove any
obstructions. Check for items
beneath the printer blocking
cabinet vents. Power back on
the printer. If this message
recurs, contact your HewlettPackard Customer Service
Engineer.1
ILL EXT BUS ACC*
Fatal firmware error on controller
board.
Contact your Hewlett-Packard
Customer Service Engineer.1
ILL INST ACCSS*
Fatal firmware error on controller
board.
Contact your Hewlett-Packard
Customer Service Engineer.1
ILLGL OPR ACCSS*
Fatal firmware error on controller
board.
Contact your Hewlett-Packard
Customer Service Engineer.1
INTAKE FAN FAULT
Sensors cannot detect current in
fan circuit.
See description for
HMR BANK FAN FLT.
LO DRV. SHORT *
Circuit(s) on the hammer bank or
in the hammer bank power cable
shorted to ground.
Contact your Hewlett-Packard
Customer Service Engineer.1
LOAD PAPER
Printer is out of paper.
Load paper. (See Quick
Reference Guide.)
LOADING PROGRAM
FROM PORT XX%
The new program is loading into
printer RAM. XX indicates how
much of the program has loaded.
None
LOADING PROGRAM
INTO FLASH
The printer has deleted the
previous program from flash
memory and is loading the new
program into flash memory.
None
PAP BAD TABLE*
Fatal firmware error on controller
board.
Contact your Hewlett-Packard
Customer Service Engineer.1
PAP BSY TOO LNG*
Fatal firmware error on controller
board.
Contact your Hewlett-Packard
Customer Service Engineer.1
PAP FIFO OVERFL*
Fatal firmware error on controller
board.
Contact your Hewlett-Packard
Customer Service Engineer.1
PAP FIFO UNDRFL*
Fatal firmware error on controller
board.
Contact your Hewlett-Packard
Customer Service Engineer.1
263
Chapter
15 Diagnosing Problems
Table 21. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (continued)
Displayed Message
Explanation
Action Required
PAP ILLGL ST*
Fatal firmware error on controller
board.
Contact your Hewlett-Packard
Customer Service Engineer.1
PAP INCMPL ENER*
Fatal firmware error on controller
board.
Contact your Hewlett-Packard
Customer Service Engineer.1
PAP INVLD CMD*
Fatal firmware error on controller
board.
Contact your Hewlett-Packard
Customer Service Engineer.1
PAP INVLD PARM*
Fatal firmware error on controller
board.
Contact your Hewlett-Packard
Customer Service Engineer.1
PAP NOT SCHED*
Fatal firmware error on controller
board.
Contact your Hewlett-Packard
Customer Service Engineer.1
PAP NT AT SPEED*
Fatal firmware error on controller
board.
Contact your Hewlett-Packard
Customer Service Engineer.1
PAP UNEXP INT*
Fatal firmware error on controller
board.
Contact your Hewlett-Packard
Customer Service Engineer.1
PARITY ERROR
Parity error
(serial interface)
Check your serial host
interface parameter settings; if
necessary, adjust them so
they match the settings of the
attached host.
PLAT INV CMD*
Fatal firmware error on controller
board.
Contact your Hewlett-Packard
Customer Service Engineer.1
PLAT INV PARM*
Fatal firmware error on controller
board.
Contact your Hewlett-Packard
Customer Service Engineer.1
PLAT INV STATE*
Fatal firmware error on controller
board.
Contact your Hewlett-Packard
Customer Service Engineer.1
POWER SAVER MODE
Status message: printer is in lowenergy idle state; all fans and
higher voltages are off; only
+5Vdc logic circuits are active.
None
POWER SUPPLY HOT*
Circuits are overheating on the
power supply board.
Contact your Hewlett-Packard
Customer Service Engineer.1
PRINTER HOT*
Controller board sensors report
high temperatures on the board.
Contact your Hewlett-Packard
Customer Service Engineer.1
PROTECTED INSTR*
Fatal firmware error on controller
board.
Contact your Hewlett-Packard
Customer Service Engineer.1
PWR SUPP VOLT *
Power supply failed.
Replace power supply board.
264
Fault Messages
Table 21. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (continued)
Displayed Message
Explanation
Action Required
RESETTING . . .
PLEASE WAIT
The printer finished loading the
program into flash memory and is
automatically resetting itself.
None
RESTORING
BOOT CODE
Normal download initialization
message.
None
RIB INVLD CMD*
Fatal firmware error on controller
board.
Contact your Hewlett-Packard
Customer Service Engineer.1
RIB INVLD STATE*
Fatal firmware error on controller
board.
Contact your Hewlett-Packard
Customer Service Engineer.1
RIBBON DRIVE*
CMX controller does not detect
ribbon drive motor.
Contact your Hewlett-Packard
Customer Service Engineer.1
RIBBON INK OUT
CHANGE RIBBON
RibbonMinder software has
determined that the ribbon is out
of ink.
Install a new ribbon and set
ribbon life to 100%.
SECURITY CODE
VIOLATION*
Security code of PAL on controller
board does not match code of
firmware on the controller board.
Contact your Hewlett-Packard
Customer Service Engineer.1
SECURITY PAL NOT
DETECTED
The security PAL is missing or has
failed.
Contact your Hewlett-Packard
Customer Service Engineer.1
SENDING PROGRAM
TO EC PROCESSOR
The printer is loading the engine
controller program into the engine
controller.
None
SHUTL INV CMD*
Fatal firmware error on controller
board.
Contact your Hewlett-Packard
Customer Service Engineer.1
SHUTL INV PARM*
Fatal firmware error on controller
board.
Contact your Hewlett-Packard
Customer Service Engineer.1
SHUTTLE JAM
No shuttle movement or shuttle is
moving at the wrong speed.
Check for obstruction to
shuttle, a twisted ribbon, or
forms thickness lever closed
too tightly. If fault source is not
apparent, contact your
Hewlett-Packard Customer
Service Engineer.
SOFTWARE ERROR *
Cycle power
Application software tried to
perform illegal printer function, or
damaged logic circuits were found
on controller board.
Contact your Hewlett-Packard
Customer Service Engineer.1
STACK OVERFLOW*
Fatal firmware error on controller
board.
Contact your Hewlett-Packard
Customer Service Engineer.1
265
Chapter
15 Diagnosing Problems
Table 21. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (continued)
Displayed Message
Explanation
Action Required
STACK UNDERFLOW*
Fatal firmware error on controller
board.
Contact your Hewlett-Packard
Customer Service Engineer.1
STACKER FAULT
Failed motor circuit.
Contact your Hewlett-Packard
Customer Service Engineer.1
STACKER FULL
Reached full capacity.
Remove paper stack.
STACKER JAM
Jammed paper, or foreign object,
in unit’s travel path.
Remove paper or foreign
object.
TABLE MISMATCH
DOWNLOAD AGAIN
EC software update in progress.
Download the program again.
TCB CORRUPTED*
Fatal firmware error on controller
board.
Contact your Hewlett-Packard
Customer Service Engineer.1
UNDEF INTERRUPT*
Fatal firmware error on controller
board.
Contact your Hewlett-Packard
Customer Service Engineer.1
UNDFNED OPCODE*
Fatal firmware error on controller
board.
Contact your Hewlett-Packard
Customer Service Engineer.1
UP DRV. SHORT *
Hammer driver circuits on the
boards shorted to ground.
Contact your Hewlett-Packard
Customer Service Engineer.1
WAITING FOR
ETHERNET ADAPTER
This status message appears
when the printer is first powered
on if the optional LineJet Print
Server interface is installed.
None
1
Before contacting a Hewlett-Packard Customer Service Engineer, power off the printer, wait 15
seconds, then power it back on and rerun your print job. If the message reappears, press
CLEAR. If the fault message still displays, then contact your Hewlett-Packard Customer Service
Engineer.
266
A
Printer Specifications And
Regulatory Information
Ribbon Specifications
Use only these Hewlett-Packard ribbons in LP Series and LineJet printers:
Kit No.
Note
Ribbon Type
Quantity
Per Kit
Part No.
C3207A
60 yard text ribbon
6
C3207-60001
C3208A
100 yard text ribbon
6
C3208-60001
C3209A
60 yard bar code / OCR ribbon
6
C3209-60001
C3210A
100 yard bar code / OCR ribbon
6
C3210-60001
C3212A
60 yard security ribbon
6
C3212-60001
Before June 2000 all printers were shipped with one box of six C3209A,
60-yard OCR (optical character recognition) ribbons. For maximum ribbon
life when barcodes or OCR are not being printed, order the 60-yard text
ribbon (product C3207A) as replacement for pedestal model printers and
the 100-yard text ribbon (product C3208A) as replacement for the cabinet
models.
Starting at the end of June 2000, LineJet printers shipped with text ribbons.
The pedestal model ships with 60-yard text ribbons and the cabinet models
ship with 100-yard text ribbons.
Note
Only cabinet model printers can use 100 yard ribbons.
For more information please contact any of our worldwide sales offices of HP
Channel Partners, or check out http://www.hp.com/go/linejet. For the location
of the nearest office in the United States call: 1-800-637-7740.
267
Appendix A
Ribbon Specifications
Ribbon Life
Product
Number
268
Description
Use On
Product
Lifetime
C3207A
Box of six 60 yard
black text ribbons
Any LineJet Printer
Any HP LP Series Printer
30 Million
Characters
C3208A
Box of six 100 yard
black text ribbons
LineJet 500Q
LineJet 1000Q
LineJet 1500Q
LPQ475
LPQ500
LPQ800
LPQ1000
LPQ1200
LPQ1400
LPQ1500
50 Million
Characters
C3209A
Box of six 60 yard
OCR/Bar Code
ribbons
Any LineJet Printer
Any HP LP Series Printer
27 Million
Characters
or
2,800
Shipping
Labels
C3210A
Box of six 100 yard
OCR/Bar Code
ribbons
LineJet 500Q
LineJet 1000Q
LineJet 1500Q
LPQ475
LPQ500
LPQ800
LPQ1000
LPQ1200
LPQ1400
LPQ1500
45 Million
Characters
or
4,667
Shipping
Labels
C3212A
Box of six 60 yard
non-inked security
ribbons
Any LineJet Printer
Any HP LP Series Printer
30 Million
Characters
Printer Dimensions
Cabinet Model:
Height:
42.5 inches (108 cm)
Width:
27 inches (68.6 cm)
Depth:
29 inches (73.7 cm)
Weight:
225 lbs. (102.1 kg) unpackaged
285 lbs. (129.3 kg) packaged
Cabinet Model with Power Stacker Option
Height:
42.5 inches (108 cm)
Width
27 inches (68.6 cm)
Depth:
32.5 inches (82.5 cm)
Weight:
246 lbs. (112 kg) unpackaged
306 lbs. (139 kg) packaged
Pedestal Model:
Height:
35 inches (88.9 cm)
Width:
24.6 inches (62.5 cm)
Depth:
20.7 inches (52.6 cm)
Weight:
105 lbs. (47.6 kg) unpackaged
115 lbs. (52.2 kg) packaged
Environmental Characteristics
Temperature
Operating:
41° to 104° F (5° to 40° C) up to 5000 feet (1524 meters)
41° to 90° F (5° to 32° C) up to 8000 feet (2438 meters)
Storage:
- 40° to 158° F (- 40° to 70° C)
Relative Humidity
Operating: 15% to 80% (non-condensing)
Storage: 10% to 90% (non-condensing)
269
Appendix A
Electrical Characteristics
ENERGY STAR®
LineJet printers comply with the requirements of the ENERGY STAR® Office
Equipment Program of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. When in
the reduced power state, the printer displays “Power Saver Mode,” and is
activated at the control panel.
Electrical Characteristics
Current
LineJet
500P
LineJet
500Q
LineJet
1000Q
LineJet
1500Q
Printing, Typical1
2.15A
2.43A
3.28A
4.37A
Printing, Maximum2
3.60A
3.05A
4.39A
6.06A
Non-Printing3
0.90A
1.17A
1.19A
1.16A
Power
Printing, Typical1
190W
191W
271W
364W
Printing, Maximum2
320W
244W
380W
514W
Non-Printing3
90W
84W
86W
84W
Heat
Printing, Typical1
648 BTU/hr
652 BTU/hr
925 BTU/hr
1342 BTU/hr
Printing, Maximum2
1092 BTU/hr
833 BTU/hr
1297 BTU/hr
1754 BTU/hr
Non-Printing3
307 BTU/hr
287 BTU/hr
294 BTU/hr
287 BTU/hr
1
Printing, Typical = 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz, Shift Recycle (ASCII Swirl), High
Speed Mode
270
2
Printing, Maximum = 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz, All Black, High Speed Mode
3
Non-Printing = 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz, Standby Mode
Material Safety Data Sheets
If the customer site needs a Material Safety Data Sheet, provide the following
information:
•
•
•
•
•
•
HP part or product number
Chemical substance description
Customer name
Customer address
Customer telephone number
Customer FAX number
271
Appendix A
Communication Notices
Communication Notices
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Statement: This equipment
has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provided reasonable protection against harmful interference when the
equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment
generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed
and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a
residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case the user
will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used in order
to meet FCC emission limits. Printronix is not responsible for any radio or
television interference caused by using other than recommended cables and
connectors or by any unauthorized changes or modifications to this
equipment. Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Canadian Department of Communications Compliance Statement: This
Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Avis de conformite aux normes du ministere des Communcations du
Canada: Cet appareil numerique de la classe A est conform á norme NMB003 du Canada.
European Community (EC) Conformity Statement:
This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council
Directive 89/336/EEC on the approximation of the laws of the Member States
relating to electromagnetic compatibility. Printronix cannot accept
responsibility for any failure to satisfy the protection requirements resulting
from a non-recommended modification of the product, including the fitting of
non-Printronix option cards.
German Conformity Statement:
Zulassungsbescheinigung Gesetz über die elektromagnetische
Verträglichkeit von Geraten (EMVG) vom 30. August 1995
Dieses Gerät ist berechtigt in Übereinstimmung mit dem deutschen das EGKonformitätszelchen - CE - zu führen.
Der Außteller der Konformitätserklärung ist die Printronix......(1)
Informationen in Hinsicht EMVG Paragraph 3 Abs. (2) 2:
Das Gerät erfüllt die Schutzanforderungen nach EN 50082-1 und
EN 55022 Klasse A.
272
EN 55022 Klasse A Geräte bedürfen folgender Hinweise:
Nach dem EMVG: “Geräte dürfen an Orten, für die sie nicht asreichend
entstört sind, nur mit besonderer Genehmigung des Bundesminesters für
Post und Telekommunikation oder des Bundesamtes für Post und
Telekommunikation betrieben werden. Die Genehmigung wird erteilt, wenn
keine elektromagnetischen Störungen zu erwarten sind.” (Auszug aus dem
EMVG, Paragraph 3, Abs. 4) Dieses Genehmigungsverfahren ist nach
Paragraph 9 EMVG in Verbindung mit der entsprechenden Kostenverordnung
(Amtsblatt 14/93) kostenpflichtig.
Nach der EN 55022: “Dies ist eine Einrichtung der Klasse A. Diese
Einrichtung kann im Wohnbereich Funkstörungen verursachen; in diesem Fall
kann vom Betreiber verlangt werden, angemessene Maßnahmen
durchzuführen und dafür aufzkommen.”
Anmerkung: Um die Einhaltung des EMVG sicherzustellen sind die Geräte,
wie in den Handbüchern angegeben, zu installieren und zu betreiben.
This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for Class A
Information Technology Equipment according to European Standard EN
55022. The limits for Class A equipment were derived for commercial and
industrial environments to provide reasonable protection against interference
with licensed communication equipment.
Warning
This is a Class A product. In a domestic
environment this product may cause radio
interference in which case the user may be
required to take adequate measures.
273
Appendix A
274
Communication Notices
B
Paper Specifications And
Forms Design
Introduction
LP Series and LineJet printers use dot matrix line printing technology, which
permits a high degree of printing flexibility. Dot matrix technology enables the
user to print graphic images, line drawn characters, special characters, and
multiple alphabets.
The first section of this appendix lists general specifications for continuous
form paper. (Specific brands or types of paper are not recommended.)
Adherence to these specifications will ensure the best print quality and
reliable operation.
The second section goes into more detail, providing definitions, guidelines,
and a checklist to use for designing forms that will run smoothly through the
print station of the LP Series or LineJet printer.
275
Appendix B
General Paper Specifications
General Paper Specifications
This section describes the minimum paper specifications that must be met to
ensure the best printer performance.
Always test paper and forms before buying large quantities. Make all
measurements at 20° to 26° Celsius (68° to 78° Fahrenheit) and 45% to 55%
relative humidity. LP Series and LineJet printers perform well with forms that
meet the specifications listed in Table 22 and Table 23 below.
Note
Hewlett-Packard conforms to ANSI® Standard X3.96-1983, “American
National Forms Information Systems for Continuous Business Forms,” and
ISO Recommendation No. 2784, which cover common form widths and
depths, standards for sprocket feed holes and margins, and other basic
tolerances.
Table 22. Paper Sizes
Maximum form width
17.0 inches (43.18 cm) edge to edge
Minimum form width
3.0 inches (7.62 cm) edge to edge
Maximum Printing Width
13.6 inches (34.54 cm)
Maximum Right Margin
1 to 13.6 inches (2.54 to 34.54 cm)
Maximum Left Margin
0 to 13.5 inches (0 to 34.29 cm)
Maximum Form Length
16 inches (40.64 cm)
Minimum Form Length
2 inches (5.08 cm)
Table 23. Paper Weights
Single-Part Forms
Standard
15 to 100 pound (57 to 380 gm/meter 2)
Best Print Quality
18 to 60 pound (68 to 227 gm/meter 2)
Multipart Forms
276
Carbon Paper
12 pounds (46 gm/meter2) up to 6 total pages
Carbons
8 pounds (30 gm/meter2) up to 6 total pages
Pack Thickness
Maximum 0.025 inch (0.635 mm) total
Carbonless
Up to 4-part forms
Terms And Definitions
Test the paper first if you plan to use it in environments with humidity of less
than 20% or greater than 80%. Also test paper that you plan to use at high
humidity to ensure satisfactory feeding and handling, and test paper to be
used at low humidity to determine if static buildup must be eliminated for
proper paper stacking.
Paper Guidelines
The terms below describe continuous form paper.
Terms And Definitions
Chaff
Residual bits of paper not completely removed after the
punch process that creates tractor pin holes, major and
minor perforations, etc.
Cut Point
The area along a perforation where a cut has been made
that extends through the entire form.
Cut-to-Tie Ratio
The ratio of cut points to tie points occurring along a
perforation.
Evenness
The amount of variation between the thickest and thinnest
points measured across the print area (i.e., between the
side perforations).
Form Thickness Thickness measured at the thickest point of the entire form.
This includes glue lines, compressed staples, perforations,
etc., and is not limited to the printed region of the form.
Margin
The region outside the print area of the form. The margin is
typically bounded by the outermost vertical perforations
(i.e., where the tractor holes are located) and the edge of
the form.
Print Area
The region where printing occurs, and which is always
between the side perforations.
Print Station
The area in the printer where the actual impacts of printing
occur.
Staple
A punch-cut fastening stitch located along the vertical edge
and within the side perforation region of a multipart form.
(Note that this is not a metal staple.)
Tenting
The measured thickness between the print area of the form
and the peak thickness of a major perforation. Tenting is
typically caused by overly stiff perforations or incorrect
registration of the inner parts of multipart forms.
Tie Point
The area along a perforation between the cut points (see
above).
277
Appendix B
Paper Guidelines
The figures below illustrate the terms used in this appendix.
Side Perforation
Margin Area
Major Perforation
Tractor Pin Hole
Print Area
Form Span
Figure 21. Basic Forms Terminology
Side View of Form
Printed Side of Form
Outward Perforation
Inward Perforation
Figure 22. Inward and Outward Perforations
Perforation
Cut Point
Tie Point
Figure 23. Cut Points and Tie Points
278
Environmental Considerations
Environmental Considerations
Before they are used, forms should be stored for at least 24 hours—
preferably 48 hours—in the environment in which they will be used. This
stabilizes the moisture content of the paper, resulting in better feeding and
stacking. Forms should never be stored in environments that result in damage
such as delamination of glues, creasing, folding, etc.
Form Types
Three kinds of continuous form paper are specified for use with the printer:
•
•
•
Edge-perforated, fanfolded, single-part forms
2- to 6-part multipart carbon forms
2- to 4-part multipart carbonless forms
For all forms, the width range is from 3 to 17 inches, and the length range is
from 2 to 12 inches.
Form Weight
Use 15 to 100 pound (6.80 to 45.36 kg) stock. Light weight and recycled
forms must be strong enough to assure that tractor holes and perforations do
not tear or detach during form feed, skipping, and ejecting operations.
Form Thickness
Forms must be no thicker than 0.025 inches (0.0635 cm). This figure is for the
thickest point of the form—including glue lines, staples, perforations, etc.—
and is not restricted to just the print area.
Form Evenness
The evenness of forms must not exceed 0.003 inches (0.00762 cm) across
the print area (between the side perforations).
Tenting caused by buildup of perforation thickness must be minimized. A
perforation thickness measured at the major perforation that exceeds 1.25
times the forms thickness measured in the print area will result in an
unpredictable and unreliable form. The perforation thickness must never
exceed the maximum forms thickness of 0.025 inches (0.0635 cm).
Tractor Pin Engagement
The printer uses tractors with 6-pin engagement. Detailed engagement
specifications are given in ISO-2784, but are summarized in the table below.
279
Appendix B
Paper Guidelines
Specification
Inches
Millimeters
Hole centerline (CL) to edge of form
0.236 ± 0.028
6.0 ± 0.10
Hole Diameter (Serrations or any
occlusion due to incorrect registration
of multipart forms cannot exceed this
dimension.)
0.156 ± 0.004
4.0 ± 0.10
Distance between centers of two
consecutive holes
0.500 ± 0.002
12.7 ± 0.05
Maximum deviation of holes from their
centerline
0.004
0.10
Maximum deviation of lefthand hole to
adjacent righthand hole (CL to CL)
0.006
0.15
Maximum parallel deviation of lefthand
hole CL to righthand hole CL
0.006
0.15
Methods Of Forms Attachment
Any method of attachment (staples, crimps, gluing, etc.) must be designed in
a way that does not permit air to be trapped between copies of a form. Hard or
wire brads and staples must not be used.
Any attachment must not coincide with the major perforation or any horizontal
perforation.
Gluing
Gluing must be controlled and uniform, since it is a major contributor to the
maximum form thickness. A form that meets the maximum forms thickness
requirement in the print area but which exceeds the maximum thickness at a
glue line is considered an unreliable and unpredictable form.
Staples
Staples must be used only in the margin area of the form and must not be in
line with the path of the tractor holes. Ideally, staples are placed in the
margins so that they coincide with areas of the form where printing does not
occur.
The figure below shows acceptable and unacceptable ways of fabricating
staples.
280
Chaff Content
Preferred
Unacceptable
Cut Point
Tie Point
Direction of
Forms
Movement
Cut Point
Tie Point
Cut-To-Tie Ratio
A common cut-to-tie ratio for bond forms is 4:1 (that is, 80% cut to 20% ties).
This value is dictated chiefly by the application program under which the form
runs. Lower cut-to-tie ratios will yield better form handling, but stacking may
suffer due to increased stiffness of the perforations. Some level of
experimentation is required to determine the best cut-to-tie ratio. But
remember that a cut-to-tie ratio that causes a thickness buildup of greater
than 0.025 inch (0.635 mm) or that creates an evenness variation of greater
than 0.003 inch (0.0762 mm) will result in an unreliable and unpredictable
form.
Perforation Intersections
Whenever a horizontal perforation intersects with a vertical perforation, the
point of intersection must be a tie point. Cut points at such intersections make
the form unacceptable.
Chaff Content
Tractors holes should be clear of chaff. As much as possible, there should not
be loose chaff in the box in which the paper is packed.
281
Appendix B
Form Design Checklist
Form Design Checklist
Use this checklist to help you remember key areas of consideration when
designing and ordering forms and paper stocks.
Environment
________ Before they are used, forms are given at least 24 hours of
condensing time in the environment in which they will be used.
________ Forms are not stored in environments that result in damage such
as delamination of glue lines, creasing, folding, etc.
Type Of Form
Form Type (Check One)
1 Part
2 Part
3 Part
4 Part
5 Part
6 Part
<--------- Carbonless Range --------->
<---------------------------- Carbon Range ------------------------------>
Recycled Paper? Yes _______ No _______ If yes, assure adequate form
strength to prevent tractor holes and perforations from tearing or detaching
during form feeds and page ejects.
Security Form? Yes _______ No _______ If yes, the last page of the form
should have a minimum 50% reflectance, and, if possible, the stippled page
faces inward to the form.
Form Weight
Form weight = ________
(Minimum = 15 lb. / 6.8 kg ; Maximum = 100 lb / 45.36 kg)
Form Thickness
Form thickness = ________
(0.025 inches / 0.0635 cm maximum measured at the thickest point of the
form, which includes perforations, compressed staples, glue lines, etc.)
Form Evenness
The evenness of the form = ________
(Not to exceed 0.003 in. / 0.00762 cm)
Tenting due to buildup of perforation thickness must be minimized. A
perforation thickness measured at the major perforation that exceeds 1.25
times the forms thickness measured in the print area will result in an
unreliable and unpredictable form. Perforation thickness must not exceed the
maximum form thickness of 0.025 in. / 0.0635 cm.
282
Chaff Content
Tractor Pin Holes
The holes which engage the tractor pins must conform to the following
specifications:
Specification
Inches
Millimeters
Hole centerline (CL) to edge of form
0.236 ± 0.028
6.0 ± 0.1
Hole Diameter (Serrations or any
occlusion due to incorrect registration
of multipart forms cannot exceed this
dimension.)
0.156 ± 0.004
4.0 ± 0.1
Distance between centers of two
consecutive holes
0.500 ± 0.002
12.7 ± 0.05
Maximum deviation of holes from their
centerline
0.004
0.1
Maximum deviation of lefthand hole to
adjacent righthand hole (CL to CL)
0.006
0.15
Maximum parallel deviation of lefthand
hole CL to righthand hole CL
0.006
0.15
Methods Of Forms Attachment
________ Must not allow air entrapment between copies of the form
________ Must not use hard brads or staples
________ Must not coincide with major perforation or any horizontal
perforation
________ Gluing lines must not result in a form that exceeds 0.025 in. /
0.0635 cm thickness
________ Staples must be used only in margin area of form
________ Staple cuts must not be in the direction of form movement
through the tractors
________ Staples must not occur in-line with the path of the tractor holes
________ Staples should be placed in the margins so that they coincide
with areas of the form where printing will not occur
Cut-To-Tie Ratio
____:____ (Typical ratio is 4:1, or 80% cut to 20% tie)
Thickness Buildup = ________ in. / cm
283
Appendix B
Note
Form Design Checklist
A cut-to-tie ratio that causes a thickness buildup greater than
0.025 in. / 0.0635 cm, or that creates an evenness variation greater than
0.003 in. / 0.00762 cm, will result in an unreliable and unpredictable form.
Perforation Intersections
________ Horizontal-vertical perforations are tie points. Cut points at such
intersections are unacceptable.
Chaff Content
________ Tractor holes are clear of chaff.
________ There is no loose chaff in the box the paper is packed in.
284
Storage And Handling
Summary
Because it is impossible to test all possible forms available for use in the
printer, Hewlett-Packard recommends that paper conform to the
specifications outlined in this appendix for the best printer performance.
But the guidelines in this appendix are not a substitute for actual testing.
Always test forms—including special single-part paper, multipart forms, forms
with glue strips, carbonless forms, card stock, and labels—for satisfactory
feeding, registration, and print quality prior to purchase. For best results in
selecting standard or specialty forms, consult a forms vendor who can ensure
conformance to the guidelines in this appendix and who can recommend costeffective purchases.
Storage And Handling
The performance of the printer depends to a large degree on the condition of
the paper used; therefore, the following principles for packaging, handling,
and storage are recommended.
Packaging
To avoid damage during handling, use top and bottom fillers in continuous
form cartons to hold the paper stack firmly in place. Proper packaging
ensures that the paper remains flat and is not damaged along the edges.
Storage
Do not store cartons directly on the floor, and do not stack them more than six
high. Set each carton upright and squarely on the one underneath. Do not
place anything else on the stack of paper, because this can damage the
paper.
Preconditioning Forms
Protect paper from temperature and humidity extremes. Store paper in the
same environment as the printer for 24 to 48 hours before using the paper.
This allows the moisture content of the paper to stabilize.
LP Series and LineJet printers are used at temperatures from 5° to 40° C
(41° to 104° F) up to 1524 meters (5000 feet), from 5° to 32° C (41° to 90° F)
up to 2438 meters (8000 feet), with a non-condensing relative humidity of
10% to 90%. For best results, however, store the printer paper at 18 ° to 24° C
(65° to 75° F), with a relative humidity of 40% to 50%.
If the printer is in an environment subject to extremes of temperature or
humidity, store the printer paper in a better environment and move it to the
printer as needed.
285
Appendix B
286
Summary
C
Standard ASCII Character
Set
B7
B6
BITS
KEY
0
B5
0
1
B4 B3 B2 B1
1 0
1
ESC
1
OCTAL
DECIMAL
HEX
33
27
1B
ASCII CHARACTER
B7
B6
0
B5
BITS
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
COLUMN
0
B4 B3 B2 B1 ROW
1
0 0 0 0
0
NUL
0
0
0
0 0 0 1
1
SOH
1
1
1
0 0 1 0
2
STX
2
2
2
0 0 1 1
3
ETX
3
3
3
0 1 0 0
4
EOT
0 1 0 1
5
0 1 1 0
DLE
DC1
(XON)
2
20
16
10
21
17
11
SP
!
3
40
32
20
41
33
21
4
0
60
48
30
1
61
49
31
5
6
@
100
64
40
P
120
80
50
A
101
65
41
Q
121
81
51
a
7
140
96
60
p
160
112
70
141
97
61
q
161
113
71
22
18
12
42
34
22
2
62
50
32
B
102
66
42
R
122
82
52
b
142
98
62
r
162
114
72
(XOFF)
23
19
13
#
43
35
23
3
63
51
33
C
103
67
43
S
123
83
53
c
143
99
63
s
163
115
73
4
4
4
DC4
24
20
14
$
44
36
24
4
64
52
34
D
104
68
44
T
124
84
54
d
144
100
64
t
164
116
74
ENQ
5
5
5
NAK
25
21
15
%
45
37
25
5
65
53
35
E
105
69
45
U
125
85
55
e
145
101
65
u
165
117
75
6
ACK
6
6
6
SYN
26
22
16
&
46
38
26
6
66
54
36
F
106
70
46
V
126
86
56
f
146
102
66
v
166
118
76
0 1 1 1
7
BEL
7
7
7
ETB
27
23
17
47
39
27
7
67
55
37
G
107
71
47
W
127
87
57
g
147
103
67
w
167
119
77
1 0 0 0
8
BS
10
8
8
CAN
30
24
18
(
50
40
28
8
70
56
38
H
110
72
48
X
130
88
58
h
150
104
68
x
170
120
78
1 0 0 1
9
HT
11
9
9
EM
31
25
19
)
51
41
29
9
71
57
39
I
111
73
49
Y
131
89
59
i
151
105
69
y
171
121
79
1 0 1 0
10
LF
12
10
0A
SUB
32
26
1A
*
52
42
2A
:
72
58
3A
J
112
74
4A
Z
132
90
5A
j
152
106
6A
z
172
122
7A
1 0 1 1
11
VT
1 1 0 0
12
FF
1 1 0 1
13
CR
1 1 1 0
14
SO
16
14
0E
RS
36
30
1E
.
56
46
2E
>
76
62
3E
N
116
78
4E
^
136
94
5E
n
156
110
6E
1 1 1 1
15
SI
17
15
0F
US
37
31
1F
/
57
47
2F
?
77
63
3F
O
117
79
4F
_
137
95
5F
o
157
111
6F
13
11
0B
14
12
0C
15
13
0D
DC2
DC3
ESC
FS
GS
33
27
1B
34
28
1C
35
29
1D
’
+
,
-
53
43
2B
54
44
2C
55
45
2D
;
<
=
73
59
3B
74
60
3C
75
61
3D
K
L
M
113
75
4B
114
76
4C
115
77
4D
[
\
]
133
91
5B
134
92
5C
135
93
5D
k
l
m
153
107
6B
154
108
6C
155
109
6D
287
{
|
}
~
DEL
173
123
7B
174
124
7C
175
125
7D
176
126
7E
177
127
7F
Appendix C
288
D
Monitoring Printers
Implementing Printer Management
Printer management includes the following tasks:
•
•
•
Monitoring the status of network printers
Responding to alarms
Gathering statistics on printer operations
The three elements of network printer monitoring and management are:
•
•
•
Agent/manager model
MIB, the management information database
SNMP, the protocol used to get management information
Agent/Manager Model
The elements of a monitoring system, MIB and SNMP, are implemented in an
agent/manager model:
•
The manager is a console, workstation, or server on working hubs or
routers which has a global knowledge of LineJet Print Servers and
printers. OpenView is a management console.
•
Agents are utilities that reside on devices, such as a LineJet Print Server,
that respond through SNMP to management requests for information.
The information is stored in a MIB (Management Information Base).
MIB
A MIB is a Management Information Base that contains information a device
makes available to SNMP. The MIB describes information about actual
objects to be managed, controlled, and viewed. There are many different
MIBs defined.
Standards of Network Printer MIBs
The Printer MIB contained in the LineJet Print Server is based on the
following standards:
•
•
•
System and Interfaces Group MIB (RFC 1213 of March 1991)
Host Resource MIB (RFC 1514 of September 1993)
Printer MIB (RFC 1759 of March 1995)
289
Appendix D
Implementing Printer Management
Components of the Printer MIB
The printer MIB gives the network manager access to most of the information
that is normally accessible through the NIC command set for configuring the
server with SNMP. Some objects identified by this MIB are not applicable to
the NIC.
The complete definition of the Printer MIB is provided in the Printer MIBs in
DOS Format and Printer MIBs in TAR Format, which are shipped with the
NIC. The MIB is provided in a subset of the ASN.1 syntax. The Printer MIB is
composed of the following sections:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
General
Cover
Localization
Input
Output
Marker
Media Path
Channel
Interpreter
Console
Alert
Information Provided by the MIB
The Printer MIB contains the following types of information about network
printers:
Descriptions. Printer configuration, location, and contact.
Status. Current operating status of printers.
Alerts. Reportable events from printers.
SNMP
SNMP is the network protocol used to communicate between manager and
agent. Managers request information, usually through automated polling at
specified intervals, and agents respond. Though used primarily on TCP/IP
networks, SNMP can be implemented on other protocols, for example, IPX.
SNMP is a standard by which a network manager can get statistics and
configuration information from the NICs and other devices on the network.
This is done through a Network Management Station (NMS), such as
OpenView and NetView.
290
Monitoring With AIX NetView/6000
Monitoring Tools
Many tools can be used to monitor printers with SNMP agents. One of these
tools is NetView. There are also other MIB browsers, which are not described
here.
Monitoring With AIX NetView/6000
The AIX NetView/6000 program can manage any IP-addressable device with
an SNMP agent.
NetView/6000 can be used to set a network topology, monitor a network,
diagnose problems, and measure network performance.
Through its MIB Browser, information about the resources affecting an event
(such as an alarm) can be obtained.
Monitoring With Web JetAdmin
Web JetAdmin (version 6.x) can monitor IP addressable devices containing
the printer MIB.
OS/2 TCP/IP
To get SNMP.EXE to work correctly to browse MIB items, you may need to
delete the following file:
d:\mptn\etc\mib2.tbl
Setting The SNMP Community Name
The default SNMP read-only community name is “public” and cannot be
changed.
Change the SNMP R/W community name with the command:
set user passwd snmp com_name
save
where com_name is the new SNMP R/W community name.
The default is no R/W community name.
Note
Changing SNMP community names or access rights may hinder or disable
applications that are monitoring your printers.
291
Appendix D
Monitoring Tools
Reference
For further information on SNMP and MIB, refer to the following:
•
RFC 1155 — Structure and Identification of Management Information for
TCP/IP-based Internets (SMI)
•
RFC 1156 — Management Information Base for Management of TCP/IP
Internets (MIB)
•
•
RFC 1157 — A Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)
The Simple Book: An Introduction to Management of TCP/IP-based
Internets
Getting the Latest MIB Information
To obtain the latest copy of these and other RFCs, FTP the files from one of
the following two sources:
Internet:
ftp.isi.edu
World Wide Web:
http://www.ietf.org/rfc.html
292
Index
Symbols
? Command, 219
B
Barcode
Numerics
creating, 25
errors, 107
15V PWR FAIL * message, 260
Baud Rate parameter, 115
20 CPI Condensed, 88, 91
Bidirectional printing, 121
23.5V PWR FAIL * message, 260
Bi-Tronics interface, 244
48V PWR FAIL * message, 260
configuration menu, 111
8.5V PWR FAIL * message, 260
operating modes, 244
A
A TO D OVERUN * message, 260
Absorb after ^PY, 105
Access Lists
TCP, 237
Access Methods, 219
ACCESS NULL PTR * message, 260
Acknowledge signal, 243
Active Emulation menu, 73
All black test, 124
All E’s test, 124
All H’s test, 124
All underlines test, 124
Alt. Set 80-9F, 86
pinout signals, 246
signals, 245
Bold Characters, 93
BTU, 270
BUFFER OVERRUN message, 260
Buffer size
Centronics port, 111
Buffer Size in K parameter, 117
Centronics, 113
serial interface menu, 116
Busy on Strobe parameter
Centronics, 113
Busy signal, 243
Byte mode, 244
C
Alternate Char Set, 88
Alternate Set 80-9F, 91, 93
Centronics
Append Rotated, 104
configuration, 243
Architecture, printer, 21
interface, 242
ASCII Character Set, 287
Auto LF, 85, 88, 90, 92, 95
interface signals, 242
Centronics menu
Auto Switching, 118
Buffer Size in K, 113
Auto Uppercase, 99
Busy on Strobe, 113
Autoport Switching, 241
Data Bit 8, 112
Autowrap, 98
Data Polarity, 113
293
Latch Data On, 113
deleting, 58
Prime Signal, 113
description, 61
Response Polarity, 113
factory default values, 44
Centronics parallel interface
loading configuration values, 54
configuration menu, 112
menu, top level, 41, 68, 70
configuring, 112
menus, 70
Changing
parameters, locking, 42
LineJet Print Server name, 185
power-up selection, 56
parameters, 48
printout, 52
Character attributes, 24
protecting, 60
Character Set, 86, 88, 90, 93
RS-232 serial interface, 250
ASCII, 287
RS-422 serial interface, 250
CLEAR PAPER JAM message, 260
saving, 50
Clear to send (CTS) signal
saving parameters, 43
RS-232 serial interface, 249
types of, 42
Clearing error log, 124
Configuration Control menu, 71
CLEARING PROGRAM FROM FLASH, 260, 263
Configuration menus
CLOSE PLATEN message, 260
Centronics Parallel, 112
Code V, 25
Configuration Printout, 79
COIL HOT, 260
Configuring printer, 39
Command
Connection
?, 219
to network, 61
complete list, 220
Control Code 06, 85, 92, 95
getting help, 219
Control Code 08, 85
Command Prefixes, 220
Command Shell, 219
ways to access, 64
Commands
debug, 231
Control codes
control panel changes, 43
overview description, 25
Control panel, 39
Control Panel Configuration
list, 230
gateway address, 62
miscellaneous, 232
IP Address, 62
set, 223
subnet mask, 62
store, 220
Communicating
Controls and indicators
printing conventions, 19
Unix, 171
Convert to U/C, 106
Windows, 151
CPI/LPI Select, 81
Communication, bidirectional, 244
CR Edit, 98
Compatibility mode, 244
CTL VOLT FAIL * message, 260
D
Compressed CPI, 100
Compressed Print, 96
Configuration
Centronics parallel interface, 243
changing parameters, 48
294
Data Bit 8, 107
Data Bit 8 parameter
Centronics, 112
Data Bits parameter, 115
Emulations, optional, 74
Data carrier detect (DCD) signal
Energy star office equipment program, 122
RS-232 serial interface, 249
ENTER key
Data lines 1 through 8 signal, 242
locking, 42
Data Polarity parameter
unlocking, 42
Environment Description
Centronics, 113
Windows, 149
Data protocol, 114, 115
Data set ready (DSR) signal
RS-232 serial interface, 249
Environmental characteristics, 269
Epson FX-1050 Emulation, 89
Data strobe signal, 243
ERROR DC PROGRAM NOT VALID, 261
Data Terminal Ready (DTR)
ERROR DRAM AT ADDRESS XXXXXXXX, 261
signal, RS-232 serial interface, 249
ERROR EC PROGRAM NOT VALID, 261
Data Terminal Ready parameter, 116
ERROR EC STOPPED AT STATE XXXX, 261
Dataproducts
ERROR FLASH NOT DETECTED, 261
Error handling, 106
PI ignored, 112
Debug Commands, 231
RS-232 serial interface, 250
Default configuration parameters, 44
RS-422 serial interface, 250
Define CR Code, 85, 87, 90, 92, 95
Error log
Define LF Code, 85, 88, 90, 93, 95
clearing, 124
Define LF Code (Line Feed), 98
printing, 124
Delete Configuration parameter, 72
Error markers, 106
Deleting configurations, 58
Error messages, 259
Diagnostic
ERROR NO DRAM DETECTED, 261
capabilities, 24
ERROR NVRAM FAILURE, 261
menu, 123
ERROR PROGRAM NEEDS MORE DRAM, 261
tests, 255
ERROR PROGRAM NEEDS MORE FLASH, 261
tools, 24
ERROR PROGRAM NOT COMPATIBLE, 261
Diagnostics, 29
ERROR PROGRAM NOT VALID, 261
DIAGNOSTICS PASSED, 260
Error Reporting, IGP/PGL, 101
Direction, printing, 121
ERROR SECURITY PAL NOT DETECTED, 261
Display Language parameter, 109
ERROR SHORT AT ADDRESS XXXX, 261
Displaying Functions, 78
ERROR WRITING TO FLASH, 261, 262
Documents related to this manual, 20
ERROR WRONG CHECKSUM, 262
Dot matrix character formation, 26
ESC d Command, 93
DRVR CIR BAD * message, 260
ETHERNET ADAPTER BEING INITIALIZED
E
message, 262
ETHERNET DETECTED message, 262
E’s plus TOF test, 124
ETHERNET PARAMETERS Menu, 120
Electrical characteristics, 270
Ethernet Submenu, 117
Elong./Alt. Font, 96
EXHAUST FAN FLT message, 262
Emulation menu, 74
Extended Execute Copy, 100
Emulations, 23, 25
295
F
PLAT INV CMD *, 264
PLAT INV PARM *, 264
Factory default parameters, 44
PLAT INV STATE *, 264
Fault Action, 127
POWER SAVER MODE, 264
Fault messages, 259
POWERSUPPLY HOT *, 264
15V PWR FAIL *, 260
PRINTER HOT *, 264
23.5V PWR FAIL *, 260
PROTECTED INSTR *, 264
48V PWR FAIL *, 260
PWRSUPP VOLT *, 264
8.5V PWR FAIL *, 260
RIB INVLD CMD *, 265
A TO D OVERUN *, 260
RIB INVLD STAT *, 265
ACCESS NULL PTR *, 260
RIBBON DRIVE, 265
BUFFER OVERRUN, 260
RIBBON INK OUT CHANGE RIBBON, 265
CLEAR PAPER JAM, 260
SECURITY CODE VIOLATION, 265
CLOSE PLATEN, 260
SHUTL INV CMD *, 265
COIL HOT, 260
SHUTL INV PARM *, 265
CTL VOLT FAIL *, 260
SHUTTLE JAM, 265
DRVR CIR BAD *, 260
SOFTWARE ERROR *, 265
ETHERNET ADAPTER BEING INITIALIZED,
STACK OVERFLOW *, 265
262
STACK UNDERFLOW *, 266
ETHERNET DETECTED, 262
TCB CORRUPTED *, 266
EXHAUST FAN FLT, 262
UNDEF INTERRUPT *, 266
FIRMWARE ERROR, 262
UNDFNED OPCODE *, 266
FRAMING ERROR, 262
UP DRV. SHORT *, 266
HAM. COIL OPEN *, 262
WAITING FOR ETHERNET ADAPTER, 266
HB NOT INSTALLD *, 262
Features list, 23, 28
ILL EXT BUS ACC *, 263
FF Valid at TOF, 88
ILL INST ACCSS *, 263
FIRMWARE ERROR message, 262
ILLGL OPR ACCSS *, 263
Flash messages
INTAKE FAN FAULT, 263
LO DRV. SHORT *, 263
CLEARING PROGRAM FROM FLASH, 260,
263
LOAD PAPER, 263
DIAGNOSTICS PASSED, 260
PAP BAD TABLE *, 263
ERROR DC PROGRAM NOT VALID, 261
PAP BSY TOO LNG *, 263
ERROR DRAM AT ADDRESS XXXXXXXX,
PAP FIFO OVERFL *, 263
261
PAP FIFO UNDRFL *, 263
ERROR EC PROGRAM NOT VALID, 261
PAP ILLGL ST *, 264
ERROR EC STOPPED AT STATE XXXX, 261
PAP INCMPL ENER *, 264
ERROR FLASH NOT DETECTED, 261
PAP INVLD CMD *, 264
ERROR NO DRAM DETECTED, 261
PAP INVLD PARM *, 264
ERROR NVRAM FAILURE, 261
PAP NOT SCHED *, 264
ERROR PROGRAM NEEDS MORE DRAM,
PAP NT AT SPEED *, 264
PAP UNEXP INT *, 264
PARITY ERROR, 264
296
261
ERROR PROGRAM NEEDS MORE FLASH,
261
ERROR PROGRAM NOT COMPATIBLE, 261
ERROR PROGRAM NOT VALID, 261
ERROR SECURITY PAL NOT DETECTED,
HP e3000 / MPE-XL / MPE / iX
Host Configuration, 139
Humidity, operating specifications, 269
I
261
ERROR SHORT AT ADDRESS XXXX, 261
ERROR WRITING TO FLASH, 261, 262
Idle mode, setting duration of, 122
ERROR WRONG CHECKSUM, 262
Ignore / DB8 Setup, 107
LOADING PROGRAM FROM PORT XX%, 263
Ignore Character, 100
RESETTING . . . / PLEASE WAIT, 265
Ignore Dots, 104
RESTORING BOOT CODE, 265
Ignore Spaces, 105
SENDING PROGRAM TO EC PROCESSOR,
IGP 110 Compatible, 106
IGP/PGL Emulation, 97
265
TABLE MISMATCH DOWNLOAD AGAIN, 266
Submenu, 97
Font Attributes, 81
IGP/VGL Emulation, 102
Font Set, 108
IGP100 Compatibility, 101
formfeeds, 181
ILL EXT BUS ACC * message, 263
Forms, slewing, speed, 122
ILL INST ACCSS * message, 263
Framing error handling, 250
ILLGL OPR ACCSS * message, 263
FRAMING ERROR message, 262
Indicators, 29
G
Installation
steps, 61
INTAKE FAN FAULT message, 263
Gateway Address
control panel configuration, 62
Interface, 23, 241
Getting Help Command, 219
host, menu, 110
Graphics Density, 77
RS-232 serial, 248
Graphics Options, 104
Interface specifications, 271
Graphics, creating, 25
Interfaces
Bi-Tronics, 244
Guest, 235
H
Centronics parallel, 112
IP Address
HAM. COIL OPEN * message, 262
control panel configuration, 62
Handshaking, Bi-Tronics interface, 245
L
HB NOT INSTALLD * message, 262
Hex code printout, 257
Hex Dump Mode parameter, 109
Latch Data On parameter
Centronics, 113
High Speed Print, 96
LCD language, selecting, 109
Host Configuration
LED status, 163
Novell, 186
Line printing, 26
Unix, 172
Line Terminator, 78
Host interface menu, 110
Host Setup
Windows 3.1, 161
Host vs Manual, 172
HP 3000 Configuration, 139
LineJet Print Server Configuration
Windows, 150
LineJet Print Server configuration, 142
LineJet Print Server Name
changing, 185
297
LineJet Print Server Naming Scheme, 240
LineJet Print Server Security, 235
NetWare Version 3.x
Novell, 188
NetWare Version 4.x
LinePrinter Plus
Novell, 189, 191
menu, 80
Lines Per Minute (lpm), 27
network connectors, 61
List Commands, 230
Network printing overview, 129
LO DRV. SHORT * message, 263
New Ribbon, 127
Load Configuration parameter, 71
Nibble mode, 244
LOAD PAPER message, 263
Novell
Loading configuration values, 54
environments, 184
Loading emulations, 74
Host Configuration, 186
LOADING PROGRAM FROM PORT XX%, 263
LineJet Print Server configuration, 184
Locking the ENTER key, 42
NetWare 3.x configuration, 186
Logging, 238
NetWare Version 3.x, 188
through logpaths, 239
NetWare Version 4.x, 189, 191
Novell 4.x
Logos, creating, 25
LP PLUS emulations, 74
troubleshooting, 194
LPI, 104
Novell Protocols, 120
LPI Adjust, 78
NPRINTER
M
overview, 186
npsh.exe, 190
Maintenance, 251
O
Manual
printing conventions, 19
Offpage Errors, 107
related documents, 20
onlcr, 181
Manual vs Host, 172
Online signal, 243
Maximum Line Width, 77
Operating modes, 42
Menu, configuration, 41, 68
Operating state upon power-up, configuring, 109
MIB, 289
Optimized Ratio, 101
Midline ^PY (includes ^PN), 106
Optional emulations, 74
Miscellaneous Commands, 232
Output control, 24
Mode
Overrun error handling, 250
auto reset, 29
Overstrike, 85, 93
print quality, 24
Overwriting an existing configuration, 72
P
run, 29
models
setting a formfeed, 181
Page Format, 82
setting onlcr, 181
Page Length Adjust/Inches, 79
Page Length Adjust/Lines, 78
Monitoring, 238
N
Page Length Representation, 77
Page Level Recovery (PLR), 146
Naming Scheme, 240
PAP BAD TABLE * message, 263
NDS setup, 197
PAP BSY TOO LNG * message, 263
Negotiation phase, 245
PAP FIFO OVERFL * message, 263
298
PAP FIFO UNDRFL * message, 263
Port Type, 118
PAP ILLGL ST * message, 264
Power consumption, printer, 270
PAP INCMPL ENER * message, 264
Power On IGP/PGL, 99
PAP INVLD CMD * message, 264
POWER SAVER MODE message, 264
PAP INVLD PARM * message, 264
Power saver time parameter, 122
PAP NOT SCHED * message, 264
Power Stacker parameter, 109
PAP NT AT SPEED * message, 264
POWERSUPPLY HOT * message, 264
PAP UNEXP INT * message, 264
Power-up
Paper jams, 260
configuration, 56
Paper empty (PE) signal, 243
Configuration parameter, 72
Paper instruction (PI) signal, 243
Paper motion detection, 122
Paper out condition, specifying last line of text, 125
State parameter, 109
PPS
Printronix Printing System, 160
Paper Out Dots parameter, 125
Predefined configurations, 42
Paperout adjust test, 124
Prefixes
Parallel interface submenu
Centronics, 112
Parameters
changing, 48
Command, 220
Primary Character Set, 77
Prime Signal parameter, 111
Centronics, 113
locking, 42
Print Char Set, 81
printing the configuration, 52
Print Configuration parameter, 72
saving, 43
Print error log test, 124
Parity
error handling, 250
Print job servers, 130
Print quality, 24
PARITY ERROR message, 264
Print Statistics parameter, 125
Parity parameter, 116
Printer
Passwords, 235
setting, 235
Peer to peer networks, 129
logging, 238
monitoring, 238
specifications and regulatory, 267
Perforation Skip, 82
Printer architecture, 21
Perforation, skipping, setting with control panel, 77
Printer control menu, 121
Phase value test, 124
PRINTER HOT * message, 264
PI Control, 108
Printer Manager utility, 120
PI Ignored parameter, 112
Printer monitoring
PI Slew Range, 98
MIB, 289
Pin assignments
SNMP, 290
RS-232 serial interface, 248
RS-422 serial interface, 248
tools, 291
Printer Protocol, 81
Pinout signals, Bi-Tronics interface, 246
Printer Select, 90, 93
PLAT INV CMD * message, 264
Printer settings, changing, 39
PLAT INV PARM * message, 264
Printing conventions in this manual, 19
PLAT INV STATE * message, 264
Printing direction, 121
PMD Fault parameter, 122
Printing last line of text, paper out condition, 125
299
Response Polarity
Printing speed, 27
Printout, generating hex dump, 109
Centronics, 113
RESTORING BOOT CODE, 265
Printouts
configuration, 52
RIB INVLD CMD * message, 265
hex code, 257
RIB INVLD STATE * message, 265
Printronix Printing System
Ribbon Action, 126
Ribbon Adjust, 127
PPS, 160
Proprinter XL Emulation, 87
RIBBON DRIVE message, 265
Protect Configs., 72
RIBBON INK OUT CHANGE RIBBON
message, 265
Protect parameters, 60
PROTECTED INSTR * message, 264
Ribbon Size, 127
Protecting a configuration, 60
RibbonMinder Fault, 127
Protocols, 25
RIBBONMINDER Menu, 126
RS-232 serial interface, 249
Root, 235
RS-422 serial interface, 249
Rot. Char Size, 105
selecting, 115
Routers
Unix, 171
serial interface, 114
Windows, 151
P-Series Emulation, 84
P-Series XQ Emulation, 95
RPRINTER
overview, 186
PSERVER
RS-232 serial interface, 248
overview, 186
PTX Linefeed, 78
clear to send (CTS), 249
PWRSUPP VOLT * message, 264
configuration, 250
Q
data carrier detect (DCD), 249
data set ready (DSR), 249
QMS Code V-II, 25
error handling, 250
R
RAM, displaying, 125
Received data (RD) signal
RS-232 serial interface, 249
RS-422 serial interface, 249
Regulatory information, 267
Remote Shell
overview, 64
Report Status, 119
Request To Send (RTS) signal
RS-232 serial interface, 249
Request to Send parameter, 116
Reset Cmd CFG Ld
LinePrinter+, 83
PCL-II, 79
Reset Mode, 29
RESETTING . . . / PLEASE WAIT, 265
300
framing error handling, 250
overrun error handling, 250
parity error handling, 250
pin assignments, 248
protocol, 249
request to send (RTS), 249
X-ON/X-OFF signal, 249
RS-232 serial interface signals, 249
data terminal ready (DTR), 249
received data (RD), 249
transmitted data (TD), 249
RS-422 serial interface
configuration, 250
error handling, 250
framing error handling, 250
overrun error handling, 250
parity error handling, 250
pin assignments, 248
Shift recycle test, 123
protocol, 249
SHUTL INV CMD * message, 265
X-ON/X-OFF signal, 249
SHUTL INV PARM * message, 265
RS-422 serial interface signals, 249
Shuttle fast test, 124
received data (RD), 249
SHUTTLE JAM message, 265
transmitted data (TD), 249
Shuttle only test, 124
Run Mode, 29
Shuttle slow test, 124
Running self-tests, 255
Signals
S
Bi-Tronics interface, 245
Centronics parallel interface, 242
Save Configuration parameter, 72
RS-232 serial interface, 249
Saving a configuration, 50
RS-422 serial interface, 249
Saving parameters, 43, 50
Skip Command Prefix, 99
Secondary Character Set, 77
Slash 0, 104
Security
Sleep mode, setting duration of, 122
LineJet Print Server, 235
Slew Relative, 96
SECURITY CODE VIOLATION message, 265
Slewing paper, speed, 122
Select Font, 99
Slow paper slew parameter, 122
Select LPI, 99
SNMP, 290
Select SFCC, 85, 98
SOFTWARE ERROR * message, 265
Selecting
Specifications
power stacker, 109
electrical, 270
power-up configuration, 56
environmental, 269
Selecting language for LCD, 109
Self-tests, 29, 255
interfaces, 271
STACK OVERFLOW * message, 265
running, 255
STACK UNDERFLOW * message, 266
test width, 125
Standard printer features, 23
SENDING PROGRAM TO EC PROCESSOR, 265
Statistics, printer, viewing, 125
Serial interface, 114
Stop Bits parameter, 116
RS-232, 248
Serial interface menu
Buffer Size in K, 116
Store Commands, 220
Subnet Mask
control panel configuration, 62
Data Terminal Ready, 116
Symbol Set Printout, 79
Request to Send, 116
System Memory parameter, 125
Serial Matrix Character Set Menu, 94
T
Serial Matrix Emulation, 92
Service, routine, 251
TABLE MISMATCH DOWNLOAD AGAIN, 266
Set Commands, 223
TCB CORRUPTED * message, 266
Setting a Password, 235
TCP Access Lists, 237
SFCC, 103
TCP/IP Access Problem
SFCC & Pwrup, 103
Windows, 165
SFCC d Command, 86
Test Width parameter, 125
Shell commands, 219
Testing the printer, 255
301
Timeout, 119
Using Page Level Recovery on LineJet
TOF action at prime signal parameter, 111, 113
Printers, 146
V
Transmitted data (TD) signal
RS-232 serial interface, 249
RS-422 serial interface, 249
Vertical formatting features
Trickle Time, 119
electronic vertical formatting, 24
Troubleshooting
EVFU for Epson mode, 24
vertical tabbing (Proprinter and Epson), 24
diagnostic tools, 24
VFU Select, 86, 96
Novell 4.x, 194
W
Truncate Alpha, 105
U
UNDEF INTERRUPT * message, 266
WAITING FOR ETHERNET ADAPTER
message, 266
UNDFNED OPCODE * message, 266
Wattage, printer, 270
Unidirectional parameter, 121
Windows
Unix
communicating, 151
communicating, 171
environment description, 149
environments, 170
LineJet Print Server configuration, 150
host configuration, 172
mandatory configuration, 150
LineJet Print Server configuration, 171
NT 3.51configuration, 153, 154
routers, 171
optional configuration, 150
using BOOTP, 137
routers, 151
Unlocking the ENTER key, 42
TCP/IP access problem, 165
UP DRV. SHORT * message, 266
using ARP, 135
UPC Descenders, 100, 105
Upper Case Select, 96
URL
home page, 65
Users, 235
Windows ‘ 95, 160
configuration, 160
Windows 3.1
host setup, 161
Windows NT, 153
X
Using ARP
Windows, 135
Using BOOTP
Unix, 137
302
X-ON/X-OFF signal
RS-232 serial interface, 249
RS-422 serial interface, 249
Copyright© 2000
Hewlett-Packard Company
172720-001A
Download PDF

advertising